JP2018201927A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of performing smooth control even if various situations are compounded.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a casing part 12; a main control board provided in the casing part 12; a first rotatable rotating drum 51L to a third rotating drum 51R provided in the casing 12; a performance part 18 capable of performing display regarding a game provided in the casing 12; a start switch for rotating the rotating drums; and a stop button sensor for stopping the rotating drums under rotation. In preparation for composition of a predetermined operation situation and another, predetermined operation situation, countermeasures performed in a main control board are predetermined, thus preventing unexpected operation from being performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine or a pachinko gaming machine in which a game medium is inserted, stopped after the reel is rotated, and a game result is determined by a combination of symbols drawn on the reel displayed at that time. .

Conventionally, a slot machine (rotating machine) is known as one of gaming machines. In this slot machine, a player inserts a game medium such as a game medal and operates a start lever to rotate a plurality of reels on which a pattern is drawn. Thereafter, the player operates the stop button to stop each of the spinning cylinders, and depending on the stopped combination of symbols (display result), a predetermined number of game medals can be paid out. In addition, in the slot machine, the overall taste is improved by performing various effects in addition to such basic games.
JP 2017-018540 A

  By the way, in this kind of slot machine, individual basic operations such as accepting insertion of game media (game medals, etc.), rotation of the reel (reel), effect control, stop of the reel, and payout of game medals, etc. are a series. It is repeated as an operation. In any case, it is desirable that these operations are appropriately performed. However, when various situations occur in combination, an unexpected operation may be performed. Therefore, it is effective to assume in advance as many complex situations as possible and to determine in advance what kind of operation is to be performed at that time.

  The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smooth control even when various situations are combined.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides game control means (such as a main control board) for controlling the progress of a game,
Display control means (such as a sub control board) for controlling the effect display related to the game,
The game control means can perform freeze processing (freeze production etc.) for a predetermined time when starting a predetermined gaming state advantageous to the player,
The display control means can display an effect (special state start display, special state end display, etc.) based on display data as an effect to be displayed when the freeze process is being performed,
The display data includes at least first display data and second display data,
The freeze process performed until the power was turned off in the situation where the power was restored after the power was cut off during the freeze process and during the display of the effect based on the first display data (the effect in the special state start display) The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means displays an effect based on the second display data (effect in the start-up end display).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of smooth control even when various situations are combined.

It is a perspective view of the slot machine which concerns on one Example of this invention. It is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state where the front door portion is opened. It is a rear view of a front door part. It is a front view which shows the inside of a housing | casing part. (A) is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of each control board, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the component configuration in the main control board. It is a perspective view which shows a game medal selector. It is a perspective view which opens and shows a game medal selector. (A) is a chart showing detection modes of the insertion sensors 1 and 2 when a game medal is normally inserted, (b) is a chart showing other detection modes of the insertion sensors 1 and 2 that are not regarded as errors, and (c) is a chart. It is a timing chart which shows the detection mode of C0 error. (A) is a timing chart which shows the detection aspect of C1 error, (b) is a timing chart which shows the detection aspect of CH error. It is a timing chart which shows the detection mode of CE error. It is explanatory drawing which shows the memory map which concerns on main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power activation in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change apparatus process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process of an internal lottery start. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a condition apparatus command set. It is a flowchart which shows a display determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process of error management. It is a flowchart which shows a power supply return process. It is a flowchart which shows a game medal reception start process. (A) is a flowchart which shows a blocker ON process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a blocker OFF process. It is a flowchart which shows an error display process. It is a flowchart which shows an input error set process. It is a flowchart which shows a game medal management process. It is a flowchart which shows storage input processing. It is a flowchart which shows a game medal clearing process. It is a flowchart which shows a nonrecoverable error process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of RWM initialization 2 in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of RWM initialization 3 in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the serial communication setting in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the symbol stop signal output in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the symbol stop signal set in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the test signal output in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the insertion / withdrawal sensor abnormality set in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of input / payout sensor abnormality clear in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the error check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a set value error check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the internal random number check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the timer measurement 2 in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the game medal insertion check in 2nd control. 43 is a flowchart showing a game medal insertion check process following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game medal passage state update process in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of an injection | throwing-in / out sensor abnormality check in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of an input / payout sensor abnormality check following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the error display request data clear in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the process of an 8-bit random number test | inspection in 2nd control. It is a flowchart which shows the unrecoverable error process 2 in 2nd control. (A) is a timing chart which shows an example of the management aspect which concerns on the minimum game time at the time of normal, (B) is a timing chart which shows an example of the management aspect which concerns on the minimum game time at the time of a resettable error. (A) is a timing chart which shows an example of the management aspect which concerns on the minimum game time at the time of an unrecoverable error, (B) is a timing chart which shows an example of the management aspect which concerns on the minimum game time at the time of game medal liquidation. (A) is a timing chart which shows an example of the management aspect which concerns on the minimum game time at the time of game medal insertion, (B) is a timing chart which shows an example of the management aspect which concerns on the minimum game time at the time of setting value confirmation. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the minimum game time and the test signal output. (A)-(c) is a table | surface which shows the 3rd response | compatibility from the 1st response | compatibility at the time of a power failure generation | occurrence | production. (A)-(d2) is a table | surface which shows the 7th response | compatibility from the 4th response | compatibility at the time of a power failure generation | occurrence | production. (A), (b) is a table | surface which shows the 1st response | compatibility at the time of error occurrence, and a 2nd response | compatibility. It is a flowchart which shows the injection | throwing-in / out sensor abnormality display process in 1st control. (A) is a flowchart showing a basic operation according to the countermeasure pattern 1, (b) is a flowchart showing a countermeasure pattern 1-1 when a power-off situation occurs, and (c) is a power-off situation. It is a flowchart which shows the countermeasure pattern 1-2 concerning a case. (A) is a flowchart showing a basic operation according to the countermeasure pattern 2, (b) is a flowchart showing a countermeasure pattern 2-1 when a situation of a rotating cylinder rotation failure occurs, and (c) is also a rotating cylinder rotation failure. It is a flowchart which shows the countermeasure pattern 2-2 which concerns when a condition generate | occur | produces. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a change in the rotating speed of the rotating drum with respect to the countermeasure pattern 2 and the like, (b) is a timing chart showing a basic operation when the symbol is stopped with respect to the countermeasure pattern 3-2, and (c) is a countermeasure pattern similarly It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement at the time of rotation failure generation regarding 3-2. (A) is a flowchart showing a basic operation according to the countermeasure pattern 3, (b) is a flowchart showing a countermeasure pattern 3-1 when a rotation failure situation occurs, and (c) is also a rotation failure situation. It is a flowchart which shows the countermeasure pattern 3-2 concerning a case. (A) is a timing chart showing a countermeasure pattern 3-1-1A related to a situation where a power interruption occurs while pressing the third stop, and (b) is a countermeasure relating to a situation where a power interruption occurs while pressing the third stop. It is a timing chart which shows pattern 3-1-1B. (A) is a timing chart showing the countermeasure pattern 4-7-1 related to the door opening notification sound and the payout sound, and (b) is a timing chart showing the countermeasure pattern 4-7-2 related to the door opening notification sound and the payout sound. It is.

<Outline of slot machine according to this embodiment>

  Hereinafter, a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 shows the appearance of a slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment from the front. The slot machine 10 is configured by combining the front door portion 11 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and the housing portion 12 shown in FIG. And the front door part 11 is supported by the housing | casing part 12 via a hinge apparatus, and can be locked in the state closed with respect to the housing | casing part 12. FIG.

  On the front side (front side) of the front door portion 11, as shown in FIG. 1, an operation unit 14 is arranged in the middle in the vertical direction, and a rotating cylinder display unit 15 is arranged above the operation unit 14. . Further, at the lower part of the front door portion 11, a game medal payout opening 16 that is opened in a rectangular shape and a tray 17 that receives the game medal released from the game medal payout exit 16 are arranged. A production unit 18 is arranged above the. Further, a translucent lower panel 19 on which a name unique to the model, a design image, and the like are drawn is provided below the operation unit 14.

  Among these, the operation unit 14 is provided with a game medal slot 21, a game medal return button 22, a lock part 23 (also referred to as a lock unit), a stop button unit 24, a start lever 25, and the like. Further, a main input unit 26 and a sub input unit 27 are provided at the upper part of the operation unit 14. Although not shown in the figure, the main input unit 26 has a clearing button, a single button (so-called 1 BET). Button), a three-sheet insertion button (a so-called MAXBET button) is provided. Further, although not shown, the sub input unit 27 is provided with a cross key, a sub input switch, and the like.

  The game medal slot 21 is used to insert a game medal as a game medium through a guide, and the game medal return button 22 is used to return a retained game medal to a game medal selector (described later). Is used. The lock portion 23 is used by inserting a predetermined key when the front door portion 11 is unlocked, and the stop button portion 24 includes three rotary cylinders (first rotary cylinder 51L, The second cylinder 51C and the third cylinder 51R) are used to stop the rotation.

  The stop button portion 24 is provided with three stop buttons (a first stop button 24L, a second stop button 24C, and a third stop button 24R). These stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R are associated with the respective spinning cylinders 51L, 51C, and 51R. By pressing the stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R individually, the corresponding spinning cylinders 51L, 51C, and 51R are associated with each other. Is supposed to stop. In the present embodiment, the first to third drums 51L to 51R are arranged from the left when viewed from the front of the slot machine 10 from the first drum 51L, the second drum 51C, and the third drum 51R. The stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R are arranged in the order of the first stop button 24L, the second stop button 24C, and the third stop button 24R from the left. The start lever 25 is also used when rotating the rotating drum and confirming a set value (described later).

  The clearing button in the main input unit 26 is used when paying out game medals inserted and clearing game medals stored in a storage device (described later). The 1-sheet insertion button is used when inserting the stored game medals one by one, and the 3-sheet insertion button does not exceed the number of stored game medals and a prescribed number (described later) relating to the insertion. It is used when a maximum of three stored game medals are inserted. The sub input switch in the sub input unit 27 is used for performing operations related to effects, and is used for switching display contents such as a liquid crystal screen provided in the effect unit 18 and inputting related to effects.

  Furthermore, although not shown in the drawing, the operation unit 14 is provided with various display units that indicate game contents depending on whether or not the LED emits light, the display mode of a 7-segment (7-segment) display, and the like. As various display units indicating the game status, there are an acquired number display unit, a stored number display unit, a re-game display unit, an input display unit, a stop display unit, a game start display unit, an input number display unit, and the like. Characters are printed in the vicinity of these various display units so that it can be understood what information display function each display unit has. Further, among these display units, the acquired number display unit and the stored number display unit have a function of displaying numbers, characters, etc. using a 7-segment display, and the other display units are LED lighting. Predetermined information is displayed according to the presence / absence and lighting mode. And about the LED used as a light source for each display part, below, acquisition number display LED, storage number display LED, re-game display LED, insertion display LED, stop display LED, game start display LED, input number display Sometimes referred to as an LED.

  Of the various display units, the acquired number display unit is used for any one of the display of the number of game medals according to the acquired number, the display at the time of setting switching, and the display of the error code. Used. The stored number display unit displays the number of game medals stored in the storage device, and the regame display unit displays whether or not a regame is activated. Further, the insertion display unit displays that the game medal can be inserted, and the stop display unit displays that the stored game medal is being settled. The game start display unit displays that the operation of the start lever 25 can be accepted in a state where the game can be started. Further, the inserted number display unit displays the number of inserted game medals, and displays the same number of game medals as the previous game when the re-game is activated.

  The aforementioned stop button section 24 is provided with three stop buttons: a first stop button 24L, a second stop button 24C, and a third stop button 24R. In addition, the rotary display unit 15 includes a rotary display panel 28 in which a rectangular display window is closed with a transparent panel. Through the rotary display panel 28, in FIG. 2 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the three cylinders (reels) of the first cylinder 51L to the third cylinder 51R housed in the housing unit 12 can be visually recognized. In addition, the rendering unit 18 is provided with a liquid crystal display device or the like, and the rendering unit 18 displays a rendering associated with the game.

  Moreover, the front door part 11 is provided with various light sources (LED) used for production. Examples of the light source for production include a three-sheet insertion display LED, a stop button LED, and a sub-input display LED, which are not shown. Among these, the three-sheet insertion display LED illuminates the three-sheet insertion button arranged in the main input unit 26 from the inside, and is used for displaying the effect contents using the three-sheet insertion button. Further, the stop button LED illuminates the stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R from the inside, and is used for display of the effect contents using the stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R. Further, the sub input display LED illuminates the sub input switch arranged in the sub input unit 27 described above from the inside, and is used for displaying the effect contents using the sub input switch.

  In addition to these, although the illustration is omitted as a light source for production, the upper part of the rotating cylinder LED, the lower part of the rotating cylinder LED, the side LED, the chance LED, the left wing LED, the lower left circle LED, the right wing LED, the lower right circle There are LED, upper left circle LED, upper LED, upper right circle LED, AR lamp LED, lower panel illumination LED, left mini LED, right mini LED, V-shaped LED and the like. Any of the light sources is used for displaying the contents of effects according to the arrangement and function.

  FIG. 3 shows the back side of the front door portion 11. Various substrates, devices for handling game medals, various sensors, and the like are disposed on the back side of the front door portion 11. Among these, the sub-control board 31, the image control board 32, the image display connection board 33, the sound board 34, the production ROM (ROM) board 35, the switch sensor board 36, the display board 37, and the door relay terminal board are used as various boards. 38, a rotary illumination board 39, a lower panel illumination board 40, and the like.

  Among these, the sub-control board 31 is a board for controlling a production image, various solenoids, various LEDs, and sound effects. The sub control board 31 is housed in a dedicated board case, and is attached to the front door part 11 by screwing the board case to the front door part 11.

  The image control board 32 is mounted with an audio board 34 and an effect ROM board 35, which will be described later, and relays between the sub-control board 31 and the image display connection board 33 to control an effect image and sound effect. It is. The image control board 32 is housed in a dedicated board case, and is attached to the front door portion 11 by screwing the board case to the front door portion 11.

  The image display connection board 33 is a board that relays between the image control board 32 and the liquid crystal display of the rendering section 18, and is fixed by screwing into a screw hole provided in the front door section 11. . The audio board 34 is a board to which a ROM storing audio data for production is attached, and is fixed by screwing into a screw hole provided in the image control board 32. The effect ROM board 35 is a board to which ROM that stores image data for effects is attached, and is fixed by screwing into a screw hole provided in the image control board 32. The various ROMs may be fixed by inserting pins provided on the ROM into sockets provided on the board to be mounted. Furthermore, not only the various substrates are fixed by screws, but also the connectors provided on the various substrates may be fixed by being fitted to the connectors provided on the other door, case, substrate or the like. Such a substrate fixing method can be similarly applied to various substrates described below. The image control connection board is not necessarily provided, and the image control board 32 may be directly connected to the rendering unit 18 and mounted.

  The switch sensor board 36 relays between the sub-control board 31 and two solenoids (first solenoid and second solenoid), which will be described later, to display the effect contents by the LED, or to switch and input the liquid crystal screen. It is a substrate. The switch sensor substrate 36 is fixed by screwing into a screw hole provided in the dedicated substrate case.

  The display board 37 is a board to which the above-mentioned acquired number display LED, stored number display LED, re-game display LED, insertion display LED, stop display LED, game start display LED and insertion number display LED are attached, and a front door portion. 11 is fixed by being fitted into a hook provided on the head 11. The door relay terminal board 38 is a board that relays between a main control board (described later) and various sensors, blockers 47 (described later), and a display board 37 disposed at various locations on the front door portion 11. . The door relay terminal plate 38 is mounted in the front door portion 11 by being housed in a dedicated substrate case and screwed to the front door portion 11.

  The spinning cylinder illumination board 39 is a board to which LEDs for illuminating the first spinning cylinder 51L to the third spinning cylinder 51R are attached, and is fitted and fixed to a hook provided on the front door portion 11. The lower panel illumination board 40 is a board having a vertically divided structure to which LEDs for illuminating the lower panel 19 are attached, and is fixed by being fitted into a hook provided on the front door portion 11. The lower panel illumination board 40 is a board on which LEDs are attached to illuminate the lower panel, and is fixed by being fitted into a hook provided on the front door portion 11.

  Subsequently, various devices such as various sensors provided on the front door unit 11 include a start lever sensor 41, a three-sheet loading button sensor 42, a one-sheet loading / clearing button switch 43, a game medal selector 44, a loading sensor 45, a selector. There are a passage sensor 46, a blocker 47, a game medal return passage 48, a stop button sensor 49, a speaker 50, and the like. Among these, the start lever sensor 41 is for detecting the operation of the start lever 25, and the three-sheet insertion button sensor 42 is for detecting the operation of the three-sheet insertion button.

  Further, the single-load / checkout button switch 43 is a device equipped with a single-sheet input button and a checkout button switch. The game medal selector 44 is a device to which an insertion sensor 45, a selector passage sensor 46, and a blocker 47, which will be described later, are attached. The game medal selector 44 also selects whether or not the inserted game medal is within an acceptable range. The aforementioned insertion sensor 45 is a sensor for detecting the insertion of a game medal, and the selector passage sensor 46 is a sensor for detecting the passage of a game medal. Further, the blocker 47 is a device for returning game medals according to the gaming state, and the game medal return passage 48 is a passage when the game medals are returned. The stop button sensor 49 is a sensor for detecting the operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R, and a plurality of speakers 50 are provided for outputting sound effects.

  Although not shown, the front door portion 11 is provided with a solenoid 1, a solenoid 2, and a cross key board. Among these, the solenoid 1 and the solenoid 2 are devices for vibrating the sub input switch. The cross key board is a board for switching and inputting a liquid crystal screen. The board is housed in a dedicated board case and fixed by screwing the dedicated case.

  FIG. 4 shows the front side of the housing 12. A main control board 61, a setting unit 62, a game medal payout device (hopper) 63, a power supply unit 64, and the like are disposed in the housing unit 12. Of these, the main control board 61 controls the input and output to the slot machine 10 to control the game, and the reference numerals are omitted, but a stop switch, setting display LED, monitor LED, etc., which will be described later, are attached. It is a substrate. The main control board 61 accommodates a board in a main board case 65 which is a dedicated board case, and the main board case 65 is fixed to the main board case 65 with a dedicated stopper, and is attached to the housing unit 12. The setting display LED 66 displays a setting value that prescribes theoretical ease (a player's advantage). The stop switch is set to either the upper side or the lower side and selects either the stop function or the automatic settlement function, but since the stop function and the automatic settlement function are not installed in this embodiment, This stop switch is not used. Therefore, the stop switch does not affect the game result. An IC tag seal seal (not shown) is affixed to the main board case 65, and this IC tag seal seal is a seal paper in which the IC tag is embedded.

  Further, the housing unit 12 is provided with a door switch 60, and the door switch 60 is a switch for detecting opening and closing of the front door unit 11. The setting unit 62 described above is a box that stores a setting door switch 67, a setting key switch 68, and a setting / reset button 69 ("/" means "or"), which will be described later. Among these, the setting door switch 67 is a switch for detecting opening and closing of a setting door that constitutes a part of the casing of the setting unit 62 and closes the setting unit 62. The setting key switch 68 is a switch for switching settings and confirming the settings in the slot machine, and the setting / reset button 69 is a button for selecting the setting value or canceling the error. The setting door switch 67 is not necessarily provided. In this embodiment, the setting / reset button 69 is used as a setting button and a reset button, but may be provided separately. Furthermore, when the lock 23 has the setting and reset functions, for example, when the key inserted into the lock 23 is rotated to the right, the lock is released, and when the lock is rotated to the left, It may function as a setting / reset switch. Also, any one of the setting key switch 68 and the setting / reset button 69 shown in FIG. 4 may be provided separately from the setting unit 62. For example, a setting key cylinder (not shown) provided with a setting key switch 68 is provided in the power supply unit 64, and a setting / reset button 69 is provided in the setting unit 62.

  Further, the housing portion 12 is provided with an external concentration terminal plate 70. The external concentration terminal plate 70 outputs a medal insertion signal output, a medal payout signal output, an external signal output 1 to an external signal output 5 to the outside. It is a board | substrate with which monitor LED (7 pieces) was attached while outputting. The external concentrated terminal board 70 is fixed to the casing 12 by being fitted into a hook provided on the casing 12.

  The aforementioned game medal payout device 63 is provided with a payout sensor (not shown; sometimes referred to as “payout sensor”), and this payout sensor detects a game medal that has been paid out. It is.

  Further, a game medal auxiliary storage 71 is provided in the casing 12, and the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is a storage for storing game medals exceeding the storage capacity of the game medal payout device 63. It is. The game medal auxiliary storage 71 is provided with a full detection electrode (not shown), and this full detection electrode is an electrode for detecting the full state of the game medal auxiliary storage.

  The power supply unit 64 described above is a box that houses a power switch 72, and the power switch 72 is a switch for turning on and off the main power supply. When the power switch 72 is turned on from OFF, predetermined power is supplied to various devices including the control board and the like via the power unit 64.

  Further, the casing unit 12 is provided with the above-described first cylinder 51L to third cylinder 51R. The rotating drums 51L to 51R are devices for rotating a symbol drawn on the outer peripheral surface. Inside each of the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R, a rotating cylinder sensor (not shown) is provided, and this rotating cylinder sensor has a reference position of the rotating rotating cylinder as a reference (hereinafter referred to as an index). This portion may be referred to as an “index”).

  Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the casing 12 is provided with a BL (backlight) relay board, a spinning device board, a backlight LED, an LED backlight board, and the like. Among these, the BL relay board is a board that relays between the sub-control board 31 and an LED backlight board, a cylinder sensor, and the like which will be described later. The BL relay board is mounted on the casing unit 12 by storing the board in a dedicated board case and fixing the board case with a dedicated stopper.

In addition, the rotating device board is a board that relays between the main control board 61, a rotating stepping motor (described later), and a rotating sensor in order to rotate or stop the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R. Also, it is a board that relays between the main control board 61 and the above-described full detection electrode, door switch 60, game medal payout device 63, external concentration terminal board 70 and power supply unit 64. The spinning device substrate is mounted on the housing 12 by housing the substrate in a dedicated substrate case and fixing the substrate case with a dedicated stopper. Backlight LED is LED which is arrange | positioned inside each spinning cylinder 51L-51R, and illuminates the design on spinning cylinders 51L-51R from a back surface. The LED backlight substrate is a substrate on which the backlight LED is mounted.
<Electric basic configuration of various control boards>

  Next, an electrical basic configuration of the above-described main control board 61, sub control board 31, and image control board 32 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5A, the main control board 61 stores a main CPU 81 that performs control related to the progress of the game, a program (game control program) used for game control of the main CPU 81, and various data. Various electronic components such as a main ROM 82, a readable / writable RWM 83 for temporarily storing data for control related to the progress of the game, an interface unit (not shown), and the like are provided. In this embodiment, the game control program is roughly divided into two control programs, a first control program and a second control program. Control executed based on the first control program can be referred to as first control, and control executed based on the second control program can be referred to as second control. Further, the first control may be referred to as “control used for gaming” and the second control may be referred to as “control not used for gaming”, and the details thereof will be described later.

  The sub-control board 31 stores a sub-main CPU 86 that performs control for effects based on a command from the main control board 61, a program (effect control program) used for effect control of the sub-main CPU 86, and various data. In addition, various electronic components such as a sub main ROM 87, a readable / writable RWM 88 for temporarily storing data for effect control, an interface unit (not shown), and the like are provided. The sub control board 31 receives a command (main command) transmitted from the main control board 61 and performs control based on the main command. Then, the sub control board 31 transmits a command (sub main command) for image display and sound (sound) output to the image control board 32.

The image control board 32 includes a sub-sub CPU 91 that performs image control based on a sub-main command from the sub-control board 31, a program (image control program) used for image control of the sub-sub CPU 91, and an effect ROM 92 that stores various data. Based on commands from the sub-sub CPU 91, VDP 94 controls image display using image data stored in the character ROM 93, sound chip 96 controls sound output using sound data stored in the sound ROM 95, image display and sound Various electronic components such as a readable / writable RWM 97 for temporarily storing data for output and the like, an interface unit (not shown), and the like are provided. Here, the effect ROM 92 is mounted on the above-described effect ROM board 35, and the sound ROM 95 is mounted on the above-described sound board 34. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the sub-control board 31 may supplement a part of the functions of the image control board 32 and all the functions. For example, the audio ROM 95 may be provided on the sub-control board 31 and audio data may be selected and output controlled without going through the image control board 32, or the sub-control board 31 may be provided with the character ROM 93 and VDP 94. Note that more specific operations of the main control board 61, the sub control board 31, and the image control board 32 will be described later.
<< Part configuration related to main control board >>

  Next, the outline of the component configuration of the main control board 61 will be described. The main control board 61 is a rectangular board-like wiring board having printed wiring, and in this embodiment, a board having a multi-layer structure (here, two layers) is used. Furthermore, a predetermined hole of the main control board 61 is provided with a through hole for mounting a lead type electronic component, and soldering such as a flow type is performed with the lead inserted into the through hole. Thus, the lead-type electronic equipment is mounted on the main control board 61. Further, not only lead type electronic components but also surface mount type electronic components can be mounted on the main control board 61.

  FIG. 5B schematically shows a mounting surface which is the surface side of the main control board 61. A main CPU 81 that is a lead type packaging device is mounted on the main control board 61. The main CPU 81 is mounted by inserting the lead of the main CPU 81 into a lead-type socket soldered to the main control board 61 and fitting it. Furthermore, on the main control board 61, various electronic components 181 and various connectors 182 are soldered as shown in part.

  Among these, the various connectors 182 are arranged along the peripheral edge (outer edge) of the main control board 61, and the connection ports are exposed to the outside from the main board case 65 described above. And, to the various connectors 182, for example, connectors provided in harnesses from boards related to external devices such as the above-mentioned sub control board 31, rotor device board, various LED boards, etc. are fitted, and the main control board 61 and Used for electrical connection with various external devices.

  In FIG. 5B, reference numeral 183 denotes a non-mounting area where no connector is provided. This non-mounting area 183 is an area reserved for mounting an emergency connector for connecting a testing machine at the stage of product development. From the development stage to the commercialization of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In this transition, the emergency connector is removed. In the non-mounting region 183, the plate surface of the main control board 61 is exposed, and a plurality of through holes 184 for inserting leads of the emergency connector can be visually observed. Since the mounting position of the emergency connector is the peripheral edge of the main control board 61 as described above, the non-mounting area 183 is also positioned on the peripheral edge of the board, which is outside the main CPU 81. In FIG. 5B, only a part of the through hole of the emergency connector is shown in order to avoid complicated drawing.

  The emergency connector is used to connect to the main control board 61 a performance tester (not shown) used in the development stage, particularly in the stage of obtaining official approval. More specifically, a test relay board (not shown) is connected to the emergency connector, and a performance tester is connected to the test relay board. The performance tester receives the test data signal taken out via the test relay board, and the performance tester receives the performance data of the slot machine 10 based on the input test data signal. get.

  The test relay board is not used at the stage of commercialization, and is not provided in the commercialized slot machine 10. Further, a test drive circuit (test driver) is used for outputting the test data signal. This test driver is mounted on the test relay board. In the commercialized slot machine 10, the test is performed. The area for mounting the driver is not provided in the main control board 61. Further, the components such as the shape of the emergency connector, the size of each part, the number of pins, and the color are different from those of the other various connectors 182, and it is structurally different from the mating connector connected to the other connector. Connection is not possible.

  On the other hand, in the commercialization stage, since the performance tester is not connected, the emergency connector is not mounted when the main control board 61 is manufactured. However, if the printed wiring of the main control board 61 and the game machine control program are changed in accordance with the fact that the emergency connector is not installed, the slot machine 10 that has been commercialized and the slot machine at the time of the test The condition cannot be matched. Moreover, if an emergency connector is also left in the commercialized slot machine 10 so as not to change the conditions, a connector that can be fitted with the emergency connector is used in the device for fraud, and fraud is easy. It is also possible to become.

  For this reason, the emergency connector is deleted to take measures against fraud, and in order to minimize changes in conditions, the printed wiring for the emergency connector remains in the same form as when the emergency connector is mounted. . In addition, solder is supplied to the through hole 184 for the emergency connector, and the through hole 184 for the emergency connector is blocked over the entire length by the solder. By closing the through hole 184 with solder, an illegal act using the through hole 184 can be prevented. Further, the wiring for the emergency connector can be conducted with other wiring (for example, grounding wiring) by soldering.

  Furthermore, it is conceivable that the solder after solidification rises to a certain extent (for example, about 0.1 mm) and protrudes from the substrate surface due to the surface tension of the molten solder during soldering. However, as described above, since the emergency connector is not mounted at the time of commercialization, the raised solder does not come into contact with the emergency connector or other electronic components. The through hole 184 can be closed with a material other than solder (for example, a solder resist), but in this case, solder for closing the through hole 184 is not necessary. It is also possible to leave the through hole 184 open without closing it. In this case, a material for closing the through hole 184 becomes unnecessary.

Although not shown, the main board case 65 is configured by combining a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base made of transparent resin and a box cover that is also made of transparent resin and covers the opening of the box base. Has been. In the box cover, a hole for exposing the permanent connector 182 is provided at a position corresponding to a mounting area of various permanent connectors 182 that are used even after commercialization, but the emergency connector is not mounted. In the position corresponding to the region 183, the hole for exposing the emergency connector is not left, and the non-mounting region 183 is sealed.
<Mechanism related to rotation of rotating cylinder>

  Next, a mechanism for rotating the first cylinder 51L to the third cylinder 51R described above will be described. A reel tape is attached to the outer peripheral surface of each of the drums 51L to 51R, and a predetermined number of symbols are drawn on the reel tape. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols is 21 each. The sizes of all the rotating drums are set to be the same, and the rotation axes are positioned on the same straight line. Further, each of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R is connected to and integrated with the spinning cylinder rotating device 54 shown in FIG. 4, and the rotating shaft of the rotating cylinder 54 is integrated with the rotating cylinder rotating device 54. It is rotationally driven in a state directed in the left-right direction. Here, the arrangement of symbols in the first cylinder 51L to the third cylinder 51R and the control mode relating to the symbol display will be described later. The number of symbols is not limited to 21 and may be 20 or 14 for example.

  The rotating drum rotating device 54 is a device for rotating the first rotating drum 51L to the third rotating drum 51R, and operates by operating the start lever 25, and the first rotating drum 51L to the third rotating drum 51R. It has a function to rotate.

  Although not shown in the drawings, the rotating device 54 includes a rotating stepping motor, a reel bush, a rotating sensor, a rotating device substrate, and the like, and includes a first control program and a second control program as will be described later. It is controlled by a computer program (game control program). Each of the first cylinder 51L to the third cylinder 51R is indented into a stainless steel shaft of a cylinder stepping motor via a cylindrical reel bushing, and a cylinder stepping motor via a screw and a resin washer. It is fixed to the shaft. The shaft of the rotating stepping motor is used as the shaft of the first rotating cylinder 51L to the third rotating cylinder 51R, the rotating stepping motor is fixed to a motor frame made of metal or the like with screws, and the rotating cylinder rotating device 54 The above-mentioned motor frame is inserted into a metal-made reel frame that becomes the skeleton of the frame and fixed by a latch (here, a so-called snap latch having a plunger or a grommet). The first cylinder 51L to the third cylinder 51R are not shaken (they do not move in the rotational direction or the axial direction).

  When stopping the first cylinder 51L to the third cylinder 51R, the cylinder rotating device 54 functions as a rotation stopping device. That is, the rotation stopping device has a function of stopping the rotating drum and a function of displaying a combination of symbols. Of these, the function of stopping the rotating drum is a function of stopping the rotating drum corresponding to the pressed stop button when there is an individual pressing operation of the stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R. Further, the function of displaying the combination of symbols is to stop all the three first torso 51L to third torso 51R by the above-mentioned function to stop the torso and to make the first torso 51L to third torso 51R. This is a function for displaying a combination of symbols.

Further, the rotation stop device is composed of stop buttons 24L, 24C, 24R, a stop button sensor, a door relay terminal plate, a turning stepping motor, a turning sensor, and a turning device substrate, and is controlled by the above-described game control program. The player operates when the player operates the stop button, and does not operate otherwise. Here, each of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R is formed with an index serving as an index of the rotation angle. Based on the positional relationship between this index and each of the symbols drawn on each of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R, the spinning cylinder The position of the symbol when rotation stops is controlled.
<Control of mechanism related to rotation of rotating cylinder>

  Each of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R has various data described below, that is, a spinning cylinder driving state number, a spinning cylinder driving pulse output counter, a number of times of switching of a spinning cylinder driving pulse during acceleration, a step number of symbols, a symbol number (passing) Position), symbol number (for stop position), rotation rotation failure detection counter, rotation drive pulse data search counter, rotation rotation start standby counter, and the like. The driving state of each spinning cylinder is checked by the spinning cylinder drive management module every interruption (2.235 ms), and excitation data is output according to the conditions.

  Among the above-mentioned various data, the rotating drum drive state number has a value of 0 to 5, 0 is during stoppage or fluctuation fluctuation, 1 is waiting for rotation start, 2 is decelerating, 3 is deceleration start, 4 represents constant speed and 5 represents acceleration. In addition, the revolution drive pulse output counter represents the number of interruptions for switching the excitation, and the revolution drive pulse switching number during acceleration represents the offset of the rise pattern (interrupt number) table of the revolution, The step number represents the number of steps of one symbol.

Furthermore, the symbol number (for passing position) represents the symbol number (0 to 20) passing through the middle stage, and when the value is FFH (H represents hexadecimal notation) This means that the rotation sensor has not passed. The symbol number (for the stop position) represents the symbol number (0 to 20) to be displayed in the middle stage. When the value is FFH, it indicates that the symbol number is not set. The rotation rotation failure detection counter is a counter that detects rotation failure of the rotation cylinder, and outputs a value of the number of steps / 2 after passing the sensor. Further, when each of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R passes through the spinning cylinder sensor, the spinning cylinder driving state number becomes “4” of “at constant speed”.
<Game medal selector>
<<< Composition of game medal selector >>>

  Next, the aforementioned game medal selector 44 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the game medal selector 44 is on the open end side (the left end side in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3) of the front door portion 11 on the back surface of the front door portion 11, and It is attached to a substantially middle part in the vertical direction. Further, the game medal selector 44 is located at a position immediately below the spinning cylinder display unit 15, and the game medal inserted in the game medal slot 21 (see FIG. 1) on the front surface of the front door unit 11 is displayed on the front surface. It is designed to be received behind the door portion 11.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the game medal selector 44 has a rectangular box-shaped outer shape, and includes a main body portion 101, an opening / closing portion 102, and a hinge mechanism portion 103. Among these, the main body 101 is fixed to the front door portion 11, and an opening / closing portion 102 is attached to the main body 101 so as to be opened and closed via a hinge mechanism portion 103 as shown in FIG. 7. Furthermore, the arrangement of the hinge mechanism portion 103 is a portion on the right side when viewed from the back side of the front door portion 11, and the opening / closing portion 102 is located on the hinge mechanism portion 103 around the axis of the hinge mechanism portion 103 extending in the vertical direction. It can be opened horizontally while resisting the elastic restoring force of the provided coil spring 104 and the like.

  When the opening / closing part 102 is closed, a medal passage 105 having a width somewhat larger than the thickness of one game medal is formed between the main body part 101 and the opening / closing part 102. That is, the medal passage 105 opens upward in a slit shape, bends and branches at an intermediate position, and faces the side of the game medal selector 44 (right side when viewed from the back of the front door portion 11) or downward. Is growing. The upper end of the medal passage 105 is a game medal entrance (game medal entrance) 106, and the opening serving as the game medal entrance 106 communicates with the game medal slot 21 described above. Further, a side exit (hereinafter referred to as “first exit”) 107 of the game medal selector 44 is configured to be able to discharge game medals toward the game medal payout device 63 described above. 108 (referred to as “second exit”) can discharge game medals toward the aforementioned game medal payout opening 16.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, a deformed plate-shaped speed reducing portion 111 is provided at the bent portion 110 located in the middle of the medal passage 105. The speed reduction portion 111 is rotatable in the front-rear direction (front-rear direction of the front door portion 11) with the upper end side as the base end, and elastically protrudes into the medal passage 105 when no game medal passes. ing. When a game medal is inserted into the game medal slot 21 and the inserted game medal passes through the bent portion 110 and contacts the speed reducer 111, the speed reducer 111 is pushed by the game medal and is immersed in the main body 101. To do. Furthermore, the deceleration unit 111 projects into the medal passage 105 again when the game medal passes and is released from the pressing force of the game medal. Then, the game medal passing through the bent portion 110 changes its course while being decelerated by contact with the speed reducing portion 111, and moves toward the downstream side of the bent portion 110.

  The selector passage sensor 46 described above is provided on the downstream side of the bent portion 110. The selector passage sensor 46 includes a first movable portion 112 having a rectangular plate shape. The first movable portion 112 has a longitudinal direction at the branch portion 113 of the medal passage 105 and a width direction (passage of the medal passage 105). (In the radial direction of the game medal to be played). The first movable portion 112 is rotatable in the front-rear direction (front-rear direction of the front door portion 11) with the upstream side of the medal passage 105 as a base end, and when no game medal passes, the medal passage It protrudes into 105. However, when the game medal that has passed through the speed reducing unit 111 contacts the first movable unit 112, the first movable unit 112 is pushed by the game medal and is immersed in the main body unit 101. Then, the first movable part 112 projects into the medal passage 105 again when the game medal passes and is released from the pressing force.

  Further, the main body 101 incorporates a microsensor (not shown) for the selector passage sensor 46 so that the presence or absence of the immersing operation of the first movable portion 112 is detected by the microsensor. That is, when the first movable part 112 is pushed by a game medal that enters the medal passage 105 and flows down, the operation of the first movable part 112 is detected and the output signal of the microsensor changes. To do. In the above-described main control board 61, the control (FIGS. 22 to 29, etc.) related to the insertion of game medals, which will be described later, is executed using the output from the selector path sensor microsensor. The Here, as the microsensor for the selector passage sensor 46, various microsensors such as a contact type and a non-contact type can be applied. Further, the first movable part 112 is configured such that a foreign substance or the like that flows backward is caught (the foreign substance cannot move from the downstream side to the upstream side of the first movable part 112). Thereby, when a goto machine (a machine tool used for a so-called goto action) is inserted, it is possible to prevent the goto machine from easily coming off.

  Further, a second movable portion 114 is provided at an upper portion on the upstream side of the first movable portion 112, and this second movable portion 114 also normally protrudes elastically into the medal passage 105 and is pushed by the game medal. In this case, the main body 101 is immersed. In this embodiment, the selector passage sensor 46 is constituted by the movable portions such as the first movable portion 112 and the second movable portion 114 and the detection portion such as a microsensor for the selector passage sensor 46. In this embodiment, the selector passage sensor 46 is formed by the first movable portion 112 and the second movable portion 114, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of them may be provided. It is good, and it does not need to have the shape as described above.

  The aforementioned insertion sensor 45 is provided at a position in the medal passage 105 on the way from the selector passage sensor 46 to the first outlet 107 described above. The closing sensor 45 includes two sensors, a closing sensor 1 indicated by reference numeral 115 and a closing sensor 2 indicated by reference numeral 116, and each closing sensor is built in the main body 101. In the following description, when referring to the closing sensor 1 and the closing sensor 2 with reference numerals in the drawing, they are described as closing sensor 1 (115) and closing sensor 2 (116).

  The closing sensor 1 (115) and the closing sensor 2 (116) are both non-contact type microsensors (not shown) built in the main body 101. Furthermore, the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116) are arranged at a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 to 10 mm) smaller than the diameter of the game medal (here, 25 mm) in the flow direction of the game medal. Of these, the insertion sensor 1 (115) is located upstream of the medal path 105 relative to the insertion sensor 2 (116).

  Further, as the microsensors used for the closing sensor 1 (115) and the closing sensor 2 (116), a light receiving type is used, and a light projecting portion disposed obliquely above the black rectangular window portion 117. The light (detection light) emitted from 118 can be received. That is, a light emitter (not shown) using an LED or the like is built in the light projecting unit 118, and the positional relationship between the light projector and the closing sensor 1 (115) and the closing sensor 2 (116) is as follows. The detection light output from the light emitter is set to pass through the window 117 and enter the closing sensor 1 (115) and the closing sensor 2 (116).

  When the game medal flowing down the medal passage 105 blocks the detection light, the detection light does not enter the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116), and the game medal is detected and the insertion sensor 1 ( 115) and the output signal of the microsensor used for the input sensor 2 (116) changes. In the main control board 61 described above, using the outputs from the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116), control related to the insertion of a game medal as will be described later (FIGS. 22 to FIG. 22). 29) is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116) are arranged on the upper part of the medal passage 105, and for example, even if a plurality of game medals pass continuously. The upper gap between the game medals passes through the insertion sensor 1 (115) and the insertion sensor 2 (116). As a result, game medals can be reliably detected for each sheet.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the opening / closing part 102 is provided with the blocker 47 described above. The blocker 47 includes a plate-shaped movable block portion 119 formed in an L-shaped cross section, a solenoid (not shown), and the like. The movable block portion 119 is provided with a shielding plate portion 120 that protrudes in the horizontal direction. It has been. Further, the arrangement of the blocker 47 is such that, when the opening / closing part 102 is closed, most of the movable block part 119 is directed to the first outlet 107 rather than directly below the first movable part 112 in the selector passage sensor 46. The game medal is set to be positioned on the downstream side with reference to the game medal. The blocker 47 advances and retracts the movable block portion 119 in the front-rear direction (front-rear direction of the front door portion 11) in accordance with ON / OFF driving of a solenoid (not shown).

  In this embodiment, when the solenoid is OFF, the blocker is OFF. When the blocker is OFF, the movable block portion 119 is retracted into the opening / closing portion 102 and the shielding plate portion 120 is drawn into the opening / closing portion 102. It is in the state. When the blocker is OFF, the lower second outlet 108 is opened, and the game medals fall to the second outlet 108 side without being directed to the first outlet 107, and are guided to the second outlet 108. Returned to the pan 17.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid is turned on, the blocker is turned on. When the blocker is turned on, the movable block portion 119 moves forward toward the main body portion 101 as shown in FIG. In a state of protruding into 105. When the blocker is ON, the lower second outlet 108 is closed by the shielding plate 120, and is guided to the side of the first outlet 107 through the shielding plate 120. Then, the game medal passes through the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45 toward the first outlet 107 and is discharged from the first outlet 107 toward the game medal payout outlet 16.

Here, reference numeral 121 in FIG. 7 denotes a reject switch that is provided in the main body 101 and constitutes a rejection mechanism, and reference numeral 122 denotes the reject switch 121 that is opposed to the opening / closing part 102 when it is closed. It is the receiving part for rejection arrange | positioned in this way. The function of the reject switch 121 will be described later.
<< Game Medal Selector Function >>

  Next, the function of the game medal selector 44 will be described. The game medal selector 44 has a game medal selection function, a game medal acceptance function, and a game medal detection function. Among these, the game medal selection function is a function for selecting whether or not the inserted game medal is within the acceptable size range. The game medal unacceptable function is a function that returns the game medal without accepting it by the blocker 47 according to the game state, and the game medal detection function detects the game medal that has passed through the insertion sensor 45. It is a function to do.

  With respect to the above-described game medal unacceptable function, the gaming state in which a game medal is returned without being accepted is that 50 game medals are stored in a storage device (described later) and a prescribed number (described later) of game medals. When a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, the operation of the start lever 25 after the insertion of the prescribed number of game medals until the game as the game at that time ends, At the time of refund, when an error occurs, when switching settings and when confirming settings can be mentioned.

  When a game medal within the range of acceptable game medals is inserted from the game medal slot 21, it passes through the medal passage 105 from the game medal inlet 106 of the game medal selector 44 and exits the game medal (first outlet 107). ) To the game medal payout device 63. When the game medal passes through the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45, a detection signal is sent from each sensor 45, 46 to the main control board 61. The detection signal of the selector passage sensor 46 is used to check the number of game medals that have passed through the selector passage sensor 46 with the above-described game control program.

  The detection signal of the insertion sensor 45 is used to determine the time and order in which the game medals have passed through the selector passage sensor 46 by the aforementioned game control program. When the detection signals of the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45 are within the specified time, and in the specified order and the specified number, the game medal is detected normally. If it is longer than the specified time, or other than the specified order, or other than the specified number, an error occurs and the inserted game medal becomes invalid. However, when the detection signal is only the output signal of the closing sensor 1 (the closing sensor 1 signal) and there is no detection by the detecting signal of the closing sensor 2 (the closing sensor 2 signal), no error occurs.

  Here, as a case where only the insertion sensor 1 signal is detected and the insertion sensor 2 signal is not detected, a case where the game medal returns from the insertion sensor 1 in the reverse direction can be cited. Further, a specific aspect of such game medal detection will be described later.

  When the deformed game medal is inserted from the game medal slot 21, it stays at the game medal inlet 106. The accumulated game medals are operated by operating the game medal return button 22 (see FIG. 1), the above-described reject switch 121 is pushed, and the opening / closing part 102 of the game medal selector 44 is slightly opened. Returned to the pan 17. When a game medal smaller than the receivable game medal size is inserted from the game medal slot 21, it passes through the game medal inlet 106 and is then returned to the tray 17 from the game medal payout opening 16.

Further, due to the above-mentioned game medal acceptance disabled function, the aforementioned blocker 47 is turned off according to the gaming state, and the movable block portion 119 is retracted from the medal passage 105. When a game medal within the acceptable range at that time is inserted from the game medal slot 21, it passes through the game medal inlet 106 and reaches the bent portion 110 of the medal passage 105 as described above. After passing through the second exit 108, the game medal payout exit 16 is returned to the tray 17.
<Setting change procedure>

  In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, a regular operation for changing the setting with respect to the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is performed as follows. First, for example, a game hall clerk opens the front door portion 11 of the slot machine 10 in a power-off state (see FIGS. 1 and 2). When opening the front door part 11, as described above, a predetermined key is inserted into the lock part 23 (see FIG. 1) of the front door part 11 locked in the closed state, and this key is unlocked. Rotate (for example, counterclockwise).

  Further, the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 shown in FIG. 4 is opened, and although not shown, the setting key cylinder into which the setting key is inserted can be accessed. Further, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is rotated (ON operation) in the ON direction (for example, clockwise direction). Then, the power switch 72 is turned on to supply power to the slot machine 10. As described above, when the power switch 72 is turned on while the setting key is turned on, a setting changing device operation (see FIG. 13) described later is performed.

  When power is supplied to the slot machine 10, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 mounted on the main control board 61 (see FIG. 4). A so-called 7-segment display is used for the setting display LED 66. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting display LED 66 displays one of setting values (six values from “1” to “6” in this case) that is an integer value within a predetermined range, and this displayed setting. The value is visible through the transparent main board case 65.

  In such a situation where the setting change device is operated, when the setting / reset button 69 (see FIG. 4) described above is pressed, the display of the setting value changes. In this embodiment, each time the set / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the set value is incremented by one step. For example, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in setting 1 (the setting value is 1) and the setting / reset button 69 is operated once, setting 2 is obtained. Thereafter, each time the set / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the set value changes in ascending order of “2”, “3”,.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the highest degree of advantage for the player is the set value 6, which is the highest set value, and the degree of advantage decreases as the set value decreases. When the set / reset button 69 is operated once with the setting value 6 that is the highest setting value, the setting 1 that is the lowest setting value is obtained. Furthermore, in a situation where the value displayed on the setting display LED 66 is the setting value that is the purpose of selection, the game shop clerk operates the start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) and operates a start switch (not shown). The set value is confirmed by turning it ON.

  As described above, when the set / reset button 69 is pressed, the mode of change related to the display of the set value is not limited to the display of the set value incremented step by step. For example, the display of the set value is displayed. May be decremented step by step and change in descending order. Furthermore, the range of setting values that can be changed by a setting change device process (see FIG. 13) described later is not limited to six levels “1” to “6”, but, for example, four levels “1” to “4”. It may be.

  Subsequently, the setting key is rotated in the OFF direction (for example, counterclockwise) (OFF operation), the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 is closed, and the normal setting change operation is completed, so that the game is possible. State (normal state).

  Here, the situation after the operation of the setting / reset button 69 becomes effective after the above-described “setting change device operation” situation can be referred to as the “setting value change possible” situation. . This “setting value can be changed” is a situation in which the setting value can be changed (selected) by operating the set / reset button 69.

  In addition, a state in which the set value is confirmed by operating the start lever 25 (lever operation) after “setting value can be changed” can be referred to as a “set value confirmed” situation. When the set value is to be changed, the setting / reset button 69 is operated as described above in “setting value can be changed”, and the start lever 25 is operated in a state where the target setting value is reached. The status will be “Set value confirmed”. In the state of “setting value confirmation”, even if the setting / reset button 69 is operated, the display of the setting value does not change.

In addition, the state of waiting for the setting key to be turned off after the “setting value confirmation” described above can be referred to as a “setting value determination waiting” situation. Even in the “waiting for setting value determination” state, it is impossible to change the setting value by operating the setting / reset button 69. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the state in the setting change work can be divided into a first state and a second state. Then, when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is turned on, the state shifts to the first state related to the setting change, and when the start lever 25 is operated thereafter, the state shifts from the first state to the second state. Further, when the setting key is turned OFF in the second state related to the setting change, the second state is terminated.
<Procedure for playing a game and processing when a game medal is inserted>

  Next, a procedure for playing a game and a process when a game medal is inserted will be described. In the process at the time of game medal insertion, when the game medal selector 44 (see FIG. 6) is in the game medal acceptance state (game medal passable state), the game medal from the game medal slot 21 (see FIG. 1). Can be inserted. Here, “inserting game medals” is synonymous with “setting bet number”, and “setting bet number” is synonymous with “betting”. When a game medal is inserted, the above-mentioned inserted number display LED is turned on according to the number of inserted coins, and the start lever 25 can be operated effectively by inserting a prescribed number of game medals. By enabling the start lever 25 to be operated effectively, it is possible to execute processing such as a role drawing based on the operation of the start lever 25, a freeze lottery (a lottery for a freezing effect to be described later), and updating of the rotating drum driving state. It becomes like this. The game medals are used as game media, and the game media are not limited to game medals, and game balls, electronic data, and the like can also be used.

  In addition, if it inserts exceeding the maximum regulation number for every gaming state, subsequent game medals will be stored in the storage device. The storage device has a function of storing up to a predetermined number (in this case, 50) of game medals under the control of the slot machine 10. However, when the number of stored game medals exceeds the maximum number of 50, the game medal selector 44 enters the game medal return state, and the game medals inserted from the game medal slot 21 are paid for game medals. It is returned to the tray 17 from the outlet 16 (see FIG. 1). The storage device is also called “credit”, and specifically refers to a device that electrically stores game medals (stores in the RWM).

  Regarding the rotation of the spinning cylinder, after inserting a specified number of game medals, the spinning cylinder can be rotated by operating the start lever 25 and operating the rotating cylinder rotation device 54. However, when any of the checkout button, stop button 24L to 24R, one sheet insertion button, or three sheet insertion button is operated, the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R cannot be rotated even if the start lever 25 is operated. .

  When the start lever 25 is operated, the rotating drums 51L to 51R start accelerating rotation and reach a constant speed state when reaching a predetermined rotation speed (79.90 rotations / minute in this case). When the start lever 25 is operated, the game medal selector 44 enters a game medal return state. Even if the start lever 25 is operated when a predetermined time (in this case, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the time when the cylinders 51L to 51R started to rotate in the previous game, The rotating drums 51L to 51R do not rotate. The spinning cylinders 51L to 51R start to rotate after 4.1 seconds from the rotation of the spinning cylinder in the previous game. However, in the case of a game standby by a game effect (such as a freeze effect) as will be described later, it is also possible to control the spinning cylinder to start rotating after the game standby is completed. Here, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the management of the minimum game time is managed in various modes according to the situation, which will be described later.

  When it is detected that the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R start rotating and all of the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R are rotating normally (here, rotating at a constant speed and not being stepped out), the stop buttons 24L to 24R are operated. Is ready to accept. However, if it is not detected that all of the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R are rotating normally, the operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R will not be accepted until the rotating drums 51L to 51R rotate normally. The game medals inserted from the game medal slot 21 after the start lever 25 is operated and before all the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R are stopped are returned to the tray 17 from the game medal payout opening 16.

  In stopping the rotation of the rotating cylinder, the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R are arbitrarily selected, and the rotating buttons 51L to 51R can be stopped by operating the corresponding stop buttons 24L to 24R. However, if any of the checkout button, start lever 25, stop button corresponding to the spinning cylinder that has already stopped, one-sheet input button, or three-sheet input button is operated, it will rotate even if the stop button is operated. It is not possible to stop the inside gyrus. In addition, regarding the buttons (main system buttons) managed by the main control board 61, some buttons can be operated (operation is valid) depending on the combination. A combination of a button or switch that can be operated (operation is enabled) and a button or switch that cannot be operated (operation is disabled) can be arbitrarily determined. For example, other stop buttons cannot be operated while any one stop button is being operated, but any combination of stop buttons can be operated while the start lever 25 is being operated (after operation). be able to.

  When the stop buttons 24L to 24R are operated, the corresponding spinning cylinder stops within a predetermined time (here, 190 ms). Similarly, any remaining spinning cylinder is stopped by operating a stop button corresponding to the arbitrarily selected spinning cylinder. If you continue to operate the stop button, even if you operate the remaining stop buttons, the corresponding spinning cylinder does not stop. After operating the start lever 25, the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R do not stop unless the stop buttons 24L to 24R are operated. However, when the freeze effect is being performed, it is possible to configure the rotating cylinder to stop without the operation of the stop buttons 24L to 24R.

  In the display determination of the symbol combination, when all of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R are stopped, the display determination of the symbol combination related to winning or action is performed on the effective line according to the specified number related to the insertion. However, if the start lever 25 or any one of the stop buttons 24L to 24R is continuously operated at the third stop, which is the third stop, it is related to winning or operating on the effective line corresponding to the specified number after the operation is canceled. The display determination of the symbol combination is performed. Note that the “symbol combination display determination” and “display determination” are such that the main CPU 81 detects a stopped symbol and directly determines what the stopped symbol is (so-called seeing the outcome). For example, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the control of the rotating drums 51L to 51R. If there is no abnormality, it is determined that the symbol display is properly performed, and the symbol is stopped normally. This means that the following processing is proceeded as if it were broken. Here, although illustration is omitted, the prescribed number that can be thrown in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is 2 in the game at the time of operating the accessory, and 3 in the other games, and the effective line is These are the three lines of the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage of the spinning cylinder display unit 15 (see FIG. 1). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt an effective line that is only one line in the middle stage, or five lines that are diagonally right-up and diagonally left-up. Then, when the symbol combination related to winning is displayed on the effective line corresponding to the specified number, the control is executed when applicable, and the symbol combination related to the accessory operation or the accessory continuous operation device is displayed. When it is performed, the control in the case where the combination of symbols relating to the accessory operation or the accessory continuous operation device is displayed is executed.

  When a symbol combination related to winning is displayed, a predetermined number of game medals corresponding to the winning symbol combination are paid out and acquired by the player. The acquired game medals are stored in the storage device described above. However, if the number of stored game medals exceeds 50, the excess number of acquired medals is paid out from the game medal payout opening 16 to the tray 17. The game medals inserted from the game medal slot 21 during acquisition of the game medals are returned to the tray 17 from the game medal payout opening 16. When all the game medals corresponding to the combination of symbols related to the winnings for each prescribed number have been acquired, the game medal selector 44 enters the game medal acceptance state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, the above-described processing at the time of game medal insertion is executed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of game medals that can be acquired by one winning is not to exceed 15.

  When a combination of symbols related to the operation of the accessory is displayed, processing corresponding to the applicable accessory is executed. In this embodiment, as an accessory (as a role to be drawn), a so-called normal accessory, a first-class special electric accessory, a second-type special electric accessory, and a first-type special electric accessory are consecutive. There are no combinations that correspond to the combination of symbols that each of the actuating devices will operate, but the combination of symbols that will cause the replay to operate, and a series of objects related to the first type special feature A combination of symbols that will cause the actuator to operate is provided. When a combination of symbols corresponding to these is displayed, the corresponding processing is executed.

  On the other hand, when the symbols related to winning and operation are not displayed, the game medal selector 44 enters the game medal acceptance state. Then, the above-described processing at the time of game medal insertion is executed.

  Next, a combination of symbols related to winning for each prescribed number and the number of game medals that can be obtained when the symbol combination is displayed will be described. The combination of symbols related to winning and the number of game medals that can be obtained correspondingly are determined in advance for each prescribed number. A game medal cannot be obtained without displaying a combination of symbols related to winning. Further, the combination of symbols relating to winning is not displayed without the condition device relating to winning operating.

  In addition, the combination of symbols related to winning and the number of game medals earned when the winning combination and the consecutive accessory operating device are not activated are determined only for the prescribed number of three, and the combination of symbols related to winning (one symbol or As for the number of (including those for which only two symbols are defined), a predetermined number is defined for each acquired number. In addition, the combination of symbols related to winning and the number of game medals earned when the first type special character is activated is determined only for the prescribed number of two, and the combination of symbols related to winning (only one symbol or two symbols) As for the number (including those specified), a predetermined number is specified for each acquired number of sheets. In addition, the combination of the symbols related to these winnings and the specific relationship with the acquired number will be described later.

  Subsequently, a combination of symbols related to the operation for each specified number will be described. The combination of the symbols relating to the operation of the replay, the accessory, and the accessory continuous operation device is predetermined for each specified number. The combination of symbols related to the replay, the combination of the accessory and the continuous action device is displayed when the condition device related to the operation of the replay, the accessory and the continuous action device is not activated (when not activated). It ’s not going to happen.

  And, the combination of symbols related to the operation and the operation name when the accessory and the consecutive accessory operating device are not operated are determined only for the specified number of three, and the combination of symbols related to the operation (only one symbol or 2 In this embodiment, there are eight types of numbers including the ones defined only for symbols. The specific relationship between these operation names and symbol combinations will be described later. When a combination of symbols related to the operation is displayed, game control corresponding to the operation name is executed thereafter.

  Next, a combination of symbols that can be replayed, an effect when the symbol combination is displayed, and a process when the symbol combination is displayed will be described. When all of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R are stopped, if the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is a combination of symbols related to replay, the regame is activated. In addition, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a game in which the probability that the condition device relating to the re-game is activated varies.

  When the condition device related to the operation of the continuous action device related to the first type special feature is activated, the fluctuation of the probability that the condition device related to replaying is activated It is when the combination of symbols that the actuating device will act on is displayed on the active line, and when the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device related to the first type special accessory is finished. As a process when a combination of symbols that can be replayed is displayed, the same number of game medals as the previous game are automatically inserted, and the start lever 25 can be operated. The game medals inserted from the game medal slot 21 after the combination of symbols related to the re-game is displayed are stored in the storage device when a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, similarly to the above-described normal time (in the case other than replaying), the control for the rotation of the spinning cylinder, the control for stopping the rotation of the spinning cylinder, and the control for the display determination of the combination of the spinning cylinders. Is executed.

  Next, the first type special bonus will be described. When the accessory continuous actuating device related to the first kind special accessory is activated, the first kind special accessory is activated at the same time when the accessory continuous actuating device relating to the first kind special accessory is actuated. In addition, when the operation of the continuous action device related to the first type special feature is completed, the operation of the continuous action device related to the first type special feature is immediately completed when the operation of the special function material of the first type ends. A special feature works again. As described above, when the first type special feature is activated, the processing at the time of inserting the game medal and the rotation of the spinning cylinder are performed in the same manner as in the normal time described above (in the case other than the game related to the first type special special feature here). The game is controlled by

  Further, when controlling the rotation of the rotating drum, the player can arbitrarily stop the rotating drum by selecting a rotating rotating drum and operating a corresponding stop button. However, when any of the checkout button, start lever, stop button corresponding to the already stopped cylinder, one-sheet-loading button, or three-sheet-loading button is operated, it is still rotating even if the stop button is operated. It is not possible to stop the circadian drum. When the stop buttons 24L, 24C, and 24R corresponding to the first cylinder 51L to the third cylinder 51R are operated, the rotation of the corresponding cylinder is performed within a predetermined time (here, 190 ms) as in the case described above. Stop.

  If any one of the stop buttons is operated continuously, the corresponding rotating cylinder does not stop even if the remaining stop buttons are operated. After operating the start lever 25, the rotating cylinder is not stopped unless the stop button is operated. Then, for the display determination of the combination of symbols, the control for the display determination of the combination of the spinning cylinders is executed in the same manner as in the normal time described above. In the present embodiment, a standby time of about 200 ms (also referred to as a rotation stop reception standby time) is provided after the stop button operation is effectively received until the next stop button is effectively received. Yes. That is, when all the reels (51L to 51R) are rotating, for example, after the left stop button (first stop button 24L) is operated, the middle or right stop button (second stop button 24C or second stop button 24C or 3 stop button 24R) can be accepted.

  Regarding the end of the operation of the first type special character, the first type special character is based on the condition that the specified number of games have been completed or the number of winnings has reached the specified number. When at least one of the operation end conditions is satisfied, the operation is ended.

Then, the accessory continuous operation apparatus which concerns on a 1st type special accessory is demonstrated. In the game when the equipment continuous action device related to the first type special feature is not activated, the combination of the symbols displayed on the active line is the continuous feature related to the first type special feature when all the spinning cylinders are stopped. If it is a combination of symbols related to the operation of the operating device, the game related to the above-mentioned first type special combination is executed. The trigger for the completion of the operation of the accessory continuous operation apparatus related to the first type special accessory is when the number of game medals obtained exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 465). After that, the process may be shifted to the processing when a game medal is inserted as in the normal time described above.
<Game production>

As the aforementioned game effects, there is typically a freeze effect. This freeze effect delays the progress of the game by pausing for a predetermined period, and in this sense, it can also be called a delay effect. Furthermore, freeze effects can be classified and understood as follows. In other words, the freeze effect can be divided into one that allows the player to easily recognize execution of the freeze effect and one that cannot be recognized (or difficult to recognize). Among these, those that can easily recognize the execution of the freeze effect include those that do not respond to the operation of the start lever 25, or those that respond but operate differently from the operation mode of the rotating cylinder during normal gaming. There are those that perform reel production (rotating drum production) that actuates the drum. Examples of a device that does not cause the rotating cylinder to respond to the operation of the start lever 25 include a device that does not start operating even when the start lever 25 is operated, and a device that requires a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) to start operating. .
<Main operations on the main control board>

  Next, the main operation of the main control board 61 functioning as the main control means of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11 and subsequent drawings. First, the main control board 61 is configured such that the main CPU 81 described above stores the first control program stored in the internal ROM of the main CPU 81 or the external ROM (main ROM 82) mounted on the main control board 61, for example. Based on the second control program (described later), random number drawing, control of various devices, etc. using the built-in RWM of the main CPU 81 or the external RWM (main RWM 83) mounted on the main control board 61, etc. It is something to execute.

  Further, the main control board 61 gives commands (“main command”, “sub control command”, “sub main” to the sub control board 31 that performs control related to effects using images and the like according to the gaming state and the lottery result. Command "or the like). The main control board 61 is supplied with power from the power supply unit 64 described above. For convenience of illustration, the external ROM or RWM is described with reference numerals 82 and 83. However, unless otherwise specified, the ROM 82 and RWM 83 are built in the main CPU 81. Used as a general term for external devices.

Here, examples of the random number drawing described above include the above-mentioned re-playing, role drawing of an accessory, an accessory continuous operation device, etc., effect lottery such as freeze lottery, AT lottery related to execution of AT (assist time), etc. it can. In addition to the main control board 61, the main control means has a concept including a main CPU 81 and peripheral devices such as a main ROM 82 and an RWM 83 that realize various functions of the main control board 61 in cooperation with the main CPU 81. It is. Furthermore, although the terms “lottery” and “lottery” are properly used according to circumstances, these terms have the same meaning.
<Relationship between first control and second control>

  Next, the above-described first control and first control program, and second control and second control program will be described. FIG. 11 shows an example of a memory map of the main CPU 81. The memory map in FIG. 11 shows an address space from “0000H” to “FFFFH”. Among these, a space from “0000H” to “2FFFH” is allocated to the built-in ROM, and a space from “F000H” to “F3FFH” is allocated to the built-in RWM.

  Further, in the space from “FE00H” to “FEBFH”, a register area (built-in register area) for a register built in each circuit in the main CPU 81 is allocated. Then, by causing the main CPU 81 to execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to execute access to the corresponding hardware.

  The configuration of the built-in ROM (0000H to 2FFFH) can be divided into a first ROM area and a second ROM area. Among these, the first ROM area is an area for mainly controlling the progress of the game. Further, the second ROM area is an area for controlling processing related to a situation different from normal progress of the game, mainly related to errors.

  The first ROM area has a first control area (from “0000H” to “11FAH”) and a first data area (from “1200H” to “1D9EH”) shown on the right side of the drawing. The second ROM area also has a second control area (from “2000H” to “22E4H”) and a second data area (from “22E5H” to “2346H”) shown on the right side of the drawing. .

  Further, the unused area (1D9FH to 1FFFH) is interposed between the second control area and the first data area described above. Further, the final address (22E4H) of the second control area and the start address (22E5H) of the second data area are continuous, and the unused area (2347H to 2FBFH) follows the final address (2346H) of the second data area. ) And a management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH).

  In the present embodiment, the first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area. For example, regarding the first ROM area, the unused area is not included, and only the first control area and the first data area are included. Similarly, the second ROM area does not include the unused area, and the second control area and the first data area are not included. This relationship is also established when only two data areas are used. The memory map shown in FIG. 11 is an example, and the number of bytes in each area and the presence / absence of an unused area can be variously changed.

  The configuration of the built-in RWM (F000H to F3FFH) can be divided into a first RWM region and a second RWM region. Among these, the first RWM area is an area where information (game data) mainly based on the progress of the game is written and stored as necessary, and the written information is further updated (sometimes referred to as a use area). ). In addition, the second RWM area is an area (sometimes referred to as “out of use area”) that stores information based mainly on processing different from normal progress of games such as errors. It can also be said that the first RWM region is an RWM region used in the first control, and the second RWM region is an RWM region used in the second control.

  The first RWM area has a first work area ("F000H" to "F14AH") and a first stack area ("F1D7H" to "F1FFH") shown on the right side of the drawing. The second RWM area also has a second work area (from “F210H” to “F21EH”) and a second stack area (from “F3F3H” to “F3FFH”) shown on the right side of the drawing. . Here, it is possible to define the second RWM area so as to start from F200H.

  The first stack area is an area used when the program related to the first control needs to store data internally, and the second stack area is the program related to the second control. Is an area used when it is necessary to store data internally. In the first stack area and the second stack area, for example, return address information (return address data) stored at the time of shifting to a subroutine is written at any time according to the game situation. Note that the memory map shown in FIG. 11 is an example, and the number of bytes in each area can be variously changed.

  An unused area (16 bytes of F200H to F20FH) having a predetermined size is provided between the first stack area and the second work area. It can be considered that this unused area is essential. Further, unused areas (F14BH to F1D6H, F21FH to F3F2H) having predetermined sizes are also provided between the first work area and the first stack area and between the second work area and the second stack area. ing. It is conceivable that these unused areas are not essential.

  The first RWM region has a larger capacity than the second RWM region. In this embodiment, a set of the first work area and the first stack area is a first RWM area, and a set of the second work area and the second stack area is a second RWM area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the first stack area is not included in the first RWM area and the second stack area is not included in the second RWM area may be employed. In this case, for example, the first RWM area may be assigned to the space from “F000H” to “F14AH”, and the second RWM area may be assigned to the space from “F210H” to “F21EH”. It is.

Here, with respect to the ROM mounted on the main control board, it is preferable not to provide an unused area (an unfilled area) in order to prevent a program or the like modified by an illegal act from being written. It is. In order to do this, for example, it is conceivable that all unused areas are filled with 0, and the used areas are written into young (small numerical values) addresses. In this embodiment, all the bits in the unused area are “0”, and in the area other than the unused area, any bit is “1” (not “0”). )
<Triggers and scope of RWM initialization>

Next, the trigger and range of initialization of the first RWM area and the second RWM area will be described. First, the trigger and range of initialization of the first RWM area are determined as in the following (1) to (3) in the present embodiment, depending on the state of power interruption recovery.
(1) When the power change recovery cannot be performed normally when the setting changer is operating, data 0 is set in the first RWM area (“F000H” to “F1FFH”).
(2) When the setting changer is operating, except when the power failure recovery cannot be executed normally. In the first RWM area (“F000H” to “F1FFH”), set value data, interrupt counter, built-in random number processing random number, Data 0 is set in a range ("F008H" to "F1FFH") excluding the soft random number initial value and the RT state number.
(3) When power is restored from power off The work area (first work area) of the first RWM area ("F000H" to "F1FFH") and the area excluding the maximum usage amount of the first stack area ("F14BH" to "F1D6H") )) Is set to data 0.

Subsequently, the trigger and range of initialization of the second RWM area will be described.
(1) When the setting change device is operating Data 0 is set in the second RWM area (for example, “F200H” to “F3F5H”) excluding the stack usage amount when the setting changing device is operating.
(2) In the case of power-off recovery time The work area (second work area) of the second RWM area (for example, “F200H” to “F3FFH”) and the area excluding the maximum usage amount of the second stack area (for example, “F200H” to “F20FH” and “F21FH” to “F3F2H”) are set to data 0.

  Note that the first work area can be referred to as, for example, a “work area of the use area”. Furthermore, the first RWM area only needs to include the first work area. For example, from the first address of the first work area to the last address of the first stack area (in the example of FIG. 11, F14BH to F1D6H are not used). Including the region) may be the first RWM region. Further, the same applies to the second RWM area. For example, the second RWM area includes the first address of the second work area to the last address of the second stack area (including the unused area of F21FH to E3F2H in the example of FIG. 11). Also good.

  Here, the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, and the second data area, which are used areas for the ROM data, are based on the usage, for example, “Writing is not performed during the game”. It can be referred to as “region”. Further, the first work area, the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area can be referred to as, for example, “an area where writing can be performed during a game” based on the application.

  Then, as described above, the area of the built-in ROM and the area of the built-in RWM are arranged via the unused area (3000H to EFFFH), so that “areas in which writing is not performed during the game” and “game” In the RWM, the “area in which writing can be performed” can be clearly distinguished in terms of structure (and address).

  In this embodiment, the first data area is arranged after the first control area 1, and then the second control area 2 and the second data area are continued with the unused area (1D9FH to 1FFFH) in between. Are arranged. In addition, the first work area, the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area are arranged with an unused area in between. Therefore, according to the distinction between the first control and the second control, the “area where writing is not performed during the game” and the “area where writing can be performed during the game” are classified without being mixed. Can be arranged.

  The distinction between the first control and the second control can be referred to as, for example, “control distinction”, “control classification”, “control type”, or “control classification”. In addition, the first control area and the non-second control area, the first data area and the second data area, the first work area and the second work area 2, or the set of the first stack area and the second stack area, respectively, It can be regarded as information (data) of the same type between different control sections, and each of these sets can be referred to as having the same data type.

  In this embodiment, the same data type (the first control area and the second control area, or the first work area and the second work area) between the different control sections as described above are adjacent to each other. It can be said that the area is arranged without any problem.

  In this embodiment, an unused area is provided between the first stack area and the second work area in the area of the built-in RWM which is “an area where writing can be performed during the game”. And in the area | region of built-in RWM, the area | region of a different control division (1st control and 2nd control) is arrange | positioned through the unused area | region, without adjoining each other and without being mixed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, when control is performed according to the first control program, writing (updating, etc.) to the second RWM area is not performed, and control is performed according to the second control program. Is performed, the writing (updating, etc.) to the first RWM area is not performed. However, for example, when the control is performed according to the first control program, the data in the second RWM area may be referred to (confirmed), and the control is performed according to the second control program. In some cases, referring to the data in the first RWM area (confirmation, etc.) may be performed.

  As will be described later, when returning to the first control after shifting from the first control to the second control, or when returning to the second control after shifting from the second control to the first control, The contents of the register are kept the same when returning.

  According to the area arrangement and handling of the RWM as described above, for example, the first work area related to the first control and the second work area related to the second control have the same data type between different control sections. It is possible to prevent such a situation that the corresponding data is stored in an adjacent area or address. For this reason, for example, even if a third party who performs fraud tries to search for predetermined data generated during a game, even if the address of the RWM is traced in ascending or descending order and the stored data is confirmed, the necessary data Cannot be detected efficiently.

  That is, it is the first work area and the second work area that store various winning lottery results and error information in the game. For this reason, for example, even if a third party tries to find the first work area and the second work area by following the addresses in ascending or descending order, there are unused areas and respective stack areas for storing return addresses before and after. Therefore, the first work area or the second work area cannot be reached immediately.

  Further, even if an attempt is made to move the detection destination from the first work area to the second work area (or from the second work area to the first work area), the target work area is immediately determined due to the presence of the unused area or the first stack area. Can't reach. As a result, access to information necessary for fraud can be delayed, and fraud can be prevented or suppressed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the program code that exists in the first control area and is accessed from the main CPU 81 is separated from the program code that is present in the second control area and accessed from the main CPU 81 on the memory map. Can be arranged (in an arrangement where addresses are not continuous). Furthermore, since an unused area (1D9FH to 1FFFH) is sandwiched between the first control area and the second control area, the arrangement of both program codes on the program source code or dump list is visually clear. It is possible to divide into Further, fraud can also be prevented by such separation.

  In this embodiment, data is written to the RWM only in the RWM area defined for the control category being executed. That is, between the first control and the second control, the control classification is shifted in a predetermined case, and in the situation where the first control is performed, the data about the second work area and the second stack area In a situation where writing and data updating are not performed and second control is performed, data writing and data updating are not performed for the first work area and the first stack area.

  Then, data writing in each control section is performed only on the work area and stack area corresponding to the control section in the control section without shifting to another control section. Therefore, the first control and the second control can be clearly separated in terms of the processing of the main CPU 81, thereby enabling fraud suppression and early detection.

The internal ROM area (0000H to 2FFFH) is divided into a first control area (0000H to 1D9EH) and a second control area (2000H to 22E4H). Then, by performing control processing by shifting between the first control program and the second control program, it is possible to perform game control while clearly separating the first control and the second control.
<Processing at power-on of main control board>

  Next, processing when the main control board is turned on will be described. When the main CPU 81 of the main control board 61 is turned on via the power supply unit 64, the program code arranged at the address (first control area) of “0000H” in the built-in ROM (see FIG. 11) described above. It will be executed in order. The main CPU 81 sets the Q register to “F000H” based on the data in the ROM area and the RWM area related to the first control.

  Next, the main CPU 81 executes main control function settings based on data in the ROM area and the RWM area related to the first control. Further, the main CPU 81 calculates a checksum based on the data in the ROM area and the RWM area related to the first control, and checks the first RWM and the second RWM (for example, holds in the calculated checksum and checksum areas). Based on the checksum data that has been stored, it is checked whether or not the data stored in the built-in RWM is correctly held by power-off / power-off recovery), and power-off recovery data is generated.

  Referring to FIG. 12, when the main CPU 81 of the main control board 61 is turned on, the power-on process (“program start process”, “power-on process”, or “power-on process” shown in FIG. Or the like.) Is executed. In this power-on process, an initial value is set for a predetermined register (S1), and in this register initialization process, an initial value is set in a register built in the main CPU 81. The contents of the setting include a setting of a communication speed of a serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 81, a setting of an interrupt type (mode), and a setting of a parity given to a command to be transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, only one maskable interrupt is used among the various interrupt types that can be used as the interrupt type. In the parity setting, even parity is used.

  Subsequently, a maskable interrupt is set (S2), and access to the RWM is permitted (S3). Furthermore, a built-in random number is set (S4), and an RWM check is performed. In this RWM check, a checksum calculation (S5) and a power-off process completion flag indicating that the power-off process has been completed are used to determine whether or not the backup at the previous power-off is normal. Power-off recovery data is generated. In the checksum calculation (S5) described above, the checksum for the same storage area range as the RWM checksum in the power-off process (described later) (here, “F000H” to “F3FFH” of the built-in RWM in FIG. 11). Execute.

  In the checksum calculation (S5), after the calculation process, it is determined whether or not the calculation has been completed for the entire target range (S6). If the calculation has not been completed for the entire range (S6). (S6: NO), the process returns to the calculation process (S5). Then, the checksum calculation is repeated until the calculation for the entire target range is completed. Here, the determination of whether or not the calculation for the entire target range has been completed may be performed after the calculation for each address, or may be performed after the calculation for each predetermined range.

  After the calculation of the checksum for the entire target range is completed (S6: YES), the power-off recovery data is stored in the register (S7). Here, the power-off recovery data differs depending on whether either the power-off execution processing flag or the RWM checksum is abnormal or both are normal. Further, the data of the input port 1 is stored in the register (S8). Here, the data of the port (input port 1) to which the designated switch signal in the next step (S9) is input is acquired.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the designated switch is ON (S9). The designation switch indicates three switches: a door switch, a setting door switch, and a setting key switch. Then, the states of the door switch signal, the setting door switch signal, and the setting key switch signal are checked (S9). If all the switch signals are ON (S9: YES), the setting change device process described later (see FIG. 13). I do. Here, in this embodiment, when all the switch signals are ON, the above-described door (front door portion 11) is opened, the setting door of the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is opened, and the setting key switch 68 is set. Is a rotation in the ON direction, and when these three conditions are satisfied, the determination result in S9 is “YES”. Note that the setting door switch may be excluded from the designation switch, and the setting change device may be in the operating state if the two switches of the door switch and the setting key switch are in the ON state.

  For example, when the door (front door portion 11) is closed (when the door switch is in the closed state), the setting door of the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is in the open state, and the setting key switch 68 is turned on. Even if the rotation is in the direction, the determination in S9 is not “YES”. In such a case, since there is a possibility that fraud has been performed, the determination result is not set to “YES” so as not to shift to a setting change device process (also referred to as “setting change process”) described later. It has become. When the setting door switch 67 (see FIG. 4) is not provided, the case where all the switch signals are ON is the result of checking the state of the door switch signal and the setting key switch signal in the determination process of S9. Indicates that is ON.

  If the condition is satisfied in the determination (S9) as to whether or not the above-mentioned designated switch is ON (YES), it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data is abnormal (S10). ). If an affirmative determination is made in the determination (S10) relating to the power-off recovery data and the determination is “YES” (when the power-off recovery data is abnormal), the setting change device processing described later (see FIG. 13). Migrate to In addition, when a negative determination is made and “NO” is obtained (when the power-off recovery data is not abnormal), it is determined whether or not the setting change disable flag is ON (S11), and a negative determination is made. If the result is “NO” (when the setting change impossibility flag is not ON), the processing shifts to the setting change device process (see FIG. 13).

  Further, in the determination relating to the setting change impossibility flag (S11), when an affirmative determination is made and “YES” is obtained (when the setting change impossibility flag is ON), confirmation of power-off recovery data described later is performed. The process proceeds to processing (S12). The setting change impossibility flag is one of the data stored in the RWM, and in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, from the combination lottery process (S60) to the check at the end of the game (S68). Is data indicating that the setting cannot be changed.

  When it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned designated switch is ON (S9), if at least one of the switch signals is not ON (S9: NO), or the above-mentioned setting change disable flag is ON In this case (S11: YES), the process proceeds to the confirmation process of power-off recovery data (S12). In the power-off recovery data confirmation process (S12), a power-off process (described later) is performed at the previous power-off, and a predetermined RWM area is calculated at the previous power-off. If the checksum value is normal, it is determined to be normal, and otherwise it is determined to be abnormal.

In the confirmation process of power-off recovery data (S12), if it is determined that the power-off recovery data is abnormal (S12: NO), an error display is executed (S13), and an error code corresponding to the acquired number display LED ( E1) is displayed and the operation of the gaming machine is stopped. The E1 error, which is an error at this time, is an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) is executed, and is one of the errors that cannot be recovered (errors that cannot be recovered) as described later. is there. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is normal (S12: YES) in the power-off recovery data confirmation process (S12), the process proceeds to the power-supply recovery process (see FIG. 21). The power recovery process (see FIG. 21) will be described later.
<Setting change device processing>

  FIG. 12 shows the above-described setting change device process. In the setting change device process, the stack pointer is set and the operation of the setting change device is started. Then, as shown in the figure, a predetermined range of RWM initialization is stored in the register (S21), but here it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed as the “predetermined range” related to RWM initialization. The above-mentioned storage area range (here, addresses F000H to F3FFH in FIG. 11) is set. Further, here, the setting value data relating to the aforementioned setting value, the RT state number relating to the replay time (RT), and the condition device flag relating to the aforementioned condition device are not stored as initialization targets. Here, RT (replay time) is a gaming state in which the replay winning probability is higher than usual, and the RT state number is a number for distinguishing a plurality of RT states having different replay winning tendencies. . Further, as described above, the set value can be described as defining the theoretical ease (the player's advantage), but more specifically, the set value is, for example, the difference It can be explained that the winning probability of the combination is different. In addition to this, the set value may be used in such a manner that the winning probability of the combination is the same, but the winning probability of other lotteries (such as AT lottery) based on the winning of the combination is different.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data is normal (S22), and it is determined whether or not the power-off processing (described later) has been performed normally. The power-off recovery data is stored in a predetermined register after the checksum calculation is completed in the above-described power-on process. If it is determined that the power supply has not been cut off normally (S22: NO), the above-mentioned set value data, RT state number, and condition device flag are included in the “specific range” to be initialized. The storage area range including these is stored in a predetermined register (S23). Here, the “specific range” is a range including the set value data, the RT state number, and the condition device flag, and is distinguished from the above “predetermined range”.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the determination of whether or not the power-off recovery data is normal (S22), the power-off is normally performed (S22: YES), a predetermined register (here, AF register) Is saved (S24), and the contents (return address) of the register are stored in the first stack area. Then, the transition from the first control to the second control is performed, and RWM initialization 3 (S25), which is the control module related to the second control described above, is executed. This RWM initialization 3 (S25) is a part of the second control program developed in the second control area described above. In the RWM initialization 3 (S25), among the RWM areas related to the second control (here, F200H to F3FFH), the stack usage when the setting changer is activated (the stack area required when the setting changer is activated) Except RWM areas (F200H to F3F5H) are cleared. Details of the RWM initialization 3 will be described later.

  After this RWM initialization 3 (S25), there is a return (S26) of the AF register, and a transition (return) from the second control to the first control is performed. Then, a timer interrupt is started by an interrupt start setting process (S27). In this interrupt start setting process (S27), the interrupt type and timer interrupt cycle are set. After this processing, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18), which is timer interrupt processing, can be executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the timer interruption cycle is 2.235 ms.

  Subsequently, data indicating “setting change start” is stored in the register (S28). The data indicating “setting change start” is a command for notifying the sub-control board 31 that the setting change device process has been started and is being executed. Further, the process of the control command set 1 (S29) is performed. In the present embodiment, the process of the control command set 1 (S29) is the process of the control command set 2. The process of the control command set 2 is a process for storing the above-described sub control command in a ring buffer (transmission buffer) that is temporarily stored before transmission. Here, the sub-control command indicating “setting change start” is set in the ring buffer by the processing of the control command set 1 (S29). Details of the processing of the control command set 2 will be described later.

  Subsequently, it is checked whether or not the set value is within a predetermined range (S30). If the set value is not within the normal range (in this case, any one of six from “1” to “6”) ( In S30: NO, 1 is set in the set value (S31), and the process proceeds to the process of displaying the setting change device in operation (S31). On the other hand, when the set value is in the normal range (S30: YES), the process proceeds to the process of displaying the setting change device operation (S32) without setting the set value (= 1) (S31). Here, in this embodiment, the normal range of the set value is “1” to “6”, and “0” is not used as the value of the normal range. This is because if the control is abnormal for some reason, the value may accidentally become “0”, and such a case can be accurately determined as abnormal.

  In the process of displaying the setting change device in operation (S32), the lamp (LED) is turned on and the set value is displayed during the process of the setting change device. “Lighting” and “display” performed here are processes for setting data (flags) for “lighting” and “display”. Specifically, the data set here is the timer after this. By a predetermined process (here, LED display process (S549) in FIG. 18) in the interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the setting display LED (66) and the obtained number display LED are output for driving. In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED (66), and "-" indicating that the setting changing device is in operation is displayed on the obtained number display LED.

  Further, a determination process (S33) relating to the setting / reset button signal (setting / reset switch signal) is performed, and the setting / reset button signal is changed from OFF to ON while the door switch signal and the setting door switch signal are ON. If YES (S33: YES), the process proceeds to a setting value update process (S34). Otherwise, the process proceeds to a determination process related to the start lever 25 (S35). Here, as described above, the setting / reset button (69) related to the setting / reset button signal serves as one button device as the setting button (setting switch) and the reset button (reset switch). Is. Further, a determination (S33) related to the setting / reset button signal is performed based on the rising data of the setting / reset button signal.

  In the setting value update process (S34), 1 is added to the setting value. However, if the value exceeds the maximum set value (here, 6) as a result of addition, the set value returns to 1. In the determination process related to the start lever 25 (S35), if the start lever sensor signal (start sensor signal) is changed from OFF to ON (S35: YES), the determination process related to the setting key switch 68 (S36). In other cases (S35: NO), the process proceeds to the determination process (S33) related to the setting / reset button signal.

  In the determination processing related to the setting key switch 68 (S36), when the door switch signal and the setting door switch signal are ON and the setting key switch signal is changed from ON to OFF (S36: YES), the setting is changed. The process proceeds to the display clear process during operation (S37). In other cases (S36: NO), the process of S36 is repeated. In the process of clearing the setting change device in operation (S37), the lamp is turned off during the setting change process and the display of the set value is terminated. More specifically, the setting display LED is turned off, and “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED. The “lighting out” and “display end” performed here are processes for setting data (flags) for “lighting out” and “display end”, as described above. The obtained data is used for driving the setting display LED and the obtained number display LED by predetermined processing (here, LED processing (S549) in FIG. 18) in the subsequent timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18). Used for.

  Subsequently, data indicating “end of setting change” is set in the register (S38). This data indicating “end of setting change” serves as a command for informing the sub-control board 31 that the setting change device process has ended. Further, the processing of the control command set 1 (S39) is performed. This control command set 1 (S39) uses the same control module as the above-described control command set 1 (S29). Then, by the control command set 1 process (S39), the sub control command indicating “setting change end” is set in the ring buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to a game progress main process (see FIG. 14) described later.

It should be noted that when the setting change device is in the operating state, a plurality of switches must be turned on (S9 in FIG. 12), but only the setting key switch is required when the setting changing device is in the non-operation state. Is confirmed (S36 in FIG. 13). That is, it can be said that the condition for ending the operation of the setting change device is relaxed compared to the condition for starting.
<< Control command set 2 >>

  Next, processing of the control command set 2 performed in the above-described control command set 1 (S29, S39) will be described. In this control command set 2, the control command buffer address is set, and the control command write pointer data is acquired. Further, a designated address is set, designated address data is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the control command is smaller than “64”.

If the control command is smaller than “64”, the control command is set, the control command write pointer is updated, and the process ends. If it is determined whether or not the control command is smaller than “64” and the control command is not smaller than “64”, the control command is not set and the control command write pointer is not updated. Finish the process.
<Game progress main processing>

  Next, the game progress main process will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an outline of the game progress main process will be described, and among the various control modules used in the game progress main process, the main ones in this embodiment will be described later. In the game progress main process, the stack pointer is set (S51), and in the game start set process (S52), the following process is performed. That is, in this game start set process (S52), the game state is set.

  That is, in the game start set process (S52), the game start set is performed. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the game standby display start time is set, the drawing symbol data is cleared, and the operation state is set.

  More specifically, based on the symbol combination that was stopped and displayed in the previous game, whether the current game is a re-game, or a game in which the above-mentioned first-class special-function-operating device operates. Data indicating whether it is (1 type BB game) is set. Furthermore, a wait for waiting after the sub bonus is performed. Here, the sub bonus is a bonus managed on the side of the sub control board 31 described above. For example, when a specific replay (specific replay) is won, the sub bonus is continued for a predetermined number of games thereafter. This means a gaming state such as

  As a specific example, “7” symbols are displayed together on the winning line for production, and a specific replay winning state is set. Further, AT (assist time) for 30 games from the winning of the specific replay. A gaming state in which a profit is given by the state can be given. The wait waiting after the sub-bonus means a waiting time for performing a bonus end demo similar to the bonus (main bonus) managed by the main control board 61 when the AT state ends. . The start time of the standby time can be set as when 30 games have elapsed since winning the specific replay on the main control board 61 side.

  Subsequently, in the game start set process (S52), although not shown, commands indicating various game information are respectively written in the command buffer. Further, the full detection signal is checked, and when the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is full, an error code (FE) indicating that is displayed on the acquired number display LED, and the game is stopped.

  When the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is not full or the error is canceled, the game medal insertion is accepted. In this game medal insertion acceptance, when the re-game is not in operation, the blocker signal is turned ON (passable state) and the game medal insertion acceptance is started. In the case of re-game operation, if a game medal can be inserted into the storage device (if the number of credits has not reached 50 which is the maximum number), the blocker signal is turned ON (medal flow path formation) and the storage device is If it is not possible to insert game medals, the blocker signal is not turned on, and the game medals with the number of bets in the previous game are automatically inserted. Blocker processing at the time of re-game operation will be described later.

  In the game progress main process, a game medal reading process (S53) is subsequently executed as shown in FIG. In the game medal reading process (S53), the game medal number data is read to check whether there is a game medal number. After the game medal reading process (S53), the presence / absence of a game medal is checked (S54). If there is no game medal (S54: NO), a display waiting for the insertion of a game medal (a medal can be inserted) The process proceeds to the process (S55). If there is a game medal (S54: YES), the process proceeds to the game medal management process (S56). Here, the presence of a game medal indicates a state in which a game medal is set (bet) in order to satisfy a specified number for playing a game.

  In the display processing when waiting for the insertion of a game medal (S55), when the setting key switch signal changes from OFF to ON, the blocker is turned OFF and a control command for starting the installation value display is set. Further, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED until the setting key switch signal is turned from ON to OFF. Then, the control command at the end of setting value display is set, and the blocker is turned on. If the game standby display start time has elapsed, the process shifts to the acquired number display clear process, and in other cases, the process ends.

  In the game medal management (S56), a blocker state confirmation process is performed, and in this blocker state confirmation process, an insertion process based on the inserted game medal, a clearing button, a MAX bet button (three-sheet insertion button) ) Is performed based on the operation. This game medal management (S56) will be described later (see FIG. 26). Further, after the game medal management process (S56), soft random number update 1 (S57), which is a process for soft random number update, is performed. In this soft random number update 1 (S57), the soft random number update 2 is performed, and the soft random number update 2 updates the random number for internal random number processing.

  Subsequently, in the start lever check process (S58), a start lever reception check is performed. That is, although not shown in the drawings, the insertion / dispensing sensor abnormality display is performed, and when the number of inserted sheets does not match the specified number, the process is terminated. Furthermore, when the monitoring time when the blocker is ON (monitoring time when the blocker is ON) has not elapsed, the game start display LED signal is turned OFF, and the process ends. Subsequently, the game start display LED signal is turned ON. If the start lever sensor signal changes from OFF to ON, the process shifts to start lever reception. In other cases, the process ends.

  More specifically, the following processing is sequentially performed as an acceptance check of the start lever 25. That is, the selector passage sensor stay flag indicating whether or not a game medal is staying in the selector passage is checked, and if the game medal is staying, an error code (CH) corresponding to the acquired number display LED is displayed. Stop the game. In other cases or when the error is cleared, the input sensor abnormality detection data is checked. If an abnormality input is detected, the error code (C0) corresponding to the acquired number display LED is displayed and the game is stopped. To do. Specific processing for these will be described later.

  Furthermore, in other cases (when no abnormal input is detected) or when the error is canceled, the payout sensor abnormality detection data is checked. If an abnormal input is detected, H0 is set in the acquired number display LED. Display and stop the game. Furthermore, in other cases (when no abnormal input is detected) or when the error is cleared, the overflow detection data is checked. If the game medal auxiliary storage is full, FE is displayed on the acquired number display LED. Then stop the game. In other cases (when the game medal auxiliary storage is not full) or when the error is canceled, the process further proceeds to the following process.

  That is, the number of game medals inserted and the specified number are compared. If the number matches, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of determining whether to accept the start lever (S59)). Since the start lever cannot be accepted, the process returns to the game medal reading process (53). Further, in the process of determining whether or not to accept the start lever (S59), the stop button 24L to 24R, the clearing button, and each input button are not operated, and the start lever sensor signal changes from OFF to ON. In such a case, the start lever is accepted, and in other cases, the start lever is not accepted. Then, the blocker 47 of the game medal selector 44 is turned OFF (solenoid OFF), and the game medal selector 44 is set in a return state in which the game medal cannot pass.

  If it is determined that the start lever is not received (S59: NO) in the determination process related to the start lever reception (S59), the process returns to the game medal reading process (S53), and if the start lever is received (S59: YES). Then, the internal random number (hardware random number) is taken in, and the process proceeds to the internal lottery start process (S60) which is a role lottery process. Here, when it is determined that the start lever is not received (S59: NO), the loop processing (S53 to S59) is arranged after the stack pointer setting (S51), and therefore the stack pointer setting (S51). Is always executed before the loop processing (S53 to S59).

  In the internal lottery start process (S60), the internal lottery process for determining the symbol lottery related to the condition device (replay, winning combination, bonus item, bonus item continuous operation device) and symbol control number is performed. In the internal lottery process, different lottery tables are used depending on the gaming state, and the type of winning number (winning combination) and the winning probability differ depending on various gaming states and RT states. Further, as a random number for internal lottery, a random number obtained by adding a processing random number (in this case, a software random number) to the above-described built-in random number is used. Furthermore, with regard to lotteries related to various types of winning combinations, the order of drawing is determined based on the types of winning combinations. The details of the internal lottery start process (S60) will be described later (see FIG. 15).

  In the rotation management process (S61 to S65) including the rotation rotation start process (S61), the rotation is managed from acceleration to stop. Moreover, although the illustration of the rotation management process (S61 to S65) is omitted, it is also executed in the pseudo game start process which is a process for performing the above-described pseudo game. And in the process (S61-S65) of a rotating cylinder management, although the mechanism which concerns on rotation of a rotating cylinder is controlled, this is mentioned later.

  In the rotation rotation start process (S61), a data set for starting rotation of the rotation cylinder and an inspection for rotation failure are performed. More specifically, the presence / absence of a spinning cylinder having a data set request (data set requesting cylinder) is determined. If there is a data set requesting cylinder, data is set in the requested spinning cylinder. Further, when a rotation failure is detected in the rotating cylinder at a constant speed, the requested data for the acceleration state set is set for the rotating cylinder, and the process returns to the above-described determination of the presence / absence of the data set requested rotating cylinder. And when there is no data set request | requirement cylinder, it transfers to the soft random number update process 1 which is the control module mentioned above.

  Subsequent to the rotation rotation start process (S61), the number of shifted frames (retraction points) is created (S62). In this shifted frame number creation process (S52), data indicating the number of shifted frames is created for all the spinning cylinders that have not been stopped. More specifically, although illustration is omitted, when there is no shift frame number creation request, the process ends. Further, the following processing is performed for all the cylinders that are shifted in the order of the third cylinder (51R), the second cylinder (51C), and the first cylinder (51L) and that have a frame number creation request.

  First, the RWM address for storing the table search number used for creating the number of shifted frames is stored. Subsequently, the control cylinder number is stored in the RWM, and the retraction point initialization process is performed for the number of symbol arrangement frames. Further, control control execution processing is performed, and table set control processing is performed. Further, the control symbol number is initialized, and the following processing is performed for each control symbol number.

  First, processing for creating a stoppable position is performed. Subsequently, the number of shifted frames is stored in the RWM corresponding to the control cylinder and the control symbol number. Further, the shift frame number creation request is cleared, and the process proceeds to an interrupt wait process.

  After such shift frame number creation processing (S62), the process proceeds to rotation stop acceptance check processing (S63). In this rotation stop acceptance check process (S63), in order to perform a check related to the stop operation, first, the sensors of all the cylinders are checked. If the stop acceptance is not possible, the process ends. Further, when any of the output signals (stop button sensor signal) of the stop button sensor corresponding to the rotating drum is turned ON, the process proceeds to stop button reception processing. Further, the stop acceptance information data is set in accordance with the rotation or stop state of the all cylinders, the stop position is determined, and the process proceeds to the all cylinder stop check process (S64).

  In the all-cylinder stop check process (S64), it is checked whether all the turn cylinders are stopped and whether the operation of the stop buttons (24L, 24C, 24R) and the start lever 25 is completed. In this all-cylinder stop check process (S64), all the cylinders 51L to 51R are stopped, and the operation of the start lever 25 and the stop buttons 24L to 24R is started at the third stop as described above, for example. It is checked whether the lever 25 or any one of the stop buttons 24L to 24R has not been operated continuously, and whether or not it has been properly completed.

  In the subsequent all-turn cylinder stop determination process (S65), when an affirmative determination is made (S65: YES), the process proceeds to the display determination process (S66), and in other cases, the shift frame number generation process ( Return to S62).

  In the display determination process (S66), the following processes are performed in order. That is, as a result of the display determination, if the symbol combination display is abnormal, an error code (E5) corresponding to the acquired number display LED is displayed, and the game operation is stopped.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to a game medal payout process (S67) by winning. In the game medal payout process by winning (S67), if there is a game medal payout by winning, a game medal is paid out. Although illustration is omitted, when the game medals are paid out, display processing for displaying the number of game medals paid out is performed. In the display process of the number of game medals, the value displayed on the display device (here, the stored number display unit) is updated every time one game medal is paid out.

  More specifically, in order to pay out game medals by winning and manage the number of payouts at the time of BB operation, first, a control command at the start of paying out game medals is set. Subsequently, the medal payout signal output count is set, and if there is no game medal payout number, the processing is terminated. Further, the acquirable number at the time of BB operation is updated, the processing described later is performed for the number of payouts, and a control command at the end of game medal payout is set.

  As processing related to the above-mentioned payout number, first, the following processing is performed according to the payout destination of game medals. That is, when paying out to the storage device is possible, after the addition time is waited, one stored number is added, and when paying out to the storage device is impossible, one game medal is paid out. Subsequently, as the processing corresponding to the number of payouts, 1 is added to the acquired number data.

  Next, a process at the end of the game (S68) is performed. In the process at the end of the game (S68), first, the re-game display LED is turned off. Subsequently, the re-game operation state flag and the winning and re-game condition device number are cleared. Further, in the case of BB operation, BB operation management processing is performed, and in the case of RB operation, RB operation management processing is performed. If the bonus is not operating, the process proceeds to RT state management processing.

  Thereafter, an output request at the end of the game is set (S69), the control command set 1 described above is performed (S70), and the game progress main process is executed again. In addition, even if a prize has been generated for an accessory or a continuous operation device, if the corresponding symbol combination is not complete, the flags relating to these prizes are carried over. In addition, the flags related to the replay and small condition devices are cleared. That is, as the above-described end processing according to the gaming state, RWM clear processing for condition device numbers other than carryover combination, RT number generation processing, freeze state transition processing, external signal data generation processing, and the like are performed. Is called.

  Next, among the various processes in the game progress main process (S51 to S70), the internal lottery start process (S60) will be described in more detail. As described above, the internal lottery start process (S60) is a process that shifts when reception of a start lever operation is detected in a situation where a game can be started. As shown in FIG. 15, in the internal lottery start process (S60), the condition device number set (S81), the symbol control number set (S82), the drawing symbol data set (S83), the control symbol set (S84), Each process of lottery management (S85), condition device command set (S86), spinning cylinder rotation start standby (S87), and spinning cylinder rotation start preparation (S88) is executed in order.

  Of these, in the condition device number set (S81), it is first determined whether or not the bonus condition device is operating. If the bonus condition apparatus is not operating, data indicating the bonus condition apparatus number is stored (S502), and data indicating the winning and replay condition apparatus number is stored.

  In the aforementioned lottery lottery management process (S85 in FIG. 15), the data related to the production group number is set, the designated number is set, the main game state management process is performed, and the condition device command set process (FIG. The process proceeds to S86).

  In the condition device command set process (S86 in FIG. 15), as shown in FIG. 16, the interrupt is prohibited (S511), the AF register is saved (S512), and the process proceeds to the second control. A stop signal output process (S513) is executed. The symbol stop signal output process (S513) performed as the second control is a process for outputting the symbol stop signal data for the test test, and details thereof will be described later (see FIG. 33).

  When the symbol stop signal output process (S513) ends, the process returns to the condition device command set process (FIG. 16) related to the first control, and the AF register is restored (S514). Further, the interrupt is permitted (S515), the start lever reception command table is set (S516), and the process returns to the caller.

  In the process of waiting for the rotation of the spinning cylinder to start (S87 in FIG. 15), it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned minimum game time has elapsed, and when the minimum game time has elapsed, the minimum game time data is stored. Subsequently, the condition device output time is stored, and a command transmission waiting process is performed.

  In the rotation rotation start preparation process (S88 in FIG. 15), the rotation stop order data and the push order data are initialized, and the data related to the request to create the rotation stop flag and the number of shifted frames are initialized. Further, the data of the number of initialized symbols is set, and the symbol control data table 1 is set. Also, the initialization start RWM address is set, and the stop symbol data is initialized.

  Subsequently, data relating to an output request at the start of all-round cylinder rotation is set, and the same control command set 1 as described above is executed. Then, the data related to the all-rotation rotation start bit and the rotation start preparation state are set, and data indicating the presence of the rotation start rotation is set.

  Next, the display determination process (S66) in the aforementioned game progress main process (see FIG. 14) will be described. FIG. 17 shows the contents of the display determination (S66) process. In this display determination process, the acquired number display clear process (S401) is executed, and thereafter various data set processes (S402, S403) and E5 error set process (S404) are executed.

  The above-described acquired number display clear process (S401) is for clearing the acquired number display data, and is similar to the acquired number display clear process (S339) in the above-described storage input process (see FIG. 27). It is. Furthermore, the above-described various data set processing (S402, S403) includes setting of an RWM address related to predetermined stop symbol data (S402), and setting of an RWM address related to the number of control symbol groups and kicked symbol data (S404). It is.

  Here, the kicked symbol data is symbol data constituting a symbol combination that does not correspond to the result of the role drawing. The kicked symbol data corresponds to, for example, symbol data related to a part of symbols constituting a symbol combination of BB when the BB (big bonus) is not hit.

  Further, a set calculation related to the kicked symbol is performed (S405), and the correlation between the kicked symbol data and the symbol displayed in the game at this time is calculated. Then, it is determined whether or not the displayed symbol corresponds to the kicked symbol (S406). If the kicked symbol is displayed (S406: YES), the process returns to the unrecoverable error process (see FIG. 29). Transition. This unrecoverable error process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the kick symbol is not displayed (S406: NO), the next stop symbol data address is set (S407) and the next kick symbol data address is set (S408). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination according to the number of control symbol groups has been completed (S409). If the determination has been completed (S409: YES), the process proceeds to a one-line display determination process (S421). Further, when the determination according to the number of control symbol groups has not been completed (S409: NO), the process returns to immediately before the calculation process (S405) related to the kick symbol.

  If the determination according to the number of control symbol groups has been completed in S409 (S409: YES), the process proceeds to S421, and a one-line display determination process is executed. In this one-line display determination process (S421), display determination of one effective line and a data set at the time of display are performed. Specifically, the operation type, the symbol combination display flag, the game medal payout number data, the payout number buffer, and the winning symbol group are stored in accordance with the symbol combination decided to stop on the active line.

  Subsequently, processing for effect display at the time of all-turn cylinder stop is performed by processing of effect display at the time of all-turn cylinder rotation stop (S422). In the effect display process (S422) at the time of all-rotation rotation stop, the process waits until the third stop-time waiting time related to the third stop operation passes, performs the main game state management process, and stops all-rotation rotation. The control command at the time is set, and RWM initialization is performed when all cylinder rotations are stopped.

  Further, the process proceeds to the input / withdrawal sensor abnormality display process (S423), and the input / out sensor abnormality set process is performed as will be described in detail later. Then, the presence / absence of an error display request is checked. If there is an error display request, an error display of the corresponding error is performed; otherwise, the process is terminated. In addition, when the error is released, the input / discharge sensor abnormality is cleared.

  FIG. 57 more specifically shows the above-described insertion / withdrawal sensor abnormality display process (S423 in FIG. 17). In this insertion / withdrawal sensor abnormality display process, as shown in FIG. 57, interrupts are prohibited (S431), the AF register is saved (S432), and the input / withdrawal sensor abnormality set process related to the second control is performed. Perform (S433). Details of the input / withdrawal sensor abnormality setting process (S433) will be described later (see FIG. 36).

  After the loading / dispensing sensor abnormality setting process (S433), the AF register is restored (S434), interrupt is permitted (S435), and error display request data acquisition processing is performed (S436). In this error display request data acquisition process (S436), error display request data is acquired. Then, it is determined whether there is error display request data (S437). If there is no error display request data (S437: NO), the process is terminated. If there is error display request data in S437 (S437: YES), an error display process (S438) is performed. Details of the error display process (S438) will be described later (see FIG. 24).

Thereafter, the interrupt is prohibited (S439), the AF register is saved (S440), and the input / discharge sensor abnormality clear process (S441) related to the second control is performed. Details of the input / withdrawal sensor abnormality clear process will be described later (see FIG. 37). After the input / withdrawal sensor abnormality clear process (S441), the AF register is restored (S442), the interrupt is permitted (S443), and the process returns to the first interrupt prohibition process (S431).
<Timer interrupt processing on the main control board>

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an outline of the timer interrupt process will be described, and among the various control modules used in the timer interrupt process, the main ones in this embodiment will be described later. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals (here, 2.235 ms) based on the power-on process shown in FIG. 12 and the activation in the setting changer process (see S27) shown in FIG. It is.

  In this timer interrupt process, as an initialization process at the start of interrupt, the register value is saved (S541), and the interrupt flag for prohibiting duplicate interrupts is cleared (S542). The register saving process (S541) in this initialization process is to make it possible to use the registers used in the above-described game progress main process (see FIG. 14) in this timer interrupt process. is there.

  Subsequently, a power-off process (S543) is executed. In this power-off process (S543), various processes are performed after the determination of the presence or absence of the power-off detection signal, details of which will be described later. Further, the interrupt counter is updated (S544), input port data generation (S545), rotation drive management (S546), port output (S547), control command transmission (S548), LED display (S549), sub notification data output (S550) and timer measurement (S551) are sequentially executed.

  And after performing these, as shown in a figure, it transfers to the process of error management (S552, refer FIG. 20). Subsequently, an external signal output data management process (S759) and an external signal output process (S760) are sequentially performed. Each of these processes (S759, S760) will be described later.

  Further, the AF register is saved (S761), the process proceeds to the second control, and the test signal output process (762) is performed. This test signal output processing (S762) will be described later (see FIG. 35). When the test signal output process (S762) ends, the process returns to the first control, and the AF register is restored (S763). Then, a soft random number management process (S764) is performed, an interrupt is permitted after register return (S765), and the process ends.

In the following, each process (S543, S545-551, etc.) in the timer interrupt process will be described. First, the power-off process (S543) among the above-described processes will be described first.
<< Power-off process >>

  In the power-off process (S543), as shown in FIG. 19, it is determined whether or not the previous power-off detection signal is ON (S561). If it is ON (S561: YES), this time Input port 0 data is input (S562). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection signal is ON (S563), and if it is ON (S563: YES), the data of the clear output port address and the number of output ports are set (S564).

  Subsequently, the output ports (0 to 6) are turned off (S565), and the next output port address data is set (S566). Further, it is determined whether or not the output is completed (S567). If the output is completed (S567: YES), the stack pointer is saved (S568). If the output is not completed in S567 (S567: NO), the process returns to S565 (S565) for turning off the output ports (0 to 6).

  After S568, the power-off processing completion flag is set (S569), the RWM checksum data is cleared (S570), and the initial data for RWM checksum calculation is cleared (S571). Also, the RWM checksum is calculated (S572), and it is determined whether the calculation for all bytes has been completed (S573). Further, if the calculation for all the bytes has been completed (S573: YES), RWM checksum data is set (S574). Then, access to the RWM is prohibited (S575), the process is looped, and a reset wait state is entered (S576).

  In S561, if the previous power-off detection signal is not ON (S561: NO), or if the power-off detection signal is not ON in S563 (S563: NO), the process ends. .

As a trigger for executing the power-off process, there are a hardware type that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the input of a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop to the NMI terminal (not shown) of the main CPU 81, an interrupt There are software-like processes that are performed by checking the power-off flag set when a voltage drop is detected in the process. Further, a power-off flag may be set based on a power-off signal input to the NMI terminal to trigger execution of power-off processing.
<< Input port data generation >>

Subsequently, in the input port data generation process, the input ports 0 to 2 are read.
<< Cylinder drive management >>

In the process of the above-described spinning cylinder drive management (S546), drive control of each spinning cylinder is performed. More specifically, the number of revolutions is set, and the revolution data address setting process is performed. Further, if the spinning cylinder drive control is performed and the process is completed for all the cylinders, the process proceeds to the port output process (S547 in FIG. 18). In the above processing, when the spinning cylinder drive control is not completed for all the spinning cylinders, the process returns to the spinning cylinder data address set process.
<<< Rotary Cavity Drive Control >>>

  Subsequently, the process of the above-described rotating drum drive control will be described. In the process of the rotating drum drive control, it is determined whether or not the rotating cylinder is stopped. If not, it is determined whether or not it is ready for rotation start. Further, if the rotation preparation preparation is in progress, the rotating drum driving pulse data search counter is corrected, the acceleration state data is set, and the rotating drum driving state data is set in the update address.

  Here, in the process of determining whether or not the spinning cylinder is stopped, if the situation is not that the spinning cylinder is stopped, the process is terminated. Further, if the rotation start preparation status is not determined, if the rotation start preparation status is not set, the rotation drive state data is set to the above-described update address without performing the intermediate processing. Process.

  After the process for setting the data of the spinning cylinder driving state to the update address, the spinning cylinder driving pulse output counter is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the output counter is zero. Further, when the output counter is 0, the drive pulse clear data and the stop state data are set, and the four phases of the motor (cylinder stepping motor) are turned off. Here, in the process of determining whether or not the output counter is 0, if the output counter is not 0, the process ends.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is decelerating. If the vehicle is not decelerating, the rotating drum drive pulse output counter is incremented by one. Further, it is determined whether or not the rotating cylinder is in a constant speed state. If the rotating cylinder is in a constant speed, it is determined whether or not the counter for searching the rotating drum driving pulse data is an even number.

  Then, in the process of determining whether or not the rotation drive pulse data search counter is an even number, if the rotation drive pulse data search counter is an even number, the rotation rotation failure detection counter is incremented by 1 and the rotation drive is performed. Performs pulse update processing. Further, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned rotating cylinder is in a constant speed state. If the cylinder drive pulse data search counter is not an even number, the process for performing the cylinder drive pulse update is performed without performing the intervening process.

  Subsequently, a constant speed state set process is performed to determine whether or not the vehicle is accelerating. Further, if acceleration is being performed, the pulse switching frequency is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether the switching frequency is 0 or not. If the number of times of switching is not 0, the data of the spinning drum drive pulse output counter is set in the update address.

  Further, data on the number of times of pulse switching is acquired, and a rotating cylinder rising pattern table is set. Then, the designated address data set is processed, the spinning control data set of the update address is updated, and the process ends. If it is determined whether or not the number of times of switching is 0 and the number of times of switching is 0, the process is terminated without performing any intervening process.

  If it is determined in the above-described determination process whether or not the rotator is in an accelerating state, a step number RWM address of one symbol is set, and it is determined whether or not it is in constant speed. Further, when the speed is low, a rotation sensor signal is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the acquired rotation sensor signal is that of the rotation sensor of the rotation cylinder being controlled.

  In the determination process of whether or not the acquired rotator sensor signal is that of the rotator sensor of the rotator being controlled, if it is determined that it is that of the rotator sensor of the control rotator, Judgment is made as to whether or not a rising edge of the rotation sensor signal has been detected. Further, if the rotation sensor has risen, the reference symbol number when passing through the rotation sensor is stored, and the rotation rotation detection counter is initialized.

  Subsequently, a reference step number correction value is set, a reference step number at the time of passing through the rotation sensor is generated, the reference step number at the time of passing through the rotation sensor is stored, and the process ends. When the acquired rotator sensor signal is not that of the control target rotator in the process of determining whether or not the acquired rotator sensor signal is that of the rotator sensor of the rotator being controlled Shifts to the process of obtaining the cylinder sensor signal described above. Further, in the process of determining whether or not the rising edge of the rotating drum sensor signal has been detected, if the rising edge of the rotating drum sensor signal is detected, it is determined whether or not the winding drum sensor has been passed. Further, in the determination process for determining whether or not the speed is constant, whether or not the rotation sensor has been passed is determined even when the speed is not low.

  If it is determined whether or not the rotation sensor has passed, if the rotation sensor has been passed, the number of steps of one symbol is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not it has moved by one symbol. If it is determined in the above-described determination process whether or not the rotation sensor has been passed, the process ends. Further, when moving for one symbol, 16 which is the number of steps of one symbol is stored, and the symbol number is updated.

  Further, the step number RWM address of one symbol is set, the symbol number is incremented by 3, and a predetermined division ((symbol number + 3) ÷ 5) is performed. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol number +3 is a multiple of 5. If the determination result is not a multiple of 5, whether or not the symbol position at the start of deceleration has been reached is corrected. Judgment is made.

  In the determination process of whether or not the value of the symbol number +3 is a multiple of 5, if the determination result is a multiple of 5, the deceleration start symbol is not corrected without performing the above-described correction of the symbol step number. Processing for determining whether or not the position has been reached is performed. In the determination process of whether or not the symbol has moved by one symbol, if the rotating cylinder has not moved by one symbol, the above determination of whether or not the deceleration start symbol position has been reached without performing the process in between. Perform the process.

  In the process of determining whether or not the deceleration start symbol position has been reached, if the deceleration start symbol position has been reached, the deceleration pulse counter is set. If the deceleration start symbol position has not been reached, the processing ends. . Further, after setting the deceleration pulse counter, the deceleration state is set, the deceleration pulse data is set, the four phases of the motor are turned on, and the spinning state is set. Here, in the above-described determination process for determining whether or not the vehicle is decelerating, if the vehicle is not decelerating, the process for setting the above-described spinning state is performed without performing the process in between.

After the above process of setting the spinning state, it is determined whether or not the spinning state has changed during deceleration from the start of deceleration, and if the spinning state has changed during deceleration, Set the output request. Then, the process (reference) of the control command set 2 described above is performed (S649), and the process ends. If it is determined whether or not the spinning state has changed during deceleration from the start of deceleration, if there is no change in the spinning state, the process is terminated without performing any intervening process.
<< Port output >>

In the port output process (S547 in FIG. 18), the output ports 0 and 1 are output. More specifically, output port 0 data is generated and output port 0 data is output. Further, the data of the output port 1 is generated (S663), the data of the output port 1 is output, and the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (S548 in FIG. 18).
<< Control command transmission >>

  In the above-described control command transmission process (S548 in FIG. 18), a control command to be transmitted to the peripheral board is output. More specifically, the control command buffer address is set, and the control command read pointer data is acquired. Further, the designated address is set, and the transmission target control command address is set. Then, the presence / absence of a control command is determined. If there is an untransmitted control command, a control command output process is performed and the control command is output to the output ports 7 and 8.

Subsequently, with the sub control data strobe signal turned ON, output data is output to the output port 2, the transmitted control command storage buffer is cleared, and the control command read pointer is updated. Further, output data is output to the output port 2 with the sub control data strobe signal turned OFF. Then, clear data (control command clear data) is output to the output ports 7 and 8, and the process proceeds to LED display processing (S549 in FIG. 18). If there is no untransmitted control command (S675: NO), the output data is output to the output port 2 with the sub-control data strobe signal turned off without performing the process in between. Perform the process.
<< LED display >>

  In the above LED display processing (S549 in FIG. 18), the LED display counter is updated, the LED digit 1-5 signal to be output is determined based on the counter value, and the LED digit 1-5 signal to be output is determined. If there is a display request for the corresponding LED, the LED segment signals A to G corresponding to the data to be output are set. When there is no display request, the LED segment A to G signals are all turned off. When there is a display request for the LED displayed by the LED digit 1 to 5 signal to be output and the LED segment P signal, the LED segment P signal is turned on, the LED digit and the LED segment are output, and the LED digit and Update the LED segment output.

  More specifically, the output ports 3 and 4 corresponding to the LED digit segment are turned off, and the LED display counter is updated. Further, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is 0. If the LED display counter is 0, the LED display counter is initialized, and the LED display counter data and the LED display request flag are acquired.

  If it is determined whether the LED display counter is 0 or not, if the LED display counter is not 0, the LED display counter data and the LED display request flag are acquired without initializing the LED display counter. Further, data relating to confirmation of the digit segment display request to be displayed this time is set, and it is determined whether or not there is a display request. When there is a display request, error display data is acquired and error display data is set.

  Subsequently, the 7-segment LED segment table 2 is set, and setting data is acquired. Further, set value display data is generated, and it is determined whether there is a set value display request. When there is no set value display request, the stored number data is acquired, and the upper digit offset data is acquired.

  Further, it is determined whether there is a storage number (upper digit) display request. If there is no storage number (upper digit) display request, it is determined whether there is a storage number (lower digit) display request. Do. If there is no storage number (lower digit) display request in S707, display data during operation of the setting change device, acquired number data, and display data are acquired, and it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. Do.

  Subsequently, when the error display is in the determination process of whether or not the error is displayed, the 7-segment LED segment table 1 is set, and the data for the upper digit offset is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the acquired number (upper digit). If there is no request, the lower digit offset data is acquired. Further, segment output data is acquired, and it is determined whether or not there is a display request related to a predetermined segment P.

  If there is a segment P display request (S715: YES), segment P output data is set (S716), and output to the output ports 3 and 4 corresponding to the LED digit segment is performed.

  If there is no display request in the determination process for determining whether or not there is a display request, the process proceeds to a process of confirming the display request related to the segment P without performing the process in between. If there is a setting value display request in the determination process of whether or not there is a setting value display request, the process proceeds to the segment output data acquisition process.

  Further, in the process of determining whether or not there is a storage number (upper digit) display request as described above, if there is a storage number (upper digit) display request, the above-described processing for acquiring the lower digit offset data. If the storage number (lower digit) display request is requested in the above-described determination processing for determining whether or not there is a storage number (lower digit) display request, the segment output data acquisition processing described above is performed. Migrate to Further, in the above-described determination processing for determining whether or not the error is being displayed, if the error is not being displayed, the upper-digit offset data is acquired without setting the 7-segment LED segment table 1.

Further, in the process for determining whether or not there is a request for displaying the acquired number (upper digit), if there is a request for displaying the acquired number (upper digit), the process proceeds to the process for acquiring the segment output data. . If there is no segment P display request, the process proceeds to the output processing to the output ports 3 and 4 corresponding to the LED digit segment.
<< Sub notification data output >>

  In the above-described sub notification data output processing (S550 in FIG. 18), the stop buttons 1 to 3 notification data are set by the stop acceptance information data in order to output the notification data to be transmitted to the peripheral board. Further, when all the predetermined conditions relating to whether or not the game medal limit (also referred to as the storage limit number, here 50) has been reached, the three-sheet insertion button notification data is set. Then, setting / reset button notification data, setting key switch notification data, door switch notification data, and setting door switch notification data are set based on the input port 0 level data. Also, the notification data set in the output port 6 is output.

  More specifically, stop acceptance information data is set, and a game medal limit check process is performed. Further, it is determined whether or not the game medal limit has been reached. If not, it is determined whether or not the blocker signal is OFF.

  If the blocker is not OFF, a determination for confirming the number of stored cards is performed, and if there is a stored number, it is determined whether or not a game medal has passed. If the game medal has not been passed in the process of determining whether or not the game medal has been passed, the three-sheet insertion button notification data is set. Then, setting / reset button notification data, setting key switch notification data, door switch notification data, and setting door switch notification data are set. Subsequently, the notification data set in the output port 6 is output.

If the game medal limit has been reached in the process for determining whether or not the game medal limit has been reached, or if the blocker signal has been turned off in the process for determining whether or not the blocker signal has been turned off If there is no stored number in the determination process, or if a game medal passage is detected in the determination process of whether or not the game medal has passed, a process of setting the three-sheet insertion button notification data is performed. First, setting / reset button notification data and the like are set.
<< Timer measurement >>

  In the timer measurement process described above (S551 in FIG. 18), the timer update process is performed, and 1 is subtracted for all timer RWMs (0 is set if less than 0). More specifically, the measurement start timer address is set, and the 1-byte timer number is set. Further, a countdown process is performed and the next timer address is set. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte timer measurement has been completed. If it has been completed, the 2-byte timer number is set. If the 1-byte timer measurement is not completed in the determination process of whether or not the 1-byte timer measurement is completed, the process returns to the countdown process.

After setting the 2-byte timer number in the process for setting the 2-byte timer number, the 2-byte timer value is updated and the next timer address is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement is finished. If the 2-byte timer measurement is not finished, the process returns to the process for updating the above-described 2-byte timer value.
<< Error management >>

  In the error management described above (see FIGS. 18 and 20), as shown in FIG. 20, it is determined whether or not the rise of the output signal (selector path sensor signal) of the selector path sensor is detected (S751). . If the rise of the selector passage sensor signal is detected (S751: YES), the monitoring time when the blocker is OFF (about 100.57 ms in this embodiment) and the monitoring time when the blocker is ON are set (S752). Further, the AF register is saved (S753), the process proceeds to the second control, and an error check process (S754) is performed. The error check process (S754) will be described later (see FIG. 38).

  When the error check process (S754) ends, the process returns to the first control, and the AF register is restored (S755). Further, it is determined whether or not an error is detected (S756). If an error is detected (S756: YES), an output request at the time of error detection is set (S757). If the rising edge of the selector passage sensor signal is not detected in S751 (S751: NO), the process is not performed and the AF register saving process of S753 is performed.

After the output request at the time of error detection is set in S757, the control command set 2 described above is performed (S758), and the process is terminated.
<< External signal output data management >>

  In the external signal output data management process (S759) described above, since the output data generation process of the external signals 1 to 5 is performed, the external signals 1 to 3 are output in accordance with the external signal flag and the external signal 1 management time value. Set the output data. Further, when the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal is ON, the output data of the external signal 5 is set. If the setting key switch signal is ON and the external signal 4 output time has not elapsed or the error detection flag is output when the power is restored, the output data of the external signal 4 is set.

  More specifically, an external signal flag is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the external signal 1 management time has elapsed. If the external signal 1 management time has not elapsed, the external signal 1 output data is set, and it is determined whether or not the door switch signal or the set door switch signal is ON. If it is ON, the output data of the external signal 5 is set, and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON.

  If the setting key switch signal is not ON, a data check of the error detection flag and the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power failure recovery is performed to determine whether or not all data has been lost. If all data is not lost, the external signal 4 output data set is performed, and the process proceeds to external signal output processing (S760 in FIG. 18).

  In the process of determining whether or not the external signal 1 management time has passed, if the external signal 1 management time has passed, the door switch signal or the set door switch signal is output without performing the external signal 1 output data set. It is determined whether or not it is ON. If the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal is not ON, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON without setting the output data of the external signal 5.

Further, if the setting key switch signal is ON, the external signal 4 output data set is performed without performing the process. If all the data is lost in S778, the process proceeds to the external signal output process (S760 in FIG. 18) without performing the above-described external signal 4 output data set.
<< External signal output >>

In the aforementioned external signal output processing (S760 in FIG. 18), output data of the external signals 1 to 5, the medal insertion signal, and the medal payout signal are output.
<< Soft random number management >>

In the soft random number management process (see S764 in FIG. 18), the soft random number update process 2 is performed.
<Power recovery processing>

  Next, the power recovery process described in the above power-on process (see FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. This power recovery process is a process that shifts to the case where the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal (S12: YES) in the above-described power-on process in the main control board 61 (see FIG. 12).

  In the power recovery process shown in FIG. 21, the value in the stack pointer is restored to the power-off state (S311), and the initialization start address and the initialization byte count data are set at the time of power-off recovery (S312). Further, the range defined as the RWM initialization target is initialized (RWM initialization 1 (S313)), and the AF register is saved (S314). Then, after shifting to the second control and performing RWM initialization 2 (see FIG. 30) described later, the process returns to the first control and the AF register is restored (S316).

  Further, in the subsequent input port reading process (S317), the predetermined input ports (0 to 2) are read, and the input data is updated from the one before power-off to the latest one. Further, a timer interrupt is activated (S318), data indicating a power-off process completion flag (power-off execution process flag) is cleared from the RWM (S319), and the process returns to the process of the timer interrupt that occurred when the power was turned off. In the above-described interrupt activation setting process (S318), the interrupt type and timer interrupt cycle are set. After this processing, timer interrupt processing can be executed. In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt cycle is 2.235 ms.

Here, the timer interrupt is started after the input port is read in the input port read process (S317) (S318), as described above, the input data is rewritten to the latest data in the input port read process (S317). It is taken into consideration. For example, if the setting key switch 68 is ON when the power is turned off and the setting key switch 68 is OFF before the power is restored, or if there is no input port reading process (S317), the timer interrupt process is performed. The falling data of the setting key switch 68 is generated by the input port data generation process (see S545 in FIG. 18). More specifically, if the power is turned off and the setting key switch 68 is changed as described above in the “display when waiting for the insertion of a game medal” (see S55 in FIG. 14), the power is turned off. At the time of return, an unintended process of shifting from the set value confirmation state to the normal state is executed based on the falling data. Therefore, as described above, the timer interrupt is started (S318) after the input port is read (S317).
<Error type>

  Next, among various errors in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, an error relating to handling of game medals will be described. As errors relating to handling of this game medal, there are errors that can be recovered after the error is canceled and errors that cannot be recovered. Among these errors, errors that can be returned include HE errors, HP errors, HQ errors, and FE errors, which are errors related to the payout of game medals, and CP errors, which are errors related to the insertion of game medals. There are C0 error, C1 error, CH error, and CE error.

  Among the above-mentioned various errors, the HE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal in the game medal payout device 63 is empty, and the HP error is a game medal at the game medal exit in the game medal payout device 63. This is an error when it is determined that the blockage has occurred. Further, the HQ error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the payout sensor (not shown), and the FE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is full as described above. .

  The CP error is an error when it is determined that the inserted game medal has illegally passed, and the C0 error is the case where it is determined that there has been an abnormal input to the insertion sensor (here, the insertion sensor 2) as described above. Is an error. Further, the C1 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the portion where the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 are provided in the medal passage 105, and the CH error is a game to the selector passage sensor 46 as described above. This is an error when it is determined that medals have accumulated. The CE error is an error when it is determined that a game medal has stayed in a portion where the insertion sensor 1 (115) or the insertion sensor 2 (116) is provided.

  The error canceling condition relating to these errors is that a canceling operation for changing the signal of the setting / reset button 69 (setting / reset button signal) from OFF to ON with the factor removed is performed. Further, when the door switch signal related to the door switch 60 and the setting door switch signal related to the setting door switch 67 are ON, the above-described release operation becomes valid.

On the other hand, errors that cannot be recovered include an E1 error, an E5 error, an E6 error, and an E7 error. Among these, the E1 error is an error when the power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, and the E5 error is an error when the symbol combination display at the time of all cylinder stops is abnormal. Further, the E6 error is an error when the set value is out of the range, and the E7 error is an abnormality in the frequency of the clock input to the RCK terminal (not shown) for updating the random number in the main CPU 81 or a built-in random number (16 bits). This is an error when an abnormal update state is detected.
<< CP error (game medal illegal passing) >>

  Next, detection modes of CP errors, C0 errors, C1 errors, CH errors, and CE errors, which are errors related to game medal insertion, will be described. First, regarding the CP error, the insertion sensor ON / OFF sequence as shown in FIG. 8A is normal in the above-described processing at the time of game medal insertion (more specifically, processing of game medal insertion check described later). It is determined that the game has passed, and one game medal is accepted. That is, in FIG. 8A, the closing sensor ON / OFF order is shown in five steps at the left end. Further, on the right side, ON / OFF states of the closing sensor 1 signal and the closing sensor 2 signal in the respective stages 1 to 5 are shown. The insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal are normally OFF and are turned ON when a game medal is detected.

  When no game medal is detected, as shown in order 1, both the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal are OFF. When a regular game medal enters the game medal entrance 106 of the game medal selector 44 and flows down the medal passage 105, the insertion sensor 1 signal located upstream of the medal passage 105 is first displayed as shown in order 2. Then, while the closing sensor 1 signal is in the ON state, as shown in order 3, the closing sensor 2 signal is also turned ON. Furthermore, as the game medals flow down, the insertion sensor 1 signal is turned off first as shown in order 4, and then the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal are both turned off as shown in order 5. Become. Then, when ON / OFF of the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal is detected in this order, the main CPU 81 (see FIG. 5) determines that one game medal has passed normally. . More specifically, the determination result of the selector passage sensor arrangement site retention error (CH error), which will be described later, is also referred to, and when both errors are not detected, the main CPU 81 detects one game. It is determined that the medal has passed normally.

In other cases, it is determined that the game medal has been illegally passed and an error occurs. However, as shown in the order 1 to 3 in FIG. 8B, when the insertion sensor 1 signal is detected as ON, and the insertion sensor 2 signal is not detected, the game medal returns to the upstream side. It is handled as a thing, no error occurs, and the input of the input sensor 1 signal is invalidated. The reason why no error occurs in such a case as shown in FIG. 8B is that the game medal may detect only the insertion sensor 1 even when the blocker is OFF. Even in such a case, if an error notification or a game stop process is performed, the player's game rhythm is disrupted, so control is performed so that an error is not determined.
<< C0 error (input sensor error input) >>

  Next, in the C0 error, as shown in FIG. 8C, the blocker signal, which is data for controlling the blocker (47), is switched from ON (game medal passing state) to OFF (game medal returning state). ), After a predetermined time (about 500.60 ms in this case) has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the input sensor 2 signal has been input while the blocker is OFF (returned state). This predetermined time is a starting sensor abnormal input detection start time, which will be described later, and is a time until detection of abnormal input related to the inputting sensor is started.

  Then, after a predetermined time (starting sensor abnormality input detection start time) has elapsed, the input signal is input to the input sensor 2 even though the blocker signal remains OFF (game medal return state). In the case), it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the input sensor (45), and error monitoring is enabled (ON) as shown in the middle of the figure. When an error is detected in this way, the input sensor 2 signal is turned on until the error factor is removed, an error display output request corresponding to the C0 error is made, and the C0 error is displayed at a predetermined timing thereafter. Executed. The timing for displaying the error includes waiting for a game medal to be inserted, waiting for a star lever reception, or after stopping the rotation of all the cylinders.

However, in this embodiment, while the CE error, CP error, CH error, C0 error, or C1 error has already occurred, the detection factor of the C0 error as shown in FIG. However, it is not judged as an abnormal input.
<< C1 error (medal passage abnormality) >>

  Next, in the C1 error, when the selector passage sensor 46 is turned from OFF to ON as shown in the middle part of FIG. 9A, the insertion monitoring counter is incremented by 1 as shown in the upper part of the figure. Further, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by 1 when the insertion sensor 2 signal when the game medal normally passes the insertion sensor 45 is changed from ON to OFF. When the input sensor 2 signal in the case of normal input is switched from ON to OFF, the input monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and the input monitoring counter is out of a predetermined range (for example, a range of 0 to 3). Results in an error.

  That is, when the input monitoring counter is a value within a predetermined range, it is determined as normal, and when it is out of the predetermined range, it is determined as abnormal. The maximum value (here, 3) of the predetermined range related to this insertion monitoring counter can be determined by the relationship between the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the insertion sensor 2 (105) and the size of the game medal. For example, when the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the insertion sensor 2 (116) exceeds the diameter of the game medal and is less than or equal to the dimension in which two game medals are arranged (here, 50 (= 25 × 2) mm). It is assumed that a maximum of three game medals are arranged between the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 2 (116) with one entire game medal and one part of each two game medals. Is done. For this reason, the maximum value of the predetermined range related to the input monitoring counter can be set to 3.

In addition to this concept, for example, in order to provide more certainty in error detection, the maximum value of the predetermined range related to the input monitoring counter is set to “2” or the error detection accuracy is deliberately eased. It is also possible to set the maximum value to “4”. Furthermore, the maximum value can be set to a value other than “3” or “4” according to the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the closing sensor 2 (116). Further, the distance from the selector passage sensor 46 to the closing sensor 2 (116) may be from the most upstream portion of the selector passage sensor 46 to the central portion (optical axis portion) of the microsensor of the closing sensor 2 (116), or the selector passage. Various settings can be made, for example, from the central portion of the sensor 46 to the most upstream portion of the closing sensor 2 (116). As will be described later, the input monitoring counter is cleared to 0 when the blocker signal is switched from OFF to ON.
<< CH error (selector passage sensor placement area retention) >>

Next, in the CH error, as shown in FIG. 9B, when a predetermined time (here, 446.97 ms, which is the selector passage sensor residence time) has passed with the selector passage sensor 46 turned ON, It is judged that it has stayed and an error occurs. This predetermined time is the stay determination passage time related to the selector passage sensor. When an error is detected, an error display output request corresponding to the CH error is issued, and the CH error display is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter. The timing for displaying the error includes waiting for a game medal to be inserted, waiting for a star lever reception, or after stopping the rotation of all the cylinders. However, in this embodiment, when a CE error, CP error, CH error, C0 error, or C1 error has already occurred, the CH error detection factor as shown in FIG. However, it is not judged as abnormal input.
<< CE error (Standing sensor placement part stay) >>

  Next, in the case of a CE error, as shown in FIG. 10, when a game medal is inserted, if the stay determination passing time related to the insertion sensor is outside the range of A to C in FIG. Error. Here, time A in the figure is a stay determination passing time from ON to OFF of the making sensor 1, and time B is a staying determination passing time from ON of the making sensor 2 to OFF of the making sensor 1. Furthermore, time C is a stay determination passage time from ON to OFF of the closing sensor 2. In this embodiment, the residence determination passage times A to C are 4.47 ms ≦ A <143.03 ms, 2.23 ms ≦ B <98.33 ms, and 4.47 ms ≦ C <143.03 ms. .

As processing at the time of error display, a detected error display output request is made at the start of error display or when an error is detected. In addition, an error code corresponding to each error is displayed on the aforementioned acquired number display LED, and the game is stopped. Here, the stop of the game will be described later. Further, as a process for canceling the error, the acquired number display LED is returned to the state before the error, an output request is made at the end of the error display, and then the game is resumed.
<Control processing related to game medal insertion>

  Next, the control process related to the insertion of the game medals will be described more specifically based on FIGS. The process described here is a part of the control module (program module) executed according to the situation in each process in the above-described game progress main process (see FIG. 14) and timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). . That is, what will be described here relates to the first control among the control processes related to the insertion of the game medals, and details related to the second control will be described later.

  Among the control processes related to the insertion of game medals, the processes related to the first control include a game medal acceptance start process (see FIG. 22), a blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A), and a blocker OFF process (see FIG. 23). 23 (b)), error display processing (see FIG. 24), and input error set processing (see FIG. 25).

  Among these control modules, the game medal acceptance start process, the blocker ON process, the blocker OFF process, and the error display process shown in FIGS. 22 to 24 are performed in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). Various processes are executed as necessary. More specifically, the game medal acceptance start process is executed in the game start set process (S52) in FIG. 14, and the display process when waiting for the game medal insertion is similar to the game in FIG. This is executed in the display process (S55) when waiting for the insertion of medals. Then, a blocker ON process (described later) is performed through a game medal acceptance start process, and the above-described blocker 47 is turned on (passable state) so that a game medal can be inserted.

  Furthermore, the blocker ON process, the blocker OFF process, and the error display process are versatile processes. Among these processes, the blocker ON process is, for example, the above-described game medal acceptance start process (FIG. 22). Reference), display processing when waiting for the insertion of a game medal (see S55 in FIG. 14), game medal settlement processing (see FIG. 28), and the like may be executed depending on the situation.

  Also, the blocker OFF process includes a display process when waiting for a game medal to be inserted (see S55 in FIG. 14), a game medal clearing process (specifically, a blocker OFF process before the game medal is liquidated). Executed), start lever check processing (S58 in FIG. 14), start lever reception processing (S59 in FIG. 14), etc., may be executed depending on the situation.

  Further, the error display process is executed according to the situation in the game medal clearing process, the start lever check process (S58 in FIG. 14), the game medal payout process by winning (S67 in FIG. 14), and the like. There is a case.

For the control module executed in the timer interrupt process, data (for example, a flag indicating abnormality detection) set in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) before the occurrence of the timer interrupt process in the current cycle is generated. Will be handled. Below, each process mentioned as the control process which concerns on insertion of a game medal is demonstrated, and the mutual relationship between these processes is demonstrated after that.
<Receiving game medals>

  The aforementioned game medal acceptance start process (see FIG. 22) is a process for starting the game medal acceptance, and the game medal selector 44 (see FIGS. 2, 6, and 7) returns the game medal return state (see FIG. 22). The game medal accepting state (passable state) can be controlled when the predetermined condition is satisfied from the state where the game medal cannot be passed, and the game medal can be inserted from the game medal slot 21 (see FIG. 1). The process for doing so is performed. In the game medal reception start process, as shown in FIG. 22, the game medal number data is first cleared (S101), and then the inserted number display LED is turned off (S102). Further, a game medal management flag is initialized (S103), and an operation flag check process (S104) is executed. The operation flag check process (S104) is a process for confirming the presence / absence of operations such as an accessory, an accessory continuous operation device, and a re-game.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a re-game operation (S105). If it is not a re-game operation (S105: NO), the game medal can pass through the blocker 47 (see FIG. 7). Then, the process proceeds to the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A), which will be described later, and if re-playing is in operation (S105: YES), automatic insertion waiting time 1 (237 interrupt: about 529.65 ms) is set ( S106). Further, it is determined whether or not the display type data is 0 (S107). If the display type data is 0 (S107: YES), the process proceeds to a 2-byte time waiting process (S111). This 2-byte time waiting process (S111) is a process of waiting until the designated waiting time (automatic input waiting time 1) becomes zero. Here, the display type data is data indicating the type of the re-gamer that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the display type data 0 is displayed when a predetermined re-playing combination in which “replay-replay-replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line or the invalid line is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, a specific replay player whose “replay-replay-replay” is not stopped and displayed on the active line or the invalid line (eg, “bell-bell-bell”, “red 7-red 7-red 7”) Is displayed, display type data 1 is displayed. The display type data is stored in the RWM 83 at the time of winning determination, and is intended to change the time until the automatic insertion process is started based on the stopped symbol combination. For example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the display type data 1 is taken as an example, an effect corresponding to a small combination or bonus combination is set when waiting for the set 2-byte time by setting an automatic insertion standby time 2 (described later). By outputting sound, the player can recognize the established combination as a small combination or a bonus combination.

  In the display type data determination (S107), if the display type data is not 0 (S107: NO), the automatic insertion standby time 2 (500 interrupts: about 1119.50 ms) is set (S108), The process shifts to the above-described 2-byte time waiting process (S111).

  After the process of waiting for 2 bytes (S111), a process for reading the number of stored sheets is executed (S112). In this stored number reading process (S112), the stored number data is read, and the presence / absence of storage and the number of stored numbers are checked. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the storage number has reached the storage limit number (here, 50) (S113). If the storage number has not reached the storage limit number (S113: NO), the blocker ON is determined. Processing (S114) is executed. The blocker ON process (S114) will be described later. On the other hand, if the storage number has reached the storage limit number (S113: YES), the process proceeds to the display type data acquisition process (S116) without performing the blocker ON process (S114).

  With such a configuration, when the re-game is not activated (S105: NO), the blocker ON process can be executed regardless of the number of stored sheets, and when the re-game is activated (S105: YES). The blocker ON process can be performed according to the number of stored sheets. Therefore, (1) Even if the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is a symbol combination that does not seem to be replayed, a uniform medal can be inserted, (2) a blocker ON process can be realized with less program processing, and (3) a medal. Compared to the blocker ON processing after detecting the block, the swallowing (intake) of medals can be reduced. (4) Even if the game has a high replay probability, the player can insert medals at a constant rhythm. There are effects such as being able to.

  After the determination process (S113) related to the number of stored sheets or the blocker ON process (S114), display type data is acquired (S116), and it is determined whether the display type data is 1 (S117). . When the display type data is 1 (S117: YES), the 3-sheet insertion display LED-R (red) is turned on (S118), and the automatic insertion standby time 3 (8949 interrupt: about 19999.49 ms) is set. (S119) and the input detection standby time is stored (S120). Further, the inputs of the selector passage sensor signal, the single sheet switch signal, the three sheet sensor signal, and the clearing switch signal are checked (S121), and it is determined whether or not these inputs have been made (S122). Here, lighting of the three-sheet display LED-R (red) (S118) functions as a notification that prompts the player to operate the BET (bet) button. If any one of the inputs is received (S122: YES), the input detection waiting time is cleared (S123), and the input information command is set (S124). Here, the input information command refers to a command indicating the state of “selector path sensor signal, 1 sheet insertion switch signal, 3 sheet insertion sensor signal, 3 sheet insertion switch signal”. In S122 described above, if there is no input (S122: NO), the input information command is set without clearing the input detection waiting time (S123) (S124). In other words, the automatic insertion standby time 3 is canceled based on the passage of time or the above input information (selector path sensor signal, one sheet insertion switch signal, three sheet insertion sensor signal, three sheet insertion switch signal). By adopting such a control mode, there is an effect that when a re-playing combination belonging to the display type data 1 is displayed, it can be made to appear as a small combination or a bonus combination.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the input detection waiting time has elapsed (S125). If it has not elapsed (S125: NO), the process returns to S121 to check input of various signals. If the input detection waiting time has elapsed in S125 (S125: YES), the three-sheet insertion display LED is turned off (S126), and an output request for input information is set (S127). If the display type data is not 1 in S117 (S117: NO), an output request for input information is set without performing the processing of S118 to S126 (S127). Then, the process of the control command set 1 is executed (S128). In this embodiment, the process of the control command set 1 (S128) performs the process of the control command set 2. The process of the control command set 2 is a process for storing the above-described sub control command in a ring buffer (transmission buffer) that is temporarily stored before transmission. In the subsequent steps, there is a processing step of “setting an output request”, but this is a process of storing information (command) to be transmitted to the sub-control means (sub-control board 31 in this case) in a register. Point to.

  Thereafter, the re-game display LED is turned on (S129), the output request at the time of automatic input is set (S130), and the processing of the control command set 1 (S131) which is the same as S128 described above is executed. Then, a process for adding one game medal (S132) is executed, and in the process for adding one game medal (S132), one game medal number is added and a display process of the inserted number display LED is performed. More specifically, in the process of adding one game medal (S132), although not shown, the game medal number data is incremented by 1 and the acquired number display data is cleared. Further, the inserted number display LED signal data corresponding to the game medal number data is stored, the game medal limit set process is performed, and the game medal read process is performed. When the game medal number data matches the game medal limit number (the above-mentioned prescribed number), the game medal limit flag is set.

After the process of adding one game medal (S132), the above-mentioned game medal limit flag is confirmed (S133). If the number of game medals has not reached the game medal limit (S133: NO), one game medal is added. The process returns to (S132). In S133, if the number of game medals has reached the game medal limit (S133: YES), the process returns and returns to the process that was executed before the start of the game medal reception start process as a subroutine.
<Blocker ON>

  Next, the blocker ON process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), this blocker ON process determines whether or not the blocker OFF monitoring time (about 100.57 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed (S211). (S211: NO), S211 is repeated until it elapses. If the monitoring time when the blocker is OFF has elapsed (S211: YES), interruption is prohibited (S212), the blocker signal is turned ON (S213), and the input monitoring counter is cleared (S214). Further, the blocker signal state is turned ON (S215), the interrupt is permitted (S216), and the process returns to the process before the start of the blocker ON process. Here, the “blocker signal_ON” in S213 indicates a process of storing “1” in the RWM area for turning on the blocker 47 in this embodiment. In the figure, “_” is omitted (the same applies hereinafter). By the process of S213, the blocker 47 is turned on by the port output process (S547) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) executed after the process. Note that the process of S213 can be a process of storing “1” in an output port for directly outputting a blocker signal.

  In addition, the “input monitoring counter_clear” in S214 indicates a process of setting the data in the RWM 83 of the input monitoring counter updated when there is an input from the selector passage sensor 46 to 0 in this embodiment. By this processing, for example, after the binary data determined to have passed through the selector passage sensor 46 is “10B”, an error is determined when a game medal insertion check (see FIGS. 42 and 43) described later is executed. Can be prevented. Furthermore, “blocker signal state_ON” in S215 indicates that information indicating that a medal can be inserted is stored in the RWM 83 in this embodiment. By the process of S215, the lamp (game start display LED) indicating that a game medal can be inserted can be turned on by the LED display process (S75) of the interrupt process executed after the process. Note that the processing order of S213 to S215 is not limited to this.

  The blocker signal ON process described above is performed after the monitoring time when the blocker is OFF (S211: YES). The reason for this is to prevent the medal from being caught by not turning on the blocker 47 when there is a possibility that a game medal is passing. That is, as in this embodiment, the blocker signal is turned on after determining whether or not the monitoring time at blocker OFF has passed (S211) (S213), and the ON operation of the blocker 47 is retained for a predetermined period. It is possible to secure a time for waiting for the game medal to pass before the blocker signal is output from the main control board 61 and the blocker 47 performs the mechanical operation.

  Further, the above-described interruption inhibition (S212) is executed after waiting for the blocker OFF monitoring time to elapse (S211). In this embodiment, as described above for the C1 error (see FIG. 9A) related to the making sensor and the selector passage sensor, the value of the making monitoring counter is increased or decreased based on the detection of the selector passage sensor signal and the making sensor 2 signal. Then, the blocker 47 is turned off when the value of the input monitoring counter exceeds a predetermined range (for example, a range of 0 to 3). In the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A), the process related to the blocker signal (S213, S215) and the process related to the input monitoring counter (S214) are executed as a series of processes. And matching between the selector path sensor signal and the detection result of the closing sensor 2 signal.

  If a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) occurs between the blocker signal ON process (S213) and the blocker signal state ON process (S215), the timer interrupt process (interrupt) ), As described above, the blocker 47 can be turned on (passable state) through predetermined processing (here, S545 for creating input data, S547 for performing port output, etc.). However, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), since the blocker signal state ON process (S215) following the blocker signal ON process (S213) is not performed, the predetermined process (in this case) In S549), which is an LED display process, the lamp (game start display LED) indicating that a game medal can be inserted cannot be turned on. That is, a situation may occur in which the game start display LED is not displayed even though the blocker 47 is ON.

However, as in this embodiment, the interrupt is prohibited (S212), the processing related to the blocker signal (S213, S215), the processing related to the input monitoring counter (S214), and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18). By executing as a series of processes that do not intervene, it is possible to match the operation of the blocker 47 and the LED display, and it is possible to perform appropriate control related to the insertion of game medals.
<< Blocker OFF >>

  Next, the blocker OFF process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 23B, this blocker OFF process determines whether or not the blocker signal is OFF (S221). If the blocker signal is not OFF (S221: NO), the interrupt is prohibited. (S222), the blocker signal is turned off (S223), and the blocker signal state is turned off (S224). Furthermore, the input sensor abnormal input detection start time (about 500.60 ms in this embodiment) described above for the C0 error is set (S225), an interrupt is permitted (S226), and the process before the start of the blocker OFF process is performed. Return. Here, “blocker signal_OFF” in S223 indicates processing of storing “0” in the RWM area for turning on the blocker 47 in this embodiment. By this process, the blocker 47 is turned off by the port output process (S547) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) executed after the process. Note that the process of S223 can be a process of storing “1” in an output port for directly outputting a blocker signal.

  Furthermore, “blocker signal state_OFF” in S224 indicates that in the present embodiment, information indicating that a medal cannot be inserted is stored in the RWM 83. By this process, the lamp (game start display LED) indicating that a game medal can be inserted is kept off. Further, in the input sensor abnormal input detection start time set in S225, a predetermined time related to the C0 error (about 500.60 ms in this embodiment) is set.

  Also in the blocker OFF processing (see FIG. 23B), the setting of the input sensor abnormal input detection start time (S225) is prohibited after interrupting (S222), the blocker signal OFF (S223), and the blocker signal. This is performed following each process of the state OFF (S224). That is, in the blocker OFF process, the process related to the blocker signal (S223, S224) and the input sensor abnormal input detection start time set (S225) which is a process related to the input error check are executed as a series of processes.

  Further, when a timer interrupt (see FIG. 18) occurs between the blocker signal OFF (S223) and the blocker signal state OFF (S224), a predetermined time in the timer interrupt processing (interrupt) at this time As described above, the blocker 47 can be in an OFF state (returned state) through processing (here, S79 for creating input data, S82 for performing port output, etc.). However, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), the blocker signal state OFF process (S224) following the blocker signal OFF process (S223) is not performed. In S75) which is an LED display process, the lamp (game start display LED) indicating that a game medal can be inserted cannot be reliably turned off. That is, a situation may occur in which the game start display LED is lit while the blocker 47 is OFF.

However, as in this embodiment, the interrupt is prohibited (S222), and the blocker signal OFF (S223) and the blocker signal state OFF (S224) are processed as a series of processes not involving the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). By executing this, it is possible to match the operation of the blocker 47 and the LED display, and it is possible to perform appropriate control related to the insertion of game medals.
<< Error display >>

  Next, error display processing will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 24, in this error display process, the error number is saved (S231), and the status information relating to the pre-error blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal is saved (S232). When saving the status information, the RWM 83 saves data from the status information storage area (blocker signal data storage area, hopper motor drive signal data storage area) to a predetermined storage area (C register serving as the status information save area). Executed. Further, the information in the hopper motor drive signal data storage area in the state information storage area is cleared (S233), and the blocker OFF process (S234) is executed. This blocker OFF process (S234) performs the above-described blocker OFF process (see FIG. 23B). Then, the start lever acceptance permission flag is cleared (S235), the acquired number display information is saved (S236), and an error display is set (S237). When saving the acquired number display information, data saving from the acquired number display information storage area in the RWM 83 to a predetermined storage area (B register serving as the acquired number display information save area) is executed.

  Further, an output request at the start of error display is set (S238), the process of control command set 1 is executed (S239), and the rise of the setting / reset button signal (setting button signal or reset button signal) is detected. It is determined whether or not (S240). If the rising edge of the setting / reset button signal is not detected in S240 described above (S240: NO), S240 is repeated until it is detected, but if the rising edge of the setting / reset button signal is detected. (S240: YES), the setting / reset button signal rising data is cleared (S241).

  Subsequently, the full detection signal inspection data is set (S242), and it is determined whether or not it is at the time of the above-mentioned FE error related to the payout of game medals (S243). If it is determined in S243 that the FE error has not occurred (S243: NO), the payout inspection data is set (S244), and it is determined whether or not it is a payout related error (S245). If it is determined that the payout-related error has not occurred (S245: NO), the inspection data of the making sensor and the selector passage sensor is set (S246), and the input state for each error based on the inspection data is checked (S247). . Specifically, this corresponds to the process of checking the level data of the input sensor 45 (input sensors 1 and 2), the level data of the selector passage sensor 46, and the level data of the payout sensor (not shown). If it is determined in S243 that the FE error has occurred (S243: YES) and if it is determined in S245 that the payout-related error has occurred (S245: YES), the above process is not performed. The process proceeds to S247.

After the above-mentioned S247, it is determined whether or not the error factor has been removed (S248). If the error factor has not been removed (S248: NO), the process returns to the above-described S240, and the rise of the setting / reset button signal It is determined whether or not is detected. “Removal of error factor” in the present embodiment indicates that the level data of the various sensors described above is “0”. If the error factor has been removed (S248: YES), the error number is cleared (S249), the acquired number display is restored (S250), and an output request at the end of the error display is set (S250). Further, the process of the control command set 1 is executed (S252), the blocker signal before the error and the state information of the hopper motor drive signal are restored (S253), and the hopper motor drive signal is restored (S254). Then, it is determined whether or not the blocker signal before the error is ON (S255). If it is ON (S255: YES), the blocker ON process (S256) is executed, and the error display process is started. Return to the previous process. On the other hand, if the blocker signal before the error is not ON (S255: NO), the process returns without executing the blocker ON process (S256).
<< Input error set >>

  Next, input error set processing will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, this input error set process updates an abnormal input flag (also referred to as “abnormality occurrence flag”, “error flag”, etc.) (S301). In S301, although not shown, the data stored in the A register is saved in the D register. Further, a logical operation (OR) of the data stored in the A register and the data stored in the E register is executed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. Then, the value of the A register is stored (updated) in an abnormal input data storage area provided at a predetermined address of the RWM 83.

  That is, S301 executes a process of storing the abnormal input flag data stored in the abnormal input data storage area of the RWM 83 in the A register. Here, the abnormal input flag in this embodiment is composed of 1 byte data, the D0 to D3 bits are unused, the D4 bit is the selector passage sensor retention, the D5 bit is the input sensor 2 abnormal input, and the D6 bit is the payout sensor abnormal input. The D7 bit is unused. For example, when only the selector passage sensor stagnation is detected, the abnormal input flag is “00010000B”. If an abnormality of the payout sensor is detected after the selector passage sensor stay is detected, the abnormality input flag is “01010000B”.

  In S301 described above, using the data of the abnormal input flag described above, creation of data indicating whether or not to transmit (data for determining whether or not to perform an output request) and a command for transmitting (Control command) creation. That is, in creating data for determining whether or not to transmit, the value of the D register is stored in the A register. Then, the logical operation (AND) of the A register and the E register is executed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. For example, when the value of the A register is “01000000B” and the value of the E register is “00010000B”, the value of the A register after the logical operation (AND) is “00000000” (Example 1). For example, when the value of the A register is “01010000B” and the value of the E register is “00010000B”, the value of the A register after the logical operation (AND) is “00010000B” (example 2). .

  On the other hand, in creating a command for transmission, a logical operation (XOR) of the A register and the E register is executed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. For example, if the value of the A register is “00000000B” as in Example 1 and the value of the E register is “01000000B”, the value of the A register after the logical operation (XOR) is “01000000B”. . For example, when the value of the A register is “00010000B” as in Example 2 and the value of the E register is “00010000B”, the value of the A register after the logical operation (XOR) is “00000000B”. "

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an abnormal input error is detected (S302). The determination performed in S302 is to check whether or not the abnormal input flag updated in S301 is a new one (whether it is not a duplicate one). Such an inspection is performed by determining whether or not the data stored in the storage area (abnormal input flag storage area) targeted by the RWM 83 is the same before and after the update. More specifically, when the value of the A register is “0”, that is, when the above-described Z (zero flag) is “= 1”, it is determined NO, and when the value of the A register is other than “0”, that is, the above-described Z (zero flag) ) Is determined to be YES when “≠ 1”.

If a new abnormal input error is detected (S302: YES), an output request at the start of error display is set (S303). In S303, a predetermined value (= 01H) is stored in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to the process of the control command set 1. The control command set 1 which is the transition destination of the input error check performs the process of the control command set 2 as described above. Here, the process of the control command set 2 is a process for storing the above-described sub control command in the transmission buffer. With this control command set 1 (control command set 2), information such as the type of error can be transmitted to the sub-control board 31. In S302 described above, if an abnormal input error has already been detected (S302: NO), the process returns and returns to the original process.
<Relationship between blocker operation control and other processing>
<< Relationship with Replay >>

  Next, the relationship between the process for operating the blocker 47 and other processes will be described. First, here, the relationship between the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A) and replay will be described. First, as described above, the blocker 47 (see FIG. 7) is in a state where a game medal can pass when it is turned on, and is returned to a game medal when it is turned off. Control for turning on the blocker 47 is a game. The progress main process (see FIG. 14) is executed using the blocker ON process shown in FIG.

  In addition, until a drive signal is input to the blocker 47 through the blocker ON process described above and the blocker 47 performs a mechanical operation, the port output process (S547) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) described above is performed. ) And control command transmission processing (S548). The timer interrupt process occurs every predetermined period (here 2.235 ms). Therefore, even if the blocker signal ON data is set in the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A) (S213), a timer interrupt occurs thereafter, and the blocker 47 can actually pass the game medal. By this time, there will be a delay in control and mechanical operation. Then, after the blocker signal ON data is set, until the blocker 47 actually closes the second exit 108 (see FIG. 7), the blocker 47 is in the OFF state in the game progress main process. It can be said that this is the situation.

  Further, as described above, the selector passage sensor 46 (see FIG. 7) can detect the passage of game medals, and is disposed upstream of the insertion sensor 45 and the blocker 47 (upstream of the medal passage 105). ing. The determination on whether or not a game medal has passed using the selector passage sensor 46 can be made before the game medal reaches the insertion sensor 45 or the blocker 47. Further, the first movable portion 112 and the second movable portion 114 of the selector passage sensor 46 have a function of preventing a game medal from flowing backward by protruding into the medal passage 105.

  If the start lever 25 is operated, the blocker 47 is turned off and the medal is returned. At this time, the blocker OFF process shown in FIG. Data for turning off the blocker signal is stored in the area (blocker signal data storage area). Here, whether or not the start lever 25 is operated is performed in S59 of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), but in the explanation of the main operation of FIG. 14 and the game progress main process, the blocker 47 is controlled. Such processing (not shown) and description thereof are omitted.

  In this embodiment, as shown during the game medal acceptance start process in FIG. 22, it is determined in S105 whether or not the regame operation is in progress. Furthermore, if it is during re-playing operation (S105: YES), processing for reading the stored number (S112), determination of whether the stored number has reached the storage limit number (S113), and the like are performed. Then, if the number of stored sheets has reached a specific value (here, 50) that is the storage limit number, the blocker ON process (S114) is executed.

  In the blocker ON process (S114), as shown in FIG. 23A, it is determined whether or not the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed (S211). Thus, in this embodiment, it is set to about 100.57 ms, and the time is measured based on the timer data stored in the monitoring time storage area when the blocker is OFF in the RWM 83. The monitoring time when the blocker is OFF substantially coincides with the time required for executing the above-described timer interruption cycle (here 2.235 ms) a predetermined number of times (here 50 times).

  If the monitoring time when the blocker is OFF has elapsed (S211: YES), the data for turning on the blocker signal is stored in the blocker signal data storage area of the RWM 83 after interruption is prohibited (S212) ( S213). Further, after clearing the input monitoring counter (S214) and setting the blocker signal ON flag (S215), the interrupt is permitted (S216), and the process returns to the process before starting the blocker ON process. Then, in the timer interrupt (see FIG. 18) generated at the timing after this interrupt permission (S216), the blocker 47 is mechanically driven through the processing of the port output (S82) and the like, and the insertion of the game medal can be accepted. It becomes.

  On the other hand, if the re-game is not in operation (S105: NO in FIG. 22), the blocker ON process shown in FIG. A series of processing from monitoring of the OFF monitoring time (S211) to interrupt permission (S216) is executed. Thus, by performing the processing of S113 and the like at the time of replaying, it is possible to accept the insertion of game medals according to the status of the number of stored games even at the time of replaying.

  In this embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the input detection process related to the selector passage sensor 46 and the operation information output process for operating the blocker 47 based on the blocker ON signal data and the blocker OFF signal data. Has been done. That is, the input detection process based on the selector path sensor signal is performed by the timer interrupt process input port data generation process (S545) and the second control error check process (see FIG. 38) described later. The drive data output process for operating is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process. Then, these input detection processing and operation information output processing are executed at a timing according to the control state at that time in the timer interrupt processing based on the data set in the game progress main processing.

  In the blocker OFF processing (see FIG. 23B) for setting the blocker 47 to the OFF state (returned state), the input sensor abnormal input detection start time is set (S225) as described above. In this embodiment, the input sensor abnormal input detection start time is set to about 500.60 ms. This input sensor abnormal input detection start time substantially coincides with the time (time required for 224 interrupts) required to execute the above-described timer interrupt cycle (here 2.235 ms) a predetermined number of times (here, 224 times). Yes. Then, after the elapse of the closing sensor abnormal input detection start time, an abnormal input related to the closing sensor is detected.

  According to the control mode related to replay as described above, when there is a possibility that a game medal is passing, it is possible to prevent the medal from being caught by not turning on the blocker 47. That is, in the medal path 105, in the vicinity of the selector path sensor 46 and the blocker 47, the presence of the bent portion 110 (see FIG. 7), the eccentricity between adjacent game medals, and the blocker 47 are turned on. There is a possibility that the game medals may be engaged with each other due to the influence of the timing to be performed and the game medals may be caught.

  Particularly, for example, when a player continuously throws game medals into the game medal slot 21 (see FIG. 1) from the end of one game to the start of the next game, the medal passage 105 It is difficult to secure a gap between the game medals, and when the blocker 47 is turned on, the game medals are meshed according to the positional relationship between the plurality of game medals and the balance of factors such as the force applied to the game medals from the blocker 47. May occur.

  However, as in this embodiment, the blocker signal is turned on after determining whether or not the monitoring time at blocker OFF has passed (S211) (S213), so that the ON operation of the blocker 47 is retained for a predetermined period. It is possible to secure a time for waiting for the game medal to pass before the blocker signal is output from the main control board 61 and the blocker 47 performs the mechanical operation. And it can prevent that the game medal is caught.

  Also, when the blocker 47 is turned off (returned state) as in the case of operating the start lever 25, after waiting for the input sensor abnormality input detection start time (500.60 ms) to pass, as described above. An abnormal input related to the closing sensor is detected. Accordingly, the blocker 47 is turned off almost simultaneously with the normal detection of the game medal by the insertion sensor 45 or the like, and the normally counted game medal is returned from the game medal payout opening 16. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, when the blocker 47 is turned off (returned), as described above, the blocker signal OFF data is set in the RWM 83 and an output request is made, so that timer interrupt processing (after that time) ( As shown in FIG. 18, the blocker 47 performs a mechanical operation to enter a return state. However, as soon as the blocker signal OFF data is set, when the abnormal input inspection by the closing sensor 2 is started, the blocker 47 is still in the ON state (passable state) and arrives immediately before the closing sensor 2. There may be a case where the insertion sensor 2 detects the game medal that has been played. Even though the passing of such game medals is normal, the occurrence of an abnormality related to the insertion sensor 2 is determined.

For such a situation, as in this embodiment, the abnormal input related to the input sensor 45 is determined after the input sensor abnormal input detection start time of about 500 ms becomes effective from the timing of the data set of the blocker OFF. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the normal passing of the game medal from being determined to be abnormal, and it is possible to more accurately determine the occurrence of the error.
<< Interrupt disable processing in blocker ON / OFF processing >>

  As described above, in the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23 (a)), after waiting for the blocker OFF monitoring time to elapse (S211), the interrupt is prohibited (S212). In this embodiment, as described above for the C1 error (see FIG. 9A) related to the making sensor and the selector passage sensor, the value of the making monitoring counter is increased or decreased based on the detection of the selector passage sensor signal and the making sensor 2 signal. Then, the blocker 47 is turned off when the value of the input monitoring counter exceeds a predetermined range (for example, a range of 0 to 3). In the blocker ON process (see FIG. 23A), the process related to the blocker signal (S213, S215) and the process related to the input monitoring counter (S214) are executed as a series of processes. The operation of the blocker 47 is matched with the detection result of the selector passage sensor signal and the closing sensor 2 signal.

  Also in the blocker OFF processing (see FIG. 23B), the setting of the input sensor abnormal input detection start time (S225) is prohibited after interrupting (S222), the blocker signal OFF (S223), and the blocker signal. This is performed following each process of the state OFF (S224). That is, in the blocker OFF process, the process related to the blocker signal (S223, S224) and the input sensor abnormal input detection start time set (S225) which is a process related to the input error check are executed as a series of processes. As a result, the integrity of the error check and the operation of the blocker 47 in the return state is ensured.

  In this embodiment, in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18), input detection processing related to the selector passage sensor 46, addition processing of the count value of the input monitoring counter, blocker ON signal data and blocker OFF signal data are included. Based on this, operation information output processing for operating the blocker 47 is performed. That is, the input detection process based on the selector path sensor signal is performed by the timer interrupt process input port data generation process (S545) or the second control error check process (see FIG. 38) described later. The process of adding the count value of the counter is performed in the error check process (see FIG. 38) of the error management in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). Further, the drive data output for operating the blocker 47 is output. The process is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process. The input detection process, the input monitoring counter update process, and the operation information output process are based on the data set in the game progress main process at a timing according to the control status at that time in the timer interrupt process. Executed.

Here, the relationship between the updating process of the counting value of the insertion monitoring counter in the game progress main process and the updating process of the counting value of the loading monitoring counter in the timer interrupt process is limited to the above-described correspondence between addition and subtraction. is not. For example, the count value of the insertion monitoring counter may be added in the game progress main process, and the count value of the insertion monitoring counter may be subtracted in the timer interrupt process. In this case, for example, the initial value of the counting value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to “3” or more, and the initial value is subtracted by the timer interruption process. A control mode is conceivable in which addition processing is performed to determine whether or not the count value is within a normal range.
<< Relationship with setting key switch operation >>

  Next, the relationship between the process for operating the blocker 47 and the setting key switch operation will be described. First, in the processing for waiting for the insertion of the game medal, when the setting key switch signal is ON, that is, the setting key switch signal data in the predetermined area (setting key switch signal data storage area) of the RWM 83 indicates ON. If it is, the blocker OFF process shown in FIG. 23B is executed. Then, data for turning off the blocker signal is stored in a predetermined area (blocker signal data storage area) in the RWM 83.

  Subsequently, the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4) for displaying the setting value is validated. At this time, in the process of waiting for game medal insertion (S55 in FIG. 14), each process of turning on the setting display LED is executed from the set of setting value display start output request. Further, when the data stored in the setting key switch signal data storage area of the RWM 83 indicates OFF, the blocker ON process is executed. Here, the case where the data stored in the setting key switch signal data storage area is OFF means that the falling data of the setting key switch signal is stored here.

  As described above, when the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed (S211: YES), a series of subsequent processing (S212 to S216) is performed, and data for turning on the blocker signal in S213. Set. The input data and falling data generation processing related to the setting key switch is performed in the input port data generation processing (S545) of the timer interrupt (see FIG. 18). Therefore, also in this case, while there is a possibility that a game medal is passing, it is possible to prevent the medal from being caught by not setting ON data of the blocker signal.

  In this embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), based on the input detection process related to the selector passage sensor 46, the input detection process related to the start lever 25, the blocker ON signal data, and the blocker OFF signal data. Operation information output processing for operating the blocker 47 is performed. In other words, the input detection process based on the selector path sensor signal and the input detection process based on the start lever sensor signal are performed by the timer interrupt process input port data generation process (S545) and the input error check process (S83). The drive data output process for operating the blocker 47 is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process. Then, these input detection processing and operation information output processing are executed at a timing according to the control state at that time in the timer interrupt processing based on the data set in the game progress main processing.

According to the control mode described above, it is possible to accurately perform the linkage between the setting key switch operation and the blocker operation, and it is possible to appropriately perform the blocker operation control when the setting key switch is operated.
<< Relationship with error handling >>

  Next, the relationship between the process for operating the blocker 47 and the error process will be described. What will be described here is an example of processing when the above-described CE error (see FIG. 10) occurs. The CE error is a part where the closing sensor 1 (115) or the closing sensor 2 (116) is provided (see FIG. 10). 7)), it is an error when it is determined that game medals have accumulated.

  First, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), when the insertion sensor 1 signal or the insertion sensor 2 (116) is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the game medal is staying (CE error). Here, the predetermined time relating to the determination of the game medal stay is about 143.03 ms, which is the upper limit value of the stay determination passage times A and C described above. Then, the process proceeds to the error display process shown in FIG. 24, where the error number is saved (S231), and the status information relating to the pre-error blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal is saved (S232). Further, after the hopper motor drive signal is turned OFF (S233), the blocker OFF processing (S234) is executed, and as shown in FIG. 23B, data for turning the blocker signal OFF is set in S223. .

  Subsequently, when the cause of the error is removed (S248: YES), the error number is cleared (S249), various information is restored (S250, S253, S254), and the blocker signal before the error is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is ON (S255). If the blocker signal before the error is ON (S255: YES), the blocker ON process (S256) is executed, and after waiting for the blocker OFF monitoring time to elapse (S211), the blocker signal is sent. Data for turning on is stored (S213). Therefore, also in this case, while there is a possibility that a game medal is passing, it is possible to prevent the medal from being caught by not setting ON data of the blocker signal.

  In this embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the input detection process related to the selector passage sensor 46 and the operation information output process for operating the blocker 47 based on the blocker ON signal data and the blocker OFF signal data. Is performed by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18). That is, the input detection process based on the selector path sensor signal is performed by the timer interrupt process input port data generation process (S545) and the second control error check process (see FIG. 38) described later. The drive data output process for operating is performed in the control command transmission process (S548) of the timer interrupt process. Then, these input detection processing and operation information output processing are executed at a timing according to the control state at that time in the timer interrupt processing based on the data set in the game progress main processing.

According to the control mode as described above, it is possible to accurately perform cooperation related to error processing and blocker operation, and it is possible to appropriately perform blocker operation control when an error occurs.
<< Game Medal Management Process >>

  Next, the aforementioned game medal management process (see S56 in FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. This game medal management process is a process that shifts to the case where there is a game medal (S54: YES) by the presence / absence check of a game medal (S54) in the aforementioned game progress main process (see FIG. 14).

  In the game medal management process shown in FIG. 26, the game medal insertion and settlement process is managed. More specifically, it is determined whether or not a data set for setting the above-described blocker 47 to an ON state (a game medal passable state) is set (S321). Here, it is confirmed whether or not the blocker 47 that is a flow path switching unit of the game medal selector 44 that accepts or discharges a manually inserted game medal is in a reception state (medal flow path formation state).

  If a data set for turning on the blocker 47 is set (S321: YES), it is checked whether or not the insertion sensor signal is ON (S322), and whether or not a game medal is inserted is determined. . The determination of whether or not the insertion of a game medal is detected is performed by determining whether or not a real game medal is detected by the above-described insertion sensors 115 and 116, and determining whether or not a betting setting (bet) is present. This process is different from the above-described S54 (see the game progress main process in FIG. 14).

  Here, even when only the insertion sensor 2 (116) located on the downstream side of the medal passage 105 among the insertion sensors 1 (115) and 2 (116) detects the game medal, the game medal Is determined (S322: YES). Then, if the insertion of a game medal is detected (S322: YES), the second control game medal insertion check process (FIG. 42, FIG. 42) for performing an insertion process such as determination of whether or not the game medal is inserted properly. (See FIG. 43). That is, when both the blocker signal and the insertion sensor signal are ON (S321: YES, S322: YES), the process shifts to a game medal insertion check (FIGS. 42 and 43).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the blocker state check process (S321) that blocker ON data is not set (S321: NO), or if no insertion of a game medal is detected (S322: NO) Without performing the medal insertion check process (see FIGS. 42 and 43), it is determined whether or not the operation of the bet button and the settlement button in the main input unit 26 (see FIG. 1) can be accepted (S323). The determination as to whether or not this button operation can be accepted (S323) is to determine whether or not various bet buttons or settlement buttons are in an acceptable state. Then, it is determined that it cannot be accepted when the start lever 25 is operated or when one of the stop buttons (24L to 24R) which is another button is operated.

  If the above-described various bet buttons or checkout buttons are not acceptable (S323: NO), the game medal management is exited and the process returns to the original process. If the operation can be accepted (S323: YES), a determination is made as to whether the operation has been accepted (S324). The determination as to whether or not the button operation has been accepted (S324) is a process in the case of performing the input according to the button operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of bets has already reached the upper limit, and it is determined whether or not the operated insertion button is the aforementioned 1BET button. If it is the 1BET button, one piece of data is set. If it is not the 1BET button, it is determined that the above-mentioned MAXBET is set, and the specified number of the next game is set to the predetermined number of bets set. Then, it is determined whether or not the planned bet number setting number is larger than the stored number (the number of stored medals) indicating the stored number. If the stored number is smaller, the set bet number is set as the stored number. . Further, a control command indicating that the insertion button has been pressed is set, and the setting of one bet number and the subtraction of one stored number are repeated as many times as the number of bets set.

  In the process of determining whether or not the above button operation has been accepted (S324), if no operation has been accepted (S324: NO), the game medal management is exited and the process returns to the original process. On the other hand, if an operation is accepted (S324: YES), it is determined whether or not the settlement button is ON (S325). If the settlement button is not ON (S325: NO), a storage input process (FIG. 27). If the clearing button is ON (S325: YES), a game medal clearing process (S326) is performed in which the liquidation is performed according to the button operation, and the process returns to the original process.

  More specifically, when the signal of the clearing button (clearing switch signal) changes from OFF to ON, the signal to the game start display LED (game start display LED signal) is turned off and the game medal clearing process is performed. The process proceeds to (S326). In addition, when the above-described 1-sheet insertion switch signal or three-sheet insertion sensor signal is changed from OFF to ON, the game start display LED signal is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to storage input. If a negative determination (NO) is made in at least one of S321 and S322 and a negative determination (NO) is made in S323 or S324, the game medal management process is terminated.

  FIG. 28 shows more specifically the contents of the above-described game medal clearing process (S326). In this game medal clearing process, the operation flag is checked (S371), it is determined whether or not the re-game is in operation (S372), and if it is in operation (S372: YES), the game in which the betting number is set. The presence / absence of medals is confirmed (S373). If there are game medals for which a bet number is set (S373: YES), blocker OFF data is set (S374), and the medal path 105 of the game medal selector 44 (see FIG. 6). ) Is in a state incapable of being input. Then, a settlement start command is set as a control command (S375).

  Further, the number of game medals set with a bet number is read (S376), and the settlement process is performed one by one up to the number of bets set. Here, every time one game medal is paid out, the bet number (the number of bets) is decremented by 1 (S377), and the number of game medals set with the bet number is read (S378), and the settlement of the bet number is completed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S379). If the settlement of the bet number has been completed (S379: YES), the game medal limit flag is cleared (S380). This game medal limit flag is a flag used for prohibiting insertion button acceptance.

  Subsequently, a settlement end command is set as a control command (S381), blocker ON data is set (S382), and the medal path 105 (see FIG. 6) of the game medal selector 44 is returned to the insertable state. Then, the game medal clearing process ends, and the process returns to the original process. In the determination of whether or not the above betting amount has been settled (S379), if the betting amount has not been settled (S379: NO), the procedure returns to reading the betting amount (S376), The processes of S376 to S379 are repeated until the liquidation is completed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the above-described determination of whether or not the re-game is in operation (S372), the re-game is not in operation (S372: NO), or the presence / absence of a game medal for which the betting amount is set (S373) ), When there is no game medal for which the bet number is set (S373: NO), a process of reading the stored number (S383) is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a stored number (S384). If there is no stored number (S384: NO), the game medal clearing process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  In the above-described confirmation of the presence or absence of stored game medals (S384), if there are stored game medals (S384: YES), blocker OFF data is set (S385), and the game medal selector 44 The medal passage 105 (see FIG. 6) is set in a state where it cannot be inserted. Then, a settlement start command is set as a control command (S386). The set of blocker OFF data (S385) and the set of settlement start command (S386) can be the same processing as S374 and S375 described above.

  Furthermore, the number of stored game medals is read (S387), and the settlement process is performed one by one up to the number of stored games. Here, every time one game medal is paid out, the stored number is decremented by 1 (S388), the remaining stored number is read (S389), and it is determined whether or not the liquidation for the stored number has been completed. (S390). If the settlement of the number of stored sheets has been completed (S390: YES), the above-described settlement end command is set (S381), the blocker ON data set (S382) is performed, and the game medal settlement process is terminated. Return to the original process.

In the determination of whether or not the above-described liquidation for the number of storages has been completed (S390), if the liquidation for the number of storages has not been completed (S390: NO), the process returns to reading of the number of storages (S387), The processes of S387 to S390 are repeated until the settlement is completed.
<< Storage input processing >>

  Next, the above-described storage input process will be described with reference to FIG. This storage input process is a process of shifting to the case where the clearing button is not ON (S325: NO) by determining whether the clearing button is ON (S325) in the above-described game medal management process (see FIG. 26). It is.

  In the storage input process shown in FIG. 27, it is determined whether or not the game medal limit flag is set (S331). If the game medal limit flag is set (S331: YES), the storage input process is performed. After finishing, the process returns to the original process in the game progress main process. When the game medal limit flag is not set (S331: NO), the insertion request number setting process (S332) is executed. In this insertion request number set (S332), when the insertion request number is set to “1” and the rising edge of the MAXBET switch signal is detected, the upper limit of the bet number and the currently set bet number are set. The difference is set as the input request number.

  Subsequently, a stored number reading process is performed (S333), and it is determined whether there is a stored number of game medals (S334). If there is a stored number (S334: YES), the storage input process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process in the game progress main process. If there is no stored number (S334: NO), the rise data of the insertion switch signal is cleared (S335), and the relationship between the number of game medals stored and the number of requested insertions is determined (S336). If the number of game medals stored is not equal to or greater than the required number of insertions (S336: NO), the value of the number of stored game medals is set as the required number of insertions (S337), and the process proceeds to one game medal addition process (S338). . In S336 described above, if the number of stored game medals is equal to or greater than the required number of inserted medals (S336: YES), the process of adding one game medal (S338) is not performed without setting the value of the number of stored game medals (S337). Transition.

  In the process of adding one game medal (S338), “1” is added to the number of bets. After that, a process for clearing the acquired number display (S339) is executed, a bet number display process (S340) is executed, and the prescribed number and the number of game medals are read (S341). Further, a determination process related to the game medal number limit (S342) is executed to determine whether or not the bet number has reached the upper limit. If the bet number has reached the upper limit (S342: YES), the game medal limit flag is set (S343), and the process proceeds to the stored number reading process (S345). If the bet number has not reached the upper limit (S342: NO), the process shifts to the stored number reading process (S345) without performing the game medal limit flag set process (S343).

After the process of reading the stored number (S345), the process of subtracting one stored number (S345) is executed, and it is determined whether a series of processes related to the requested number of inputs has been performed for the requested number of inputs (S346). ) Is executed. Then, if the processing for the requested number of inputs has been completed (S346: YES), the storage input processing is ended and the processing returns to the original processing in the game progress main processing. If the processing for the requested number of insertions is not completed (S346: NO), the processing after the processing for adding one game medal (S338) is executed again.
<Various processes related to the second control>

Next, various processes in the second control described above will be described.
<RWM initialization 2>

  FIG. 30 shows the RWM initialization 2 process used in the above-described power recovery process (see FIG. 21) and the like. In this RWM initialization 2 processing, the second work area provided in a predetermined RWM area (F200H to F3FFH) and the maximum usage amount (F210H to F21EH, F3F3H to F3FFH) of the second stack area are not excluded. Clear the used area.

  More specifically, the stack pointer is saved (S871), an area outside the stack pointer use area is set (S872), and a predetermined register is saved (S873). Further, the RWM initialization start address is set (S874), the RWM initialization byte number is set (S875), and the RWM is initialized (S876). Then, the next RWM address is set (S877), and it is determined whether or not the RWM initialization is completed (S878).

  If the RWM initialization is completed in S878 (S878: YES), the RWM initialization start address is set (S879). If not completed (S878: NO), the RWM in S876 is set. Return to the initialization process. After S879, the number of RWM initialization bytes is set (S880), and the RWM is initialized (S881).

Further, the next RWM address is set (S882), and it is determined whether or not the RWM initialization is completed (S883). If the RWM initialization has been completed in S883 (S883: YES), the register is restored (S884). If not completed (S883: NO), the RWM initialization process in S881 is performed. Return to. After S884, the stack pointer is restored (S885), and the process is terminated.
<RWM initialization 3>

  Next, the RWM initialization 3 process used in the above-described setting change device process (see FIG. 13) will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the process of RWM initialization 3, the stack pointer is saved (S891), an area outside the use area of the stack pointer is set (S892), and a predetermined register is saved (S892). S893). Further, the RWM initialization start address is set (S894), the RWM initialization byte number is set (S895), and the RWM is initialized (S896).

  Subsequently, the next RWM address is set (S897), and it is determined whether or not the RWM initialization is completed (S898). If the RWM initialization is completed in S898 (S898: YES), the register is restored (S899). If not completed (S898: NO), the RWM initialization process in S896 is performed. Return to. After S899, the stack pointer is restored (S900), and the process is terminated.

In addition to the RWM initialization 2 and the RWM initialization 3 described above, for example, an RWM initialization 1 related to the first control is provided as a control module related to the RWM initialization. This RWM initialization 1 shifts from the control module used in the game start set process (S52) of the power-on process (see FIG. 12) related to the first control, but the RWM initialization 1 The description of this process is omitted.
<Serial communication settings>

  Next, serial communication setting processing used for serial communication will be described. In this serial communication setting, the transmission function of the SCU 1 used for the test fire test output is set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the stack pointer is saved (S911), an area outside the stack pointer use area is set (S912), and a predetermined register is saved (S913).

Further, the SCU1 baud rate register address (lower order) is set (S914), and the SCU1 baud rate register is set (S915). Subsequently, SCU channel 1 transmission function use, FIFO mode, data length 9 bits, parity use and even parity are set (S916), the register is restored (S917), and the stack pointer is restored (S918). The process is terminated.
<Design stop signal output>

  Next, the symbol stop signal output process used in the condition device command set process (see FIG. 16) described above will be described. In the processing of the conditional device command set, symbol stop signal data for the trial test is output. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the stack pointer is saved (S921), an area outside the stack pointer use area is set (S922), and a predetermined register is saved (S923).

  Further, the SCU1 data register is set (S924), and the first command (rotating wheel information designation) is written (S925). Subsequently, the second command (rotating drum information designation) is written (S926), and the symbol stop signal set processing is performed (S927). The symbol stop signal set process (S927) will be described later.

  Further, the number of transmissions and the first command (push order designation) data are set (S928), and the first command is written (S929). Further, the second command data is obtained from the stop acceptance designation table (S930), and the second command is written (S931). The next first command data is set (S932), and the next table address is set (S933).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the transmission is completed (S934). If the transmission is completed (S934: YES), the register is restored (S935), the stack pointer is restored (S936), and the process is terminated. To do. If the transmission is not completed in S934 (S934: NO), the process returns to the first command write process in S929.
<Design stop signal set>

  Next, the symbol stop signal set process (S927) used in the symbol stop signal output process (see FIG. 33) described above will be described. In this condition device command set process, the symbol stop signal data table for the test fire test is set according to the instruction number, the operation state flag, and the bonus condition device number.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the stop acceptance designation table 2 is set (S941), and the offset is set (S942). Further, it is determined whether or not the instruction number is 0 (S943). If the instruction number is 0 (S943: YES), the stop acceptance designation table 1 is set (S944). Further, it is determined whether or not the bonus is activated (S945). If the bonus is not activated (S945: NO), the stop acceptance designation table 2 is set (S946).

  Subsequently, an offset is set (S947), and it is determined whether or not the bonus condition device is not operating (S948). If the bonus condition device is not inactive (S948: NO), an offset is generated (S949), a stop acceptance designation table corresponding to the offset is set (S950), and the process is terminated.

If the instruction number is not 0 in S943 (S943: NO), the process of stop acceptance designation table set according to the offset (S850) is performed without performing the process in between. In S945, when the bonus is activated (S945: YES), or when the bonus condition device is not activated in S948 (S948: YES), the process is terminated without performing the subsequent processes. To do.
<Test signal output>

  Next, a test signal output process used in the above-described error management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. In this test signal output processing, a test signal for simulation test, condition device information, and replay state identification information are output. Then, the bonus operation information and the replay operation information are output to the output port 10, and the output data is output to the port 9 according to the condition device output time and the replay state identification information flag. And, when the equipment condition differential device information is output, the equipment condition device information is output, when the winning and replaying condition device information is output, the winning and replaying condition device information is output, and when the replaying state identification information flag is ON, the replaying Status identification information is output. In other cases, clear data is output.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, the stack pointer is saved (S961), and the stack pointer (outside the use area) is set (S962). Subsequently, the register is saved (S963), and test signal output data is generated (S964). Further, a test signal is output (S965), and an RT state number is acquired (S966).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the bonus is activated (S967). If the bonus is activated (S967: YES), the replay except when the predetermined bonus (1 type BB-A here) is activated. A state identification signal is set (S968). Further, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned predetermined bonus (type 1 BB-A) is in operation (S969). If it is in operation (S969: YES), the predetermined bonus (type 1 BB-) is determined. A) A re-playing state identification signal related to time is set (S970).

  Subsequently, a re-gaming state identification signal is generated (S971), and it is determined whether or not the re-gaming state identification information flag is ON (S972). Here, the replay state identification information is information generated by the RT state number and the operation type. If the bonus operation is not performed in S967 (S967: NO), the process is not performed, and it is determined in S972 whether or not the re-gaming state identification information flag is ON. Further, in S969, when the above-mentioned predetermined bonus (1 type BB-A) is not activated (S969: NO), S970 is not performed, and the replaying state identification information flag in S972 is set. It is determined whether or not it is ON.

  If the re-playing state identification information flag is not ON in S972 (S972: NO), the conditional device information clear data is set (S973), and it is determined whether or not the conditional device information is being output. (S974). If it is during the output of the condition device information (S974: YES), the data for the accessory condition device information output is set (S975), and the bonus condition device number RWM address is set (S976).

  Further, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the accessory condition device information (S977). If it is not the time to output the accessory condition device information (S977: NO), the winning and replay condition device information is determined. Data is set (S978), winning and replaying condition device number RWM address is set (S979), and the condition device number is acquired (S980). If it is time to output the accessory condition apparatus information in S977 (S977: YES), the process is not performed and the condition apparatus number is acquired in S980 (S980).

  Subsequently, conditional device lower information (lower digit information) is set (S981), and it is determined whether or not the conditional device lower information is being output (S982). If the condition device lower information is not output (S982: NO), the condition device upper information (upper digit information) is set (S983), and the condition device information is generated (S984). Then, the conditional device information is output (S985), the register is restored (S986), the stack pointer is restored (S987), and the process is terminated.

If the re-playing state identification information flag is ON in S972 (S972: YES), and if it is not during the output of the condition device information in S974 (S974: NO), the process between Without this, the condition device information in S985 is output (S985). If it is time to output the conditional device lower information in S982 (S982: YES), the above 983 is not performed, and the conditional device information generation processing of S984 is performed (S984).
<Battery sensor abnormal set>

  Next, processing of the above-described insertion / withdrawal sensor abnormality set related to the insertion of game medals and the detection of a payout error will be described. In the processing of the input / exit sensor abnormality set, a corresponding error display request is made according to the error detection flag.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, the stack pointer is saved (S991), and the stack pointer (outside the use area) is set (S992). Further, the register is saved (S993), and a CH error display request is set (S994). Further, it is determined whether or not a CH error has been detected (S995). If no CH error has been detected (S995: NO), the error display request is cleared (S996).

Subsequently, the error display request data is saved (S997), the register is restored (S998), the stack pointer is restored (S999), and the process is terminated. If a CH error is detected in S995 (S995: YES), the error display request clear process in S997 is performed without performing the error display request clear process in S996.
<Clearing input / withdrawal sensor error>

  Next, the insertion / withdrawal sensor abnormality clearing process related to the processing at the time of game medal insertion / withdrawal error display will be described. In the process of clearing the input / withdrawal sensor abnormality, when there is an error display request, the corresponding error detection flag and related data are cleared. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the stack pointer is saved (S1011), and the stack pointer (outside the use area) is set (S1012).

Further, the register is saved (S1013), and an error detection flag is set (S1014). Further, it is determined whether there is a request for CH error display (S1015). If there is a display request (S1015: YES), the CH error detection flag is cleared (S1016). Then, the register is restored (S1017) and the stack pointer is restored (S1018), and the process is terminated. If there is no display request in S1015 (S1015: NO), the processing of register restoration in S1017 is performed without performing S1016.
<Error check>

  Next, an error check process used in the above-described error management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. In this error check process, various error check processes are performed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the stack pointer is saved (S1021), an area outside the use area of the stack pointer is set (S1022), and a predetermined register is saved (S1023).

Further, in the error check process, the set value error check process (S1024), the internal random number check process (S1025), the timer measurement 2 process (S1026), the game medal insertion check process (S1027), and the game medal pass Status update processing (S1028) input / withdrawal sensor abnormality check processing (S1029) error display request data clear processing (S1030) are sequentially performed. These processing will be described later. After the error display request data clear process (S1030), the register is restored (S1031), the stack pointer is restored (S1032), and the process is terminated.
<Setting value error check>

  Next, the setting value error check process (S1024) used in the error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In this set value error check process, it is checked whether the setting stage is in the normal range.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, an E6 error that is one of unrecoverable errors is set (S1036), and it is determined whether or not the set value is less than the maximum value (here, 6). Is performed (S1037). Furthermore, in S1037, if the set value is less than the maximum value (S1037: YES), the process ends. If the set value is not less than the maximum value (S1037: NO), the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process 2. This unrecoverable error process 2 will be described later (see FIG. 49).
<Built-in random number check>

  Next, the internal random number check process (S1025) used in the error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In this built-in random number check process, if an abnormality related to built-in random number update is detected, the process shifts to an unrecoverable error process 2, and if not detected, an 8-bit random number is inspected.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 40, an E7 error that is one of unrecoverable errors is set (S1041), and the internal information register data is acquired (S1042). Further, it is determined whether or not a built-in random number update-related abnormality has occurred (S1043). If it has not occurred (S1043: NO), an 8-bit random number maximum inspection table is set (S1044). Then, the RS0 soft latch random number register address is set (S1045), the 8-bit random number check process is performed four times (S1046 to S1049), and the process ends.

If an abnormality has occurred in the process of determining whether an abnormality relating to the internal random number update has occurred in S1043 (S1043: YES), the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process 2. This unrecoverable error process 2 will be described later (see FIG. 63). Here, the reason why the 8-bit random number check process is performed four times in the above S1046 to S1049 is that there are four corresponding registers and the four registers are checked in order.
<Timer measurement 2>

  Next, the timer measurement 2 process (S1026) used in the above-described error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the process of timer measurement 2, the timer RWM1 used for error check is subtracted (if less than 0, 0 is set).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, the measurement start timer address is set (S1051), and the 1-byte timer number 2 is set (S1052). Further, the 1-byte timer value is updated (S1053), and the next timer address is set (S1054). Further, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended (S1055). If the measurement has ended (S1055: YES), the process ends. If the measurement of the 1-byte timer is not completed in S1055 (S1055: NO), the process returns to the process of updating the 1-byte timer value in S1053.
<Game medal insertion check>

  Next, the game medal insertion check (S1027) used in the error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In this game medal insertion check process, when the medal insertion inspection flag is ON or the blocker signal is ON, the insertion sensors 1 and 2 are inspected, and if a passing abnormality is detected, a display request for each error is made. When the insertion sensor 1 passage check time or the insertion sensor 2 passage check time is exceeded, a CE error display request is made, and when a game medal passes illegally, a CP error display request is made. Further, if the input monitoring counter is not within the normal range, a C1 error display request is made.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, the previous blocker signal data is set (S1061), and blocker signal data is generated (S1062). Further, blocker signal data is generated this time (S1063), and blocker signal data is generated (S1064). Further, it is determined whether or not the rise of the blocker signal has been detected (S1065). If it is detected (S1065: YES), the input monitoring counter is cleared (S1066).

  Further, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion inspection flag is ON (S1067). If it is not ON (S1067: NO), it is determined whether or not the blocker signal is ON (S1068). Further, if the blocker signal is ON (S1068: YES), data on the previous game medal passing state is acquired (S1069). Then, it is determined whether or not the insertion sensor signal is ON (S1070). If it is ON (S1070: YES), a medal insertion inspection flag is set (S1071).

  If the rise of the blocker signal is not detected in S1065 (S1065: NO), it is determined whether or not the medal insertion inspection flag is ON without performing S1066 (S1067). If the medal insertion inspection flag is ON in S1067 (S1067: YES), the process is not performed, and it is determined in S1070 whether the insertion sensor signal is ON. If the blocker signal is not ON in S1068 (S1068: NO), the process is terminated.

  After S1071, it is determined whether or not the input sensor 1 signal is ON (S1072). If it is ON (S1072: YES), a CP error is set (S1073). Further, it is determined whether or not the previous game medal passing state is 1 or 3 (S1074). If a negative determination is made (S1074: NO), whether or not the previous game medal passing state is 0 or not. A determination is made (S1075).

  If an affirmative determination is made in S1075 (S1075: YES), the insertion sensor 1 passage check time is set (S1076), and a CE error is set (1077). Then, it is determined whether or not the passage time of the insertion sensor 1 has been exceeded (S1078), and if it has not been exceeded (S1078: NO), the process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in S1075 (S1075: NO), S1076 is not performed, and the CE error is set in S1077 (1077).

  If the input sensor 1 signal is not ON in S1072 (S1072: NO), it is determined whether the signals of the input sensors 1 and 2 are ON, as indicated by S1079 in FIG. . Further, when the insertion sensors 1 and 2 signals are ON (S1079: YES), a CP error is set (S1080), and it is determined whether or not the previous game medal passing state is 0 or 1. (S1081).

  If the previous game medal passing state is not 0 or 1, it is determined whether or not the previous game medal passing state is 2 (S1082). If the determination is affirmative (S1082: YES) ), The closing sensor 2 passage check time is set (S1083). Also, a CE error is set (S1084), and it is determined whether or not the passage time of the closing sensor 2 has been exceeded (S1085).

  If the passing time of the closing sensor 2 has not been exceeded in S1085 (S1085: NO), it is determined whether or not the passing time of the closing sensor 1 has been exceeded (S1085). (S1086: NO), the process ends. In S1082, if the previous game medal passing state 2 was not set (S1082: NO), S1083 is not performed and the CE error is set in S1084 (S1084).

  If the input sensors 1 and 2 signals are not ON in S1079 (S1079: NO), the CP error is set in S1087 as shown in FIG. Further, it is determined whether or not the previous game medal passing state was 0 or 2 (S1088), and in the case of a negative determination (S1088: NO), a CE error is set (S1089), and the insertion sensor 2 passes. It is determined whether the time has passed (S1090). If the passage time of the insertion sensor 2 has exceeded (S1090: NO), the process is terminated.

  If the insertion sensor signal is not ON in 1070 shown in FIG. 42 (S1070: NO), the process proceeds to S1091 shown in FIG. 43, and the medal insertion inspection flag is cleared. Further, the data of the insertion sensor 1 passage check time and the insertion sensor 2 passage check time are cleared (S1092), and it is determined whether or not the previous game medal passage state is 0 (S1093).

  If the previous game medal passing state is not 0 (S1093: NO), it is determined whether the previous game medal passing state is 2 (S1094), and if a negative determination is made (S1094: NO). ), A CP error is set (S1095). If the previous game medal passing state is 0 in S1093 (S1093: YES), or if the previous game medal passing state is 2 in S1094 (S1094: YES), the process ends. To do.

  After S1095, it is determined whether or not the previous game medal passing state 1 is in effect (S1096). If an affirmative determination is made (S1096: YES), the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by 1 (S1097). It is determined whether or not the value of the monitoring counter is in the normal range (S1098). Further, if the input monitoring counter is not in the normal range (S1098: NO), error display request data is saved (S1099), and the process is terminated.

In S1096, when the game medals pass state 1 is not in the previous state (S1096: NO), or in the processing of S1074, S1078, S1081, S1086 shown in FIG. 42 and the processing of S1088 and S1090 shown in FIG. If YES is determined, the process proceeds to S1099 and the error display request data is stored (S1099). If the input monitoring counter is within the normal range in S1098 (S1098: YES), the process ends.
<Game medal passing status update>

Next, the game medal passing state update process (S1028) used in the error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In the game medal insertion check process, as shown in FIG. 44, the game medal passing state is updated according to the insertion sensor signal. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, the insertion sensor signal information is acquired (S1106), the game medal passing state is updated (S1107), and the process ends.
<Insertion / withdrawal sensor error check>

  Next, the input / out sensor abnormality check process (S1029) used in the error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In this game medal insertion check process, the input sensor input abnormality, the payout sensor input abnormality, and the selector passage sensor passage abnormality are monitored.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the previous error detection flag is updated (S1111), and it is determined whether or not the falling edge of the blocker signal has been detected (in this case, it has been turned OFF). (S1112). Further, when the falling edge of the blocker signal is detected (S1112: YES), the input sensor abnormal input detection start time is set (S1113), and it is determined whether or not it is an input related error (S1114). .

  If the falling edge of the blocker signal is not detected in S1112 (S1112: NO), it is determined whether or not it is a throwing related error without performing the setting of the making sensor abnormal input detection start time (S1113). A determination is made (S1114). If it is determined in S1114 that the error is not related to the input (S1114: NO), the blocker signal ON is inspected (S1115), and the input sensor abnormal input detection start time is inspected effectively (S1116). .

  Further, it is determined whether or not there has been an input sensor abnormality detection test (S1117). If the result is affirmative (S1117: YES), it is determined whether or not an abnormality has been detected in the input sensor 2 (S1118). ). If an abnormality is detected in the closing sensor 2 (S1118: YES), the C0 error detection flag is set (S1119), and it is determined whether or not the rise of the selector path sensor signal is detected (S1120). ).

  If it is determined in S1117 that there is no detection error detection sensor (S1117: NO), or if it is determined in S1118 that there is no abnormality detection related to the input sensor 2 (S1118: NO), C0. Without setting the error detection flag (S1119), it is determined whether or not the rising edge of the selector passage sensor signal has been detected (in this case, it has been turned ON) (S1120).

  When the rising edge of the selector passage sensor signal is detected in S1120 (S1120: YES), the input monitoring counter is incremented by 1 (S1121), and the selector passage sensor residence time is set (S1122). Then, it is determined whether or not the selector passage sensor is ON (whether there is a stagnant currency) (S1123). If it is ON (if there is a stagnant currency) (S1123: YES), the selector passage residence time is determined. It is determined whether or not elapses (S1124).

  If the selector passage residence time has elapsed in S1124 (S1124: YES), a CH error detection flag is set (S1125), and it is determined whether or not an HP error has occurred (S1126). Furthermore, if the selector passage residence time has not elapsed in S1124 (S1124: NO), it is determined whether an HP error has occurred without setting the CH error detection flag (S1125) (S1126). ).

  If the HP error is not detected in S1126 (S1126: NO), the RWM address of the payout sensor abnormality detection 1 data is set (S1127), and the RWM address of the payout sensor abnormality detection 2 data is set (S1128). If it is determined at S1126 that an HP error has occurred (S1126: YES), the process ends.

  Subsequent to S1128, the payout sensor 1 and 2 mask data and the payout sensor 2 bit data are set (S1129). Further, it is determined whether or not the hopper motor drive signal is ON (S1130). If it is not ON (S1130: NO), the payout sensor check data is generated (S1131). Further, it is determined whether only the payout sensor 2 is ON (S1132). If only the payout sensor 2 is ON (S1132: YES), the payout sensor abnormality detection 1 data and the payout sensor abnormality detection 2 data are determined. Is cleared (S1133), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in S1114 that the error is a throwing-related error (S1114: YES), if the rise of the selector path sensor signal is not detected in S1120 (S1120: NO), the selector path sensor is ON in S1123. If not (S1123: NO), the process proceeds to S1126 without performing any processing between them, and it is determined whether or not an HP error has occurred.

  If only the payout sensor 2 is not detected to be ON in S1132, the payout sensor 1 mask data and the payout sensor 1 bit are set as shown in FIG. 46 (S1134). Further, payout sensor check data is generated (S1135), and abnormality detection data clear data is set (S1136).

  If the hopper motor drive signal is ON in S1130 (see FIG. 45) (S1130: YES), the payout sensor check data generation process (S1135) shown in FIG. Do.

Subsequently, the payout sensor abnormality detection 3 data is cleared (S1137), and the payout sensor abnormality detection data that is not checked is cleared (S1138). Further, it is determined whether or not an abnormality of the payout sensor 1 or 2 has been detected (S1139). If an abnormality is detected (S1139: YES), the payout sensor abnormality detection time is measured (S1140), and the processing is performed. Exit. If no abnormality of the payout sensor 1 or 2 is detected in S1139 (S1139: NO), the process ends without measuring the payout sensor abnormality detection time (S1140).
<Clear error display request data>

  Next, the error display request data clear process (S1030) used in the error check process (see FIG. 38) will be described. In this error display request data clear process, error display request data is cleared when an error is displayed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed (S1146). If the error is being displayed (S1146: YES), the error display request data is cleared. (S1147), and the process ends. If no error is displayed in S1146 (S1146: NO), the process is terminated without clearing the error display request data (S1147).
<< 8-bit random number test >>

  Next, an 8-bit random number check process (S1046 to S1049) used in the above-described built-in random number check process (see FIG. 40) will be described. In this 8-bit random number inspection process, an 8-bit random number is checked, and when the 8-bit random number value is greater than or equal to the maximum random number inspection data and the random number maximum value is set, or when all the obtained 8-bit random number values are all If they match, the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 2.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, an 8-bit random value is acquired (S1151), and it is determined whether the random value is smaller than the random number maximum inspection data (S1152). Further, when the random number value is not smaller than the random number maximum inspection data (S1152: NO), it is determined whether or not the random number maximum value is set (S1153). When the random number maximum value is not set, (S1153: NO), the 8-bit random value is reacquired (S1154).

  If the random number value is smaller than the random number maximum inspection data in S1152 (S1152: YES), the 8-bit random number value is reacquired without performing the determination process (S1153) related to the setting of the random number maximum value (S1153). S1154). In S1153, when there is a setting for the maximum random number (S1153: YES), the process proceeds to a non-recoverable error process 2 (see FIG. 49) described later.

  After S1154, it is determined whether or not the random number values match (S1155). If they match (S1155: YES), the 8-bit random value is reacquired (S1156). Further, it is determined whether or not all three acquired random number values match (S1157). If they do not match (S1157: NO), the 8-bit random number maximum value inspection table is updated (S1158). Then, the 8-bit random number soft latch random number value register address is updated (S1159), and the process ends.

If the random number values do not match in S1155 (S1155: N), the 8-bit random number maximum value inspection table in S1158 is updated without performing the process. In S1157, when all the acquired three random numbers match (S1157: YES), the process proceeds to a non-recoverable error process 2 (see FIG. 49) described later.
<< Unrecoverable error processing 2 >>

  Next, non-recoverable error processing 2 used in the above-described set value error check processing (see FIG. 39), built-in random number check processing (see FIG. 40), 8-bit random number check processing (see FIG. 48), etc. explain. In this non-recoverable error process 2, processing when a non-recoverable error is detected is performed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 49, lower-order error display data is set (S1171), and upper-order error display data is set (S1172). Further, the clear output port address and the number of ports are set (S1173), and the output ports (0 to 6) are turned OFF (S1174).

Further, the next output port address is set (S1175), and it is determined whether or not the output is finished (S1176). If the output is finished (S1176: YES), an error display for the output ports 3 and 4 is displayed. Output is performed (S1177). Then, switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is performed (S1178), and the process returns to the processing for setting the clear output port address and the number of ports in S1173. If the output is not completed in S1176 (S1176: NO), the process returns to the processing for turning off the output ports (0 to 6) in S1174.
<Effects of invention relating to medal insertion>

  As described above, according to the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the game medal selector 44 is provided with the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46, both the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 are detected. Using the result, the state of the game medal can be determined. Therefore, for example, it is possible to take a countermeasure against fraud more firmly than when only the insertion sensor 45 is used. Furthermore, since the operation state related to the insertion of game medals can be monitored using the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46, error monitoring and operation control of the blocker 47 are appropriately executed based on various control modes as described above. It becomes possible to do. The selector passage sensor 46 can be provided with various functions other than detection of the presence or absence of fraud, and the selector passage sensor 46 can be used effectively. In addition, it is possible to perform a game stop executed after detection of an abnormality at an appropriate timing in relation to other processes.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the test signal output process (S762) is executed in the error management process (see FIGS. 18 and 20) related to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and the test is performed for each timer interrupt process. Execute signal output processing. Then, by the test signal output process (S762), a test signal corresponding to the combination determination result (combination drawing result) is set, and the combination determination result can be output as a test signal. Further, the main control board 61 having the main CPU 81 as the arithmetic processing means is not provided with an emergency connector used for connection with the test apparatus in the product development stage, but is not provided for providing the emergency connector. The mounting area 183 remains. For this reason, it is possible to provide a product under the same conditions as at the time of testing, and to reduce the risk of illegally acquiring internal information from the test signal.

  Further, in the process when power is turned on (see FIG. 12), the initial setting process is first executed based on the fact that the power is turned on. As the initial setting process, after initializing the register (S1), although not shown, an initial value is set in the register and an interrupt type is set. Further, after such initial setting processing is completed, the RWM checksum is calculated (S3), and it is determined whether or not the designated switch (here, the door switch, the setting door switch, the setting key switch) is operated. (S9) If not operated (S9: NO), a power interruption recovery process (see FIG. 21) is executed.

  Therefore, the initial value can be set in the register at an early stage when the power is turned on, and the power-on process (FIG. 12) is always performed in the same state without being affected by the data remaining in the register at the previous power-off. Most of the processes (S2 to S13) can be executed.

  In addition, in the process at power-on, after setting an initial value in the register, the process proceeds to the setting change device process (see FIG. 13). In the setting change device process, the set value is changed from a predetermined range (here, “1”). "6") is checked (S30 in FIG. 13). If the set value is not within the predetermined range (S30: NO), the set value is corrected (S31), and the setting is made. A set value display process for displaying the value on the game information display means is performed (S32). Further, in the display process, the information indicating that the setting is being changed and the stored setting value are output to the display device (here, the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4)) (S32) and set according to the operation of the setting switch. The value is updated (S33 to S34).

  Therefore, it is possible to properly define the processing for displaying the set value from the power-on, and display the set value accurately. Then, it is possible to appropriately perform a series of processing from power-on to processing for displaying a set value. Further, it is possible to prevent an abnormal display from being displayed on the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4) which is a display device for displaying the setting value.

  Note that, for example, a condition based on the state of the built-in RWM (see FIG. 11) can be adopted as the transition condition to the setting change device process (FIG. 13). More specifically, the checksum is performed for all the areas that are the target of the built-in RWM, and the checksum value (checksum data) being normal is set as a condition for shifting to the setting change device process. It can be illustrated. In addition, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which checksum is performed but the checksum result is not used for any determination condition, and even if the checksum value is abnormal, no special processing is performed. .

  Furthermore, the establishment of a plurality of conditions may be used as a transition condition to the setting change device process, in which case both the power-off execution process flag is normal and the checksum result is normal. Can be considered as a transition condition to the setting change device process.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the setting change switch (setting key switch 68 in FIG. 4) is operated, a change in the switch signal (setting / reset button signal) is detected by the rise of the signal (FIG. 13 S33). Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), the presence / absence of a game medal is determined at the start of the game (S54), and when there is no game medal (when there is no bet number) (S54). : NO), as described above, the setting value that can be visually confirmed is displayed on the display device (setting display LED 66). Further, when there is a game medal (when there is a bet number) (S54: YES), the setting value currently set is not displayed on the display device (setting display LED 66), and it becomes a setting value confirmation impossible state.

  In the game medal insertion waiting display process (S55) that is executed when the set value can be checked, the set value can be checked by operating the setting change switch (setting key switch 68). It becomes. Further, in this setting value checkable state, blocker OFF data is set so that gaming medals cannot be inserted, the stored setting value display processing is performed, and a change in the switch signal is detected (falling detection), The setting value display processing is terminated, and processing for setting blocker ON data is executed.

  Further, in this set value confirmation possible state, the process of progressing the game, from the game medal management (S56 in FIG. 14) to the game end check (S68 in FIG. 14), is not performed. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, in the setting value confirmation possible state, an error relating to a random number is detected, but other error monitoring is not performed. In addition, when the change to the set value checkable state is detected by detecting the change of the switch signal, when the bet number is set (S54: YES), the change of the switch signal related to the bet number is detected. However, although it does not shift to the setting confirmation state, the progress of the game is possible (see S56 and after).

  By executing the process for making the setting value uncheckable state in this way and setting restrictions on the confirmation of the setting value, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being confirmed unless a predetermined procedure is passed. It becomes. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that attempt to check the set value by a method other than an appropriate method.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when a game medal is paid out based on the display determination (S66) of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), the display process related to the number of game medals paid out is performed, and the game Each time a medal is paid out, the value displayed on the display device (here, the acquired number display section) is updated. Then, the value corresponding to the finally paid out number is displayed until the next game medal is inserted or until the above-described game standby display is started (when no game medal is inserted even after a certain period of time has elapsed). Is done. Even when information relating to the number of game medals paid out is being displayed, when an error occurs, the value corresponding to the displayed number is changed to display corresponding to the error that has occurred.

  And according to the present embodiment as described above, by setting the condition for turning off the display of the above-mentioned acquired number of games, the display related to the number of game medals can be changed to another display mode at an appropriate timing. It is possible to prevent a game result from being misidentified as compared with a case where switching is not performed or a case where switching timing is too late or too early.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), a predetermined value (start address) is set in the stack pointer (S51). Then, a game medal management process (S56) and a start switch input confirmation process (S58) are performed. Further, the game medal management process (S56) and the start switch input confirmation process are repeated until the start switch is effectively received (S58). Therefore, the stack pointer can be cleared every time at the initial stage of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), and if any abnormality occurs, the process can be prevented from looping in an abnormal state.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, display determination (S66) is performed in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), and if a game medal is paid out, a process for paying out a game medal (S67) is performed. When the game medals are paid out or when no game medals are paid out, processing corresponding to the game state is performed by a game end check (S68, etc.).

  In the game end check process (S68, etc.), the RWM clear process for the condition device number other than the carryover combination (clear the condition device for the non-carryover combination), the re-game display LED is turned off, the re-game operation flag is cleared, A game state such as a bonus (BB here) or RT is set. Further, when the game end check (S68, etc.) is completed, a predetermined value (start address) is set to the stack pointer at the head of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) (S51). Therefore, the stack pointer can be cleared every time after the game end check (S68, etc.), and if any abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent the processing from looping in an abnormal state.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the first predetermined memory in which the value of the stack pointer is set in the built-in RWM area (F000H to F14AH) shown in FIG. 11 in the power-off process (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned off. In the area (S568), checksum data is calculated for the storage area range (F000H to F3FFH) of the RWM including this work area, and the checksum value obtained by the calculation is used as a first predetermined value in the same work area. The storage area is stored in the second predetermined storage area (S574). Further, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area described above are set in areas other than the first and last areas of the work area. Therefore, the stack pointer value and checksum data value can be saved avoiding the beginning and end of the work area where the position can be easily specified, and it is difficult for a third party to specify the storage location of these values. It is possible to prevent fraud.

In addition, this invention is not limited to each embodiment mentioned above, It is possible to employ | adopt various control modes as demonstrated below.
<Control mode related to error notification>

  First, a control aspect related to error notification will be described. As a control mode related to the error notification, in the error management process (refer to FIG. 20) following the timer interrupt process (refer to FIG. 18), the error check (S754) related to the second control, etc. Monitoring is performed (see FIG. 38), and when an error occurs, a main command is transmitted to the sub control board 31. Based on the main command, the sub control board 31 causes the rendering unit 18 (see FIG. 1), for example. It is conceivable to use this to perform error notification. In other words, error notification can be performed before the progress of the game is stopped (before error display processing in each situation).

In addition, after an operation of the start lever 25, that is, in a state where the blocker 47 is in an OFF state (returnable state), for example, when an error occurs in a situation where an effect is being performed in the effect unit 18 (see FIG. 1), It is conceivable that the effect is canceled (cancelled), and the effect unit 18 or the like notifies the error. Furthermore, as another aspect, in the same way, when the production at the production unit 18 (see FIG. 1) is being executed in the state where the blocker 47 is OFF (returnable state), for example, It is conceivable to perform error display on a display device that can perform error notification (for example, the acquired number display LED) or to perform error notification by voice using the speaker 50. Moreover, as another aspect, when the blocker 47 is similarly in the OFF state (returnable state), for example, the high expectation degree indicating that the expectation degree that the player plays a certain role is high in the rendering unit 18 (see FIG. 1). If an error occurs while performing a specific performance such as a performance or a continuous performance performed with continuity across multiple games, a notification that an error has occurred is performed after all cylinders are stopped It is possible to do. For example, when the sub-control unit (here, the sub-control board 31) receives a main command based on the input error setting process (see FIG. 25), a predetermined notification mode A (liquid crystal, first lamp, and When an error is reported in a notification mode using an amplifier (speaker) and a main command based on an error display process (see FIG. 24) is received, another notification mode B (liquid crystal, first lamp, second And a notification mode using an amplifier (speaker)). At this time, the second lamp is a lamp capable of navigating the operation sequence during the AT game (notification game) so that even if an error occurs, the game does not cause any disadvantage. It is possible to control the second lamp.
<Control aspect related to game stop>

Further, as a control mode related to the game stop, for example, in the timer interruption process, the selector passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensor 45 are monitored by error management (see FIG. 20) or the like (see FIG. 38), and an error is detected. In addition, after proceeding to the error display process (FIG. 24), the game is stopped immediately in the error check (FIG. 38) instead of performing the loop process by S240 and S248 in FIG. 24 to stop the game ( For example, a blocker OFF process may be performed). Furthermore, it is conceivable to perform error notification using the rendering unit 18 and the speaker 50 under the control of the sub-control board 31 in synchronization with the game stop timing.
<Other control modes related to error detection>

  Also, the blocker 47 is in the ON state (passable state), and an error based on the input sensor 45 is detected by the error check (FIG. 38) in the error management process (FIG. 20) from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). In such a case, without waiting for the process to proceed to the error display process (FIG. 24), for example, the process can be shifted to the process of immediately stopping the game (for example, the blocker OFF process) within the error check (FIG. 38). Conceivable.

  Further, when an error based on the insertion sensor 45 or the like is detected by various processes in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), the selector passage sensor 46 or the input sensor 45 is monitored by the timer interruption process. It is possible not to execute the process for this. Furthermore, as described above, the payout provided in the game medal payout device 63 (see FIG. 2) is not executed while the monitoring of the selector passage sensor 46 and the monitoring of the insertion sensor 45 by the timer interruption process are not executed. The sensor (not shown) is monitored based on the timer interrupt cycle. When an abnormality such as a game medal staying or backflow is detected by the payout sensor, an error command associated with the abnormality is transmitted to the sub. It is conceivable to execute processing for the above.

Further, when the door (front door portion 11) is open (when the door switch is in an open state), an error notification related to the door opening is performed using the LED and the speaker 50. However, although the main control board 61 recognizes the occurrence of the error related to the door opening, it does not recognize the error corresponding to stopping the game, and transmits the command related to the error occurrence to the sub-control board 31. To do. Then, the sub control board 31 executes the door opening error notification. For this reason, even if the front door part 11 is opened, it is possible to play a game with reel control. Further, when the front door portion 11 is closed in a situation where the door opening error notification is being performed, the sub control board 31 determines that the door opening error release condition is satisfied, and the LED or speaker 50 opens the door. The error notification is terminated. The sub control board 31 may end the error notification of the door opening after waiting for a predetermined time (for example, about several seconds) after the front door portion 11 is closed.
<Various aspects related to management of minimum game time>

In the present embodiment, as described above, the management of the minimum game time is managed in various modes depending on the situation. In the following, first, basic functions and management modes related to the minimum game time will be described, and then various management modes of the minimum game time at the normal time or when a predetermined error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. This will be explained based on.
<< Basic functions and management aspects related to minimum game time >>

  First, as described above, the minimum game time does not start the spinning rotation in the current game unless a predetermined time (here, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the spinning rotation in the previous game. It is for doing so. Then, the timer measurement of the time (game time) related to the minimum game time is based on the timer measurement process (S551) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as described above. Here, in the timer measurement process (S551), all timer counts (here, subtraction) are executed. In the timer measurement process (S551), the 1-byte timer and the 2-byte timer are measured as described above, and the minimum game time is counted using the 2-byte timer.

  Further, when the time required for one game exceeds the minimum game time, when the game medal betting is set (bet) and the start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) is operated, each of the above-described drums 51L to 51 is performed. The spinning cylinder rotation standby period (wait period) during which no rotation is performed does not occur, and each of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51 starts to rotate. Here, in this embodiment, the period of one game is a period from the start of rotation of the rotating drums 51L to 51 to the stop of rotation.

  On the other hand, even if the betting setting (betting) of the game medal is performed and the start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) is operated, if the minimum game time set at the previous game has not yet elapsed, Until the minimum game time elapses, it becomes a rotation rotation waiting period (wait period) in which the rotation of each rotation cylinder 51L to 51 is not performed. In addition, during the rotation rotation waiting period (wait period), even if each of the stop buttons 24L to 24R described above is operated, these operations are not accepted.

  In the following description, a period in which the rotation of the start lever 25 in the current game is not started after the operation of the start lever 25 is detected after the rotation of the rotation of the previous game has been stopped, This is called a “wait period”, which is a period, and is distinguished from the aforementioned “4.1 second wait” corresponding to the minimum game time. Further, the above-mentioned “wait period” can be counted using a timer included in the “other game standby measurement timer” in the timer measurement process (see S551 in FIG. 18).

As described above, the check of whether or not the minimum game time has passed and the set of timers related to the minimum game time (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “minimum game time timer”) are performed as described above. This is executed in the spinning rotation start standby used in the internal lottery start process (S60). That is, the elapsed time check and the timer set relating to the minimum game time are performed not by interrupt processing but by processing executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, the timer measurement of the time related to the minimum game time may be performed in a mode in which the timer value is counted down, or may be performed in a mode in which the timer value is counted up.
<< Management mode in normal time >>

  FIG. 50A shows a management mode of the minimum game time at the normal time. Here, in the present embodiment, “normal time” can be said to be in a normal state in which a game is possible in a broad sense. In this embodiment, for example, a situation where a recoverable error or a non-recoverable error, which will be described later, has occurred (see FIGS. 50B and 51A), a situation where a set value is confirmed (see FIG. 52 (B)) can be excluded from this “normal time”.

  Further, the above-mentioned “normal time” is, in a narrow sense, in the present embodiment, for example, at the time of liquidation or insertion of a game medal described later (see FIG. 51 (B), FIG. 52 (A)). The situation where the management mode of the minimum game time is described can be excluded. It should be noted that the situation at the time of liquidation and insertion of game medals (see FIG. 65 (B), FIG. 66 (A)) is also included in “normal time”, for example, “normal time” shown in FIG. It may be referred to as “normal time”, “general normal time”, or the like, and the game medal liquidation or insertion status shown in FIG. 51 (B) or FIG. 52 (A) may be referred to as “specific normal time” or the like. .

  (A)-(g) in FIG. 64 (A) is a minimum game time timer, a rotation start permission state, a lever operation, a 1st cylinder, a 2nd cylinder, a 3rd cylinder, and display determination. Each timing related to is schematically shown. In addition, the first cylinder, the second cylinder, and the third cylinder in the figure are the same as the first cylinder 51L, the second cylinder 51C, and the third cylinder 51R (see FIG. 1). It corresponds.

  Of the minimum game time of (a) shown in the top row among (a) to (g) in FIG. 50 (A), the rise of the chart as shown at timing T1 is the above-described timer measurement related to the minimum game time. It corresponds to the start of. As described above, this minimum game time is set so as not to start the current spinning rotation unless a predetermined time (4.1 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the start of the spinning rotation in the previous game. Is for. Then, the timer measurement related to the minimum game time timer is performed by the timer measurement process (S551) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as described above.

  Further, in FIG. 50 (A), in the minimum game time timer of (a), the period when the chart is rising (the period from T1 to T2) indicates that the count of the minimum game time timer is continued. The trailing edge of the chart shown at timing T2 indicates that the minimum game time timer has stopped counting. In the normal time shown in FIG. 50 (A), the timer measurement related to the minimum game time timer is continued for 4.1 seconds, which is a period during which the spinning rotation related to the next game cannot be started. The game stops with the elapse of time, and the minimum game time timer count ends.

  Subsequently, in the state where the rotation of the rotating cylinder shown in (b) of FIG. 50A is permitted, during the period when the chart rises, the first rotating cylinder 51L, the second rotating cylinder 51C, and the third rotating cylinder described above. 51R (refer FIG. 1) has shown that it is a period which can start rotation. That is, (b) in FIG. 50 (A) shows a state in which each of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R cannot start rotation (start not permitted) while the time relating to the minimum game time shown in (a) is being measured. When the time relating to the minimum game time is not measured, each of the drums 51L to 51R is in a state where the rotation can be started (start permission state).

  In (b) of FIG. 50 (A), as shown at the left end of the chart, the chart is started from a situation where the rotation of the rotating drum can be started (a situation before timing T1). When the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time in () is started (timing T1), it becomes a situation where the rotation of the spinning cylinder cannot be started. Further, when the measurement of the time relating to the minimum gaming time is stopped (timing T2), the rotation of the spinning cylinder becomes possible, and when the measurement of the time relating to the minimum gaming time is started again, the rotation of the spinning cylinder starts. Cannot be performed (timing T3).

  Subsequently, for the lever operation shown in (c) of FIG. 50A, the rise of the chart shown at timing T4 indicates that the operation of the start lever 25 described above has been detected. Further, (d) to (f) in FIG. 50A show the states of the first cylinder (51L), the second cylinder (51C), and the third cylinder (51R), respectively. Yes. And the rising of the chart in (d) to (f) in the figure indicates the start of rotation of each cylinder (51L to 51C), and the falling of the chart indicates that the rotation of each cylinder (51L to 51C) is stopped. Show.

  As shown at the left end in (b) in FIG. 50 (A), when there is a lever operation as shown in FIG. 50 (c) in a situation where the rotation of the rotating cylinder can be started (a situation before timing T1). (Timing T4), the first cylinder (51L), the second cylinder (51C), and the third cylinder (51R) start to rotate (timing T1). At this time, the timer measurement is started for the minimum game time timer shown in FIG. 5A, and the rotation of the spinning cylinder rotation permission shown in FIG.

  When the above-described stop buttons 24L to 24R (see FIG. 1) are operated in the order of the first stop button 24L, the second stop button 24C, and the third stop button 24R (so-called forward pressing), As shown, the first cylinder (51L) and the second cylinder (51C) stop in order, and finally the third cylinder (51R) stops as shown at timing 5 in the figure. Here, among the above-mentioned cylinders (51L to 51R), the game in which the third cylinder (51R) stops last at the timing T5 will be described as the Nth game (N is a natural number of 1 or more). .

  Further, here, the stop buttons 24L to 24R are pushed in order so that the explanation and illustration are not complicated, and the stop of each cylinder is stopped by the first cylinder (51L), the second cylinder (51C), and the third. The case where it stops in order of the trunk | drum (51R) is demonstrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stopping order of each cylinder (51L to 51R) is any one of the six types of left middle right, left and right middle, middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left. There may be.

  As shown at the timing T5 in FIG. 50A, when the last cylinder (here, the third cylinder 51R) is stopped, as shown at the rising edge of the chart at the timing T5 in the figure. Next, display determination (see S66 in FIG. 14) is performed.

  Here, even if the last turning cylinder stop (here, the third turning cylinder 51R is stopped) is performed (timing T5), the measurement by the minimum game time timer in FIG. 50A (a) must be completed. For example, as shown at timing T6 in the figure, even if there is a lever operation for the next game (the (N + 1) th game), the spinning rotation is not started immediately. Then, as indicated by the timing T2 in the figure, when the minimum game time has elapsed, the rotation of each of the drums (51L to 51R) is started based on the lever operation at the timing T6 (timing T3).

  And when operation of each stop button 24L-24R by a forward push is performed again, as shown to (d)-(f) in a figure, a 1st cylinder (51L), a 2nd cylinder ( 51C) and the third drum (51R) are stopped in this order, and display determination relating to the (N + 1) th game is performed as shown at timing T7 in FIG.

  In addition, various aspects can be employ | adopted about the aspect of the rotation start of each drum (51L-51C) shown to the timing T1 and timing T3 in FIG. 50 (A). For example, as shown in the figure, it is possible to exemplify a mode in which three spinning cylinders are started to rotate simultaneously, or a time difference is provided at the timing of starting the rotation of each spinning cylinder. Furthermore, as for providing a time difference in the rotation start timing of each cylinder, for example, after the rotation of the first reel and the next reel is started, measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is started, A mode in which the remaining (last) reel is rotated thereafter can be exemplified. It is also possible to consider a mode in which the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is started after the start of rotation of the first reel, and the two remaining reels are sequentially started to rotate.

In addition to those described above, for example, if the minimum game time set at the start of the rotation of the last game has not elapsed during the lever operation, the time difference between the rotation start timings of each When the remaining time (weight period) is divided into, for example, three equal parts, and when 1/3 of the time has elapsed, the first (first) reel starts to rotate and when 2/3 of the time has elapsed The second (second) reel starts rotating, and the third (last) reel starts rotating when the remaining gaming time has passed and the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It can be illustrated.
<< Management mode when recoverable error >>

  Next, the management mode of the minimum game time when a recoverable error (recoverable abnormality) occurs will be described with reference to FIG. Note that portions similar to those in the normal state illustrated in FIG. 50A are illustrated in the same manner, and description thereof is omitted as appropriate.

  In FIG. 50 (B), (a) to (g) are the same as in the normal state of FIG. 50 (A), the minimum game time timer, the rotation start permission, the lever operation, the first cylinder (51L), Each chart of the second cylinder (51C), the third cylinder (51R), and display determination is shown. Here, when the game from the rotation start to the rotation stop of each of the spinning cylinders 51R to 51L shown on the left side in the figure is the Nth game as described above, as shown on the right side in the figure, The game of the next rotation and stop of 51R to 51L is the (N + 1) th game as described above.

  Further, (h) to (j) in FIG. 50B show charts of recoverable errors, abnormal states, and abnormal cancellations. As described above, in the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, an error (recoverable error) that can be returned to the normal state by canceling the error, and a return to the normal state cannot be performed only by canceling the error. Error (unrecoverable error).

  Among these, the recoverable error is an error that can be canceled without starting the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) and performing the setting change device process. On the other hand, an unrecoverable error can be canceled by turning off the power after the occurrence of the error, turning on the setting key, starting the power supply, and starting the setting change device process (see FIG. 13). This is an error that returns to the normal state (a state in which a game is possible) by exiting the setting change state by turning off the setting key. In FIG. 50B, (h) indicates the detection (occurrence) of a recoverable error among these errors by the rising edge of the chart (timing T11).

  As described above, the recoverable error includes an HE error, an HP error, an HQ error, and an FE error, which are errors related to payout of game medals, and a CP error, which is an error related to insertion of game medals. There are C0 error, C1 error, CH error, and CE error. Among these, the HE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal in the game medal payout device 63 is empty, and the HP error is determined that the game medal at the game medal payout device 63 is jammed. Error.

  Further, the HQ error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the payout sensor (not shown), and the FE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal auxiliary storage 71 is full. The CP error is an error when it is determined that the inserted game medal has illegally passed, and the C0 error is the case where it is determined that there has been an abnormal input to the insertion sensor (here, the insertion sensor 2) as described above. Is an error.

  Further, the C1 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the portion where the insertion sensor 45 and the selector passage sensor 46 are provided in the medal passage 105, and the CH error is a game to the selector passage sensor 46 as described above. This is an error when it is determined that medals have accumulated. The CE error is an error when it is determined that a game medal has stayed in a portion where the insertion sensor 1 (115) or the insertion sensor 2 (116) is provided.

  The error canceling condition relating to these errors is that a canceling operation for changing the signal of the setting / reset button 69 (setting / reset button signal) from OFF to ON with the factor removed is performed. Further, when the door switch signal related to the door switch 60 and the setting door switch signal related to the setting door switch 67 are ON, the above-described release operation becomes valid.

  When a recoverable error is detected for (h) in FIG. 50 (B) (timing T11), an abnormal state occurs as shown by the rising edge of the chart (timing T11) in FIG. In this case, the recoverable error detection timing (T11) is the timing after all the spinning cylinders (51L to 51R) have stopped.

  Further, when the recoverable error is released and the release of the abnormal state is detected (here, timing T2) as shown by the rising edge of the chart in (j) in the figure, the above-described abnormal state ends (timing T12). ). In FIG. 50 (B), the timing for canceling the abnormality in (j) is illustrated so as to coincide with the end timing (timing T2) of the measurement by the minimum game time timer in (a). Is merely an example, and the timings of the two do not necessarily match.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in (h) to (j) in FIG. 50B, even in a situation where a recoverable error has occurred (see timing T11 and thereafter), it is shown in (a) in the figure. As described above, the measurement (counting) of the time relating to the minimum game time is continued. Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is started, the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is stopped (timing T2). At this time, as shown in (i) in the figure, if the error state continues, as shown in (a) and (b) in the figure, even if the measurement by the minimum game time timer is finished, The rotation cannot be started.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 50B, as shown in (a) and (b) in the figure, in the Nth game, even if the minimum game time set in the RWM has elapsed (timing T2 ), It is not immediately possible to rotate the rotating drum. Then, when the abnormal state ends as shown in (i) in the figure (timing T12), the start of rotation of the spinning cylinder is permitted (timing T12) as shown in (b) in the figure.

  Further, as shown in (c) in the figure, if there is a lever operation in the (N + 1) th game (timing T6), the first cylinder (51L), the second cylinder (51C), and the third The rotation of the trunk (51R) is started, the timer setting related to the counting of the minimum gaming time timer is performed, and the measurement of the time related to the minimum gaming time is started as shown in FIG. Accordingly, as shown in (b) in the figure, the rotation start of the rotating drum is not permitted.

  And if each stop button 24L-24R is operated, each spinning cylinder 51L-51R will stop based on the operation timing and operation order of each stop button 24L-24R. Here, in the example of FIG. 50 (B), as in the case of FIG. 50 (A), the stop buttons 24L to 24R are sequentially displayed for both the Nth game and the N + 1th game. It is operated by pushing.

  The management mode at the time of this recoverable error can also be explained as follows. That is, while the game is stopped due to a recoverable error, the time (count) relating to the minimum game time is continued. In the Nth game, a period before the occurrence of the recoverable error (period from the start of the game until the occurrence of the recoverable error) and a period of occurrence of the recoverable error (recoverable) When the sum of the error durations exceeds the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game can be started without a wait period. On the other hand, if the total of the period in which the game before the occurrence of the recoverable error and the period in which the recoverable error has occurred is less than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the N + 1th game is , Can start after a wait period.

  According to the management mode at the time of the recoverable error as described above, when the recoverable error occurs, the time of the minimum game time is continued as much as possible by continuing the measurement of the minimum game time. The gaming machine can be controlled. Furthermore, the time related to the minimum gaming time can be counted regardless of the state of the gaming machine (here, the slot machine 10) and the gaming state. Then, it is possible to smoothly advance the game, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, game time by one player or business hours for one day of the game hall). Become.

That is, as described above, the period relating to the minimum gaming time is a period during which the next spinning rotation cannot be started, and the next spinning rotation cannot be started by stopping the measurement of the time relating to the minimum gaming time. The period will be extended. For this reason, in order to secure as many games as possible and have the player enjoy the game, it is desirable not to increase the period during which the rotation of the spinning cylinder can be started more than the minimum necessary period (4.1 seconds). . In addition, according to the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the period during which a game cannot be progressed is longer than a predetermined time (4.1 seconds). However, as many games as possible can be secured.
<< Management mode in case of unrecoverable error >>

  Next, the management mode of the minimum game time when an unrecoverable error (unrecoverable abnormality) occurs will be described with reference to FIG. Note that portions similar to those at the time of the recoverable error illustrated in FIG. 50B are illustrated in the same manner, and description thereof is omitted as appropriate.

  In FIG. 51 (A), (a) to (f) are similar to the case of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 50 (B). 51L), the second cylinder (51C), and the third cylinder (51R). Further, (g) in FIG. 51A indicates the state of the power source, and indicates that the power source is ON during the rising period of the chart.

  Further, (h) in FIG. 51 (A) indicates the detection (occurrence) of an unrecoverable error by the rising edge of the chart (timing T16). As described above, this non-recoverable error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) is executed. For this reason, when an unrecoverable error occurs, a game clerk or the like temporarily turns off the power to the slot machine 10 (timing T17) and then turns on the setting key switch 68 (see FIG. 4) to cancel the error. In this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again and start up (timing T18) to operate the setting change device (timing T19).

  As described above, such unrecoverable errors include an E1 error, an E5 error, an E6 error, and an E7 error. Among these, the E1 error is an error when the power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, and the E5 error is an error when the symbol combination display at the time of all cylinder stops is abnormal. Details of the E5 error will be described later. Further, the E6 error is an error when the set value is out of the range, and the E7 error is an abnormality in the frequency of the clock input to the RCK terminal (not shown) for updating the random number in the main CPU 81 or a built-in random number (16 bits). This is an error when an abnormal update state is detected.

  The E5 error among the above-mentioned various non-recoverable errors is caused when the combination display of symbols is abnormal as a result of the display determination in the display determination (S66) in the above-described game progress main process (see FIG. 14). Occur.

  Next, the non-recoverable error process will be described with reference to FIG. In the unrecoverable error processing shown in FIG. 29, interrupts are prohibited (S411), and error display data is set in the order of the lower digit and the upper digit of the error display (S412 and S413). Further, the clear output port address and the number of output ports are set (S414), the output port (0 to 6 here) is turned OFF (S415), and the next output port address is set (S416).

  Then, the output end is determined (S417), and if all the outputs for the output ports (0 to 6) have been completed (S417: YES), the error display process (S418) is performed to output ports 3 and 4. Output for error display. Then, switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is performed (S419), and the process returns to the above-described clear output port address and output port number setting processing (S414).

  On the other hand, if the output is not completed in the output termination determination process (S417) described above (S417: NO), the process returns to the output port OFF process (S415). Then, the output port OFF (S415) and the next output port address setting (S416) are repeated until all the outputs for the output ports (0 to 6) are completed. Further, after all the outputs for the output ports (0 to 6) are completed (S417: YES), the process proceeds to the above error display process (S418).

  As described above, the detection (occurrence) of the non-recoverable error described with the E5 error as an example results in an abnormal state (timing T16) as shown by the rising edge of the chart in (i) of FIG. Then, for example, a game shop clerk temporarily turns off the power switch 72 (see FIG. 4) in order to release the error that cannot be restored by operating the setting change device (timing T17), and thereafter, as described above. With the setting key turned on, the power switch 72 is turned on to turn on the power (timing T18). Then, as shown by the rising edge of the chart in (j) in the figure (timing T19), the setting change device operates, and the abnormal state due to the unrecoverable error is eliminated (same as timing T19).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the situation where an unrecoverable error has occurred, as shown in (a) of FIG. 51A, the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped (timing T16).

  When the error is canceled as shown in (j) of FIG. 51A (timing T19), the rotating cylinder can be started to rotate as shown in FIG. 51B (timing T2). . Furthermore, if there is a lever operation thereafter (timing T6) as shown in (c) in the figure, the first cylinder (51L) and the second cylinder (51C) related to the (N + 1) th game as described above. ), The rotation of the third cylinder (51R) is started, and the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is started as shown in (a) in the figure (timing T3).

  The management mode at the time of this unrecoverable error can also be explained as follows. That is, the measurement (counting) of the time relating to the minimum game time is stopped while the game is stopped due to an error that cannot be restored. The unrecoverable error is an abnormality that cannot be canceled unless the setting changer process (see FIG. 13) is started as described above. When the setting change device process is performed, internal numerical values and flags handled by the main CPU 81 are cleared. For this reason, the numerical value of the count accompanying time measurement is also cleared. That is, when the non-recoverable error is canceled, the counter value set before that is cleared, and therefore, when the start lever 25 is operated after the non-recoverable error is canceled, a wait period does not occur. The reel will start rotating.

According to the management mode at the time of the non-recoverable error as described above, when the non-recoverable error occurs, the burden on the program processing can be reduced by stopping the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time. become. In other words, the non-recoverable error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the installation changing device is operated (initialization operation). Therefore, there is no measure for canceling the error other than this initialization operation. For this reason, if an error that cannot be restored occurs, if the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is continued, the program processing for continuing the measurement is wasted. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent unnecessary program processing from being executed and to reduce the processing load by stopping the measurement of the time related to the minimum gaming time when an unrecoverable error occurs. Become.
<< Management mode when liquidating game medals >>

  Next, the management mode of the minimum game time when the game medals are settled will be described with reference to FIG. Note that portions similar to those at the time of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 51B are illustrated in the same manner, and description thereof is omitted as appropriate.

  In FIG. 51 (B), (a) to (g) are similar to the case of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 50 (B). 51L), the second cylinder (51C), the third cylinder (51R), and display determination charts. Further, (h) in FIG. 51 (B) shows the state of the medal clearing, and the game medal is being cleared according to the rising period of the chart (period after timing T26). Represents.

  Such game medal clearing is based on the above-described game medal clearing process (see FIG. 28), and the game medal management process (S56 in FIG. 14 and FIG. 26) related to the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). This is executed when the settlement button is ON (see S325 in FIG. 26: YES). In the game medal clearing process (see FIG. 28), as described above, it is determined whether or not the game is replayed (S371, S372), and the betted (betted) game medal is determined according to the determination result. Processing based on the stored game medal (S383 to S390, etc.) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the game medal can be cleared by operating the clearing button even during the period from the end of the game to before the lever operation at the start of the next game. The game medals can be settled even during the minimum game time.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the game medals are liquidated as described above, as shown in (a) of FIG. 51 (B), the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is continued. . Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is started, the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is stopped, and as shown in FIG. It is possible to start the rotation of the first rotation) (timing T2).

  If the game medal clearing start timing (T26) is a situation where a betted game medal or a stored game medal is present, the game medal is settled between the Nth game and the (N + 1) th game. It can occur at various timings based on the will of the person.

  The management mode at the time of game medal settlement can also be explained as follows. That is, while the game is stopped due to the game medal clearing, the time measurement (count) relating to the minimum game time is continued. Then, in the Nth game, the period before the game medal clearing (the period from the start of the game to the start of game medal clearing) and the period during which the game medal clearing (game medal clearing) In the (N + 1) th game can be started without a waiting period. On the other hand, if the total of the period before the game medal clearing and the period during which the game medal clearing is less than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the number of times in the (N + 1) th game The cylinder rotation can be started after a weight period.

According to the management mode at the time of game medal settlement as described above, by continuing the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, as in the case of the above-described recoverable error (see FIG. 50B), The gaming machine control can be performed without hindering the passage of the minimum gaming time as much as possible. Furthermore, regardless of the gaming state, the time related to the minimum gaming time can be counted. Then, it is possible to smoothly advance the game, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, game time by one player or business hours for one day of the game hall). Become.
<< Management mode when game medals are inserted >>

  Next, a management mode of the minimum game time when a game medal is inserted will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of a recoverable error shown in FIG. 50B, the same parts as those in the game medal clearing shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 52 (A), (a) to (g) show the minimum game time timer and the count as in the case of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 50 (B) and the game medal clearing shown in FIG. 51 (B). The charts of the cylinder rotation start possible, the operation lever, the first cylinder (51L), the second cylinder (51C), the third cylinder (51R), and the display determination are shown. Further, (h) in FIG. 52 (A) shows a state of medal insertion, and is a situation where game medals are being inserted in the rising period of the chart (period from timing T5 to T6). Represents that.

  In this case, “inserting medals” refers to entering game medals into the game medal slot 21, operating various bet buttons to bet (set) bets on stored (credit) game medals, In addition, automatic placement (automatic betting) is performed when the result of the role drawing in the previous game (previous game) is a re-game.

  When such a game medal is inserted, as described above, it is determined that a game medal has been inserted as a result of the check (S54) relating to the presence / absence of a game medal in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). (S54: YES), the process proceeds to the aforementioned game medal management process (see S56 and FIG. 26). In the game medal clearing process (see FIG. 28), as described above, it is determined whether or not the game is replayed (S371, S372), and the betted (betted) game medal is determined according to the determination result. Processing based on the stored game medal (S383 to S390, etc.) is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game medal can be inserted as described above even during the period (wait period) from the end of the game by stopping the spinning cylinder to before the lever operation at the start of the next game. . That is, even during the wait period, the next game is started by inserting a medal from the game medal slot 21 (see FIG. 1) or by operating the three-sheet button or the one-button button in the main input unit 26 described above. It is possible to execute betting (betting setting) of game medals necessary for the game. In addition, it is possible to execute automatic insertion when the result of winning a combination in the previous game is a re-game.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when game medals are inserted in this way, as shown in (a) of FIG. 52 (A), the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is continued. Yes. Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is started, the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is stopped, and as shown in FIG. It is possible to start the rotation of the first rotation) (timing T2).

  Here, although it is illustrated that the insertion of the game medal is started at the same time as the rise of the display determination chart (timing T5) in the Nth game (timing T5), it is limited to this. Instead, game medals are inserted at various timings based on the player's will to play the (N + 1) th game after the stop (timing T5) of all the cylinders (51L to 51R) in the Nth game. Is something that can be done.

  The management mode when the game medal is inserted can also be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped due to the insertion of a game medal, the time (count) relating to the minimum game time is continued. In the Nth game, the period before the game medal was inserted (period from the start of the game until the game medal was started) and the period during which the game medal was inserted (game medal input) In the case where the sum of the continuation periods) exceeds the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game can be started without a wait period. On the other hand, when the total of the period before the game medal is inserted and the period when the game medal is inserted is less than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the N + 1th game is It can start after a wait period.

According to the management mode when a game medal is inserted as described above, by continuing the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, in the case of the above-described recoverable error (see FIG. 50B), and the game As in the case of medal clearing (see FIG. 51B), the gaming machine control can be performed without hindering the passage of the minimum gaming time as much as possible. Furthermore, regardless of the gaming state, the time related to the minimum gaming time can be counted. Then, it is possible to smoothly advance the game, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, game time by one player or business hours for one day of the game hall). Become.
<< Management mode at the time of setting value confirmation >>

  Next, the management mode of the minimum game time when the set value is confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. Note that portions similar to those at the time of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 50B and the case of the non-recoverable error shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 52 (B), (a) to (g) are similar to the case of the recoverable error shown in FIG. 50 (B). 51L), the second cylinder (51C), the third cylinder (51R), and display determination charts. Further, (h) in FIG. 52 (B) shows a set value confirmation state, which indicates that the set value is confirmed at the rising edge of the chart (timing T31).

  In the confirmation of the set value indicated by (h) in FIG. 52 (B), the presence / absence of a game medal is checked in the aforementioned game progress main process (see FIG. 14) (S54). The process can be performed when the process proceeds to the process (S55) (S54: NO) and the set value can be confirmed. Further, in a state where the set value can be confirmed, the game can be progressed (see S56 and thereafter).

  In addition, as described above, the setting value can be confirmed by operating the setting key so that the setting key switch 68 is turned on in the situation where the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, and setting the setting change device in the operating state. Is called. The set value is confirmed by displaying the set value (any one of “1” to “6” here) on the setting display LED 66 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the main control board 61 (see FIG. 4). It is possible for the game shop clerk or the like to visually check the displayed set value through the transparent main board case 65. In the setting value checkable state in which the setting value can be checked in this way, even if the set / reset button 69 is operated, the setting value does not change.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the setting value confirmation is performed in this way, as shown in (a) of FIG. 52 (B), the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time is continued. Then, when 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is started, the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is stopped, and as shown in FIG. ) Can be started (rotation T2).

  The management mode at the time of confirming the set value can also be described as follows. That is, while the game is stopped by confirming the set value, the time (count) relating to the minimum game time is continued. In the N-th game, a period before the set value check is performed (a period from the start of the game until the set value check is started), and an operator such as a game clerk checks the set value. When the sum of the remaining periods (continuation period of the set value confirmation) exceeds the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the N + 1th game can start spinning without a wait period. On the other hand, if the total of the period in which the game before the set value confirmation is performed and the period in which the set value confirmation is performed is less than the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the (N + 1) th game is Spinner rotation can be started after a wait period.

According to the management mode at the time of confirming the set value as described above, by continuing the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, at the time of the above-described recoverable error (see FIG. 50B), at the time of medal settlement (see FIG. 51 (B)), and when the medal is inserted (see FIG. 52 (A)), the gaming machine control can be performed without hindering the passage of the minimum gaming time as much as possible. Furthermore, the time related to the minimum gaming time can be counted regardless of the state of the gaming machine (here, the slot machine 10) and the gaming state. Then, it is possible to smoothly advance the game, and it is possible to secure the maximum number of games per predetermined time (for example, game time by one player or business hours for one day of the game hall). Become.
<< Processing mode during measurement of time related to minimum gaming time >>

  Next, another aspect of the minimum game time management in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, in the present embodiment, a process not related to the minimum game time is not performed between the determination of the lapse of time related to the minimum game time after the start of the next game and the process of the minimum game time set. .

  That is, for example, if the normal time shown in FIG. 50A is used as an example, in the Nth game as described above, the measurement result of the time related to the minimum game time set at the start of rotation of the spinning cylinder is the timing. Starting at T1, until the timing T2 when the measurement value becomes 0 arrives, the spinning rotation related to the (N + 1) th game is not ready to start. Then, until the measurement result of the time related to the minimum game time becomes 0 or less, a check of whether or not the measurement result of the time related to the minimum game time becomes 0 or less (whether or not the minimum game time has passed) The determination process related to the progress check) loops.

  As described above, the loop process related to the minimum game time progress check can be performed during the above-described spinning rotation start standby process used in the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). Further, the process of checking the elapsed time relating to the minimum game time loops until the measurement result becomes 0 or less, and when the measurement result becomes 0 or less, the process loop relating to the progress check ends (S521). In this embodiment, after the process related to the progress check is started, the other processes are not executed until the measurement result becomes 0 or less and the loop ends.

  If it is determined that the measurement result is 0 or less by the process related to the progress check of the minimum game time, the value of the minimum game time related to the (N + 1) th game (next game) is set as described above. During the rotation rotation start standby process of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), the rotation is set in the area of the minimum game time timer in the RWM (S522), and the rotation rotation can be started. Furthermore, when the minimum game time set here elapses, it becomes possible to start the rotation of the spinning cylinder in the (N + 2) th game.

  Here, in the management mode relating to the minimum game time, the above-mentioned “after the start of the next game”, more specifically, in the main game progress process related to the (N + 1) th game (see FIG. 14), It can be said that this is after the start (S51). Further, it can be said that the above-mentioned “minimum gaming time elapse determination” is to perform an elapse time check relating to the minimum gaming time after repeating the loop processing after the rotation of the spinning cylinder during the (N + 1) th game is started. . Further, it can be said that the above-mentioned “minimum game time set process” is a process of setting the value of the minimum game time in the RWM at the start of the (N + 2) th rotation rotation.

  Note that these relations are based on the Nth game as the starting point. In the game progress main process (see FIG. 14) related to the Nth game, the minimum game is started after the spinning rotation is started (S51). The time is set, the progress of the minimum game time is checked by a loop process, and the value of the minimum game time is set in the RWM at the time of the (N + 1) th rotation start of rotation. It can also be said that it is not to be.

  In addition, it is conceivable that a power interruption occurs even during the measurement of the minimum game time as described above, but the power-off process related to the power interruption in this case is “a process not related to the minimum game time”. May not be applicable.

According to such a management mode of the minimum game time, the time related to the minimum game time can be measured without interruption as much as possible. And the time which concerns on the minimum game time can be counted correctly and rapidly by the measurement without a break. This also prevents as much as possible the period during which the game cannot proceed from increasing beyond the predetermined time (4.1 seconds), and as much as possible even under the limitation of the minimum game time. The number of games can be secured.
<< Management mode related to test signal output >>

  Next, the management mode of the minimum game time related to the relationship with the test signal output will be described. In this embodiment, in the error management process (see FIG. 20) related to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the test signal output process (S762) is executed, and the test signal output process is executed every timer interrupt process. . Further, as described above, in the test signal output process (S762), a process of outputting a test signal to a predetermined output port is performed.

  The test signal is output using one or a plurality of pulses. The initial output timing of the pulse representing the output content is determined based on the measurement result of the test signal output timer for measuring the test signal output timing. Is done. Then, every time the measurement result of the test signal output timer reaches a predetermined time (here, 4.1 seconds or more), output of the test signal is started. Here, the contents of the test signal include one represented by one pulse (single pulse) and one represented by a plurality of pulses (multiple pulses). It will be the same regardless of the number.

  In this embodiment, the test signal output timer is set immediately after the minimum game time timer is set. That is, in this embodiment, as described above, the minimum game time timer is set during the rotation rotation start waiting process related to the game progress main process (see FIG. 14). Is executed without any other processing as the next processing after the set of the minimum game time timer. For this reason, the setting of the minimum game time, the test signal output, the end of the minimum game time, and the order of the next test signal output are always kept constant.

  Further, FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the time measurement period related to the minimum game time and the test signal output start timing. In FIG. 53, “Measurement start” represents the timing of starting measurement of the time related to the minimum game time, and “Measurement end” in FIG. It represents the timing of measurement after 1 second has passed. Further, “Test signal output start” in the figure indicates the timing at which the above-described test signal output is started.

  Here, there are a plurality of test signals and a single pulse as described above, and the test signal output end timing varies depending on circumstances such as the number of pulses. And an example of a single pulse, and the description of the test signal output stop timing is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the test signal output timer is set without any other process as the next process after the minimum game time timer set. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 53, the start timing of the test signal output is immediately after the timing of starting the measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time. Then, in the test stage, by confirming that the time interval between the start timing of the test signal output at one time and the start timing of the next test signal output is 4.1 seconds or more, 4.1 seconds It can be estimated that the minimum game time is secured.

As described above, in this embodiment, the measurement start timing of the test signal output timer is generated at intervals of the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) or more. For this reason, in the test stage in which the test signal is monitored, the interval (test signal output start interval) between the output start timing of the test signal output first and the output start timing of the test signal output thereafter is set. If monitoring and confirming that the start interval related to the test signal output before and after is secured for 4.1 seconds or more, the minimum game time of 4.1 seconds is indirectly secured by this. Can be confirmed.
<< Management aspect related to relationship with power interruption determination >>

  Next, the management mode of the minimum game time related to the above-described power-off process (S543 in FIG. 18, see FIG. 19) will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the power interruption determination is performed by the power interruption process (S543) in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 18) by the determination of the presence or absence of the power interruption detection signal (S561 in FIG. 19). As described above, in the determination of the presence or absence of the power-off detection signal (S561), when the power-off detection signal is detected (S561: YES), the subsequent processing (see FIG. 19) is executed.

  If the power-off detection signal is not detected (S561: NO), the power-off process is terminated, and the interrupt counter value update process (S544 in FIG. 18) is executed. In this interrupt counter value update process (S544), a timer interrupt is generated by updating the value in a predetermined range (here, “0” to “255”) by “1” for each timer interrupt process. You can confirm that it occurred. Thereafter, as described above, the timer measurement process (S551) related to the measurement of the time related to the minimum game time is performed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the timer measurement process (S551) is executed as a process subsequent to the power-off process (S543) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) in the same way as the power-off process (S543). The power interruption determination is performed before subtraction of the minimum game time timer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of power interruption after the subtraction of the minimum game time timer from being used for the game in the amount of time subtracted in the timer interrupt processing at that time, and the minimum game time can be ensured only by the game time. Can be secured. Note that the count mode of the timer is not limited to subtraction (countdown), and for example, addition (countup) may be performed.
<< Relationship between game medal payout and weight period >>

  Next, the relationship between the payout of game medals and the weight period will be described. First, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, display determination is performed at the end of the game (S66 in FIG. 14), and the symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined combination for which a game medal is to be paid out (with a payout) is stopped. If displayed, payout of the number of game medals corresponding to the payout is executed (S67). These processes are executed even during the wait period. For this reason, even when the start lever 25 is operated after the betting is set and the rotation of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R is not started, game medals may be paid out.

In addition, this invention is not limited to each Example as mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation is possible. For example, at the normal time shown in FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (B) or at a recoverable error, at the time of game medal settlement shown in FIG. 51 (B), at the time of game medal insertion shown in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (B) The measurement of the time relating to the minimum game time may be continued without being stopped not only at the time of value confirmation but also in other situations.
<Corresponding to irregular operation in setting change work>

Next, in the middle of changing the setting using the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4), an irregular operation (non-regular operation) is performed, and a situation such as a power interruption (power interruption) or an error occurs. A response when it occurs will be described. In the following description, first, a normal setting change procedure in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment and a processing mode of setting value data (setting value data) will be described, and thereafter, an irregular operation related to the setting change will be described. Specific examples of the above and various correspondence patterns in the case where a power interruption or an error occurs during a setting change due to an irregular operation will be described.
<< Procedure for changing regular settings >>

  In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, a regular operation for changing the setting with respect to the setting unit 62 (see FIG. 4) is performed as follows. First, for example, a game hall clerk opens the front door portion 11 of the slot machine 10 in a power-off state (see FIGS. 1 and 2). When opening the front door part 11, as described above, a predetermined key is inserted into the lock part 23 (see FIG. 1) of the front door part 11 locked in the closed state, and this key is unlocked. Rotate (for example, counterclockwise).

  Further, the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 shown in FIG. 4 is opened, and although not shown, the setting key cylinder into which the setting key is inserted can be accessed. Further, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key is rotated (ON operation) in the ON direction (for example, clockwise direction). Then, the power switch 72 is turned on to supply power to the slot machine 10.

  When the power is turned on, both the front door portion 11 and the setting door (not shown) are in an open state, so that both the door switch 60 and the setting door switch 67 are turned on. Since the setting key is rotated in the ON direction, the setting key switch 68 is also turned ON. The door switch 60, the setting door switch 67, and the setting key switch 68 constitute a designation switch (see S9 in FIG. 12) as described above. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made (S9: YES) in the determination process (S9) of whether or not the designated switch is turned on in the power-on process (see FIG. 12).

  If an affirmative determination is made in the determination process (S9) described above, an operation start state in which the setting change device process (see FIG. 13) can be executed is achieved by satisfying other conditions. In the present embodiment, such a state is referred to as being in the state of “setting change device operation”. In addition, in the present embodiment, the “other condition” that enables the execution of the setting change device processing described above is that the power-off recovery data is abnormal (S10: YES), or the setting change disable flag is ON. (S11: NO).

  As described above, when power is supplied to the slot machine 10, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 mounted on the main control board 61 (see FIG. 4). A so-called 7-segment display is used for the setting display LED 66. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting display LED 66 displays one of setting values (six values from “1” to “6” in this case) that is an integer value within a predetermined range, and this displayed setting. The value is visible through the transparent main board case 65.

  Here, the setting value displayed on the setting display LED 66 at the time of setting change is a setting value that has been determined at the time of the most recent power-off through a normal setting changing operation. Further, as described in the setting change device process (see FIG. 13), the setting value data indicates a value within a normal predetermined range (here, “1” to “6”) at the start of setting change. If not (S29: NO), the set value to be displayed is “1”, which is the least advantageous for the player.

  When the setting / reset button 69 (see FIG. 4) is pressed in the above-described setting change device operating state, the display of the setting value changes. In this embodiment, each time the set / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the set value is incremented by one step. For example, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in setting 1 (the setting value is 1) and the setting / reset button 69 is operated once, setting 2 is obtained. Thereafter, each time the set / reset button 69 is pressed, the display of the set value changes in ascending order of “2”, “3”,.

  Further, when the setting / reset button 69 is operated once with the setting value 6 being the highest setting value, the setting 1 being the lowest setting value is obtained. Then, in a situation where the value displayed on the setting display LED 66 is the setting value that is the purpose of selection, the game shop clerk operates the start lever 25 (see FIG. 1) and presses the start switch (not shown). The set value is confirmed by turning it ON.

  As described above, when the set / reset button 69 is pressed, the mode of change related to the display of the set value is not limited to the display of the set value incremented step by step. For example, the display of the set value is displayed. May be decremented step by step and change in descending order. Furthermore, the range of setting values that can be changed by the setting changer process (see FIG. 13) is not limited to the six levels “1” to “6”, but is, for example, the four levels “1” to “4”. May be.

  Subsequently, the setting key is rotated in the OFF direction (for example, counterclockwise) (OFF operation), the setting door provided in the setting unit 62 is closed, and the normal setting change operation is completed, so that the game is possible. State (normal state).

  In this embodiment, after the above-described “setting change device operation” state, the state after the operation of the setting / reset button 69 becomes valid is the “setting value change possible” state. Called. This “setting value can be changed” is a situation in which the setting value can be changed (selected) by operating the set / reset button 69.

  In the present embodiment, the state in which the setting value is confirmed by the operation of the start lever 25 (lever operation) after “setting value can be changed” is referred to as a “setting value confirmation” situation. When the set value is to be changed, the setting / reset button 69 is operated as described above in “setting value can be changed”, and the start lever 25 is operated in a state where the target setting value is reached. The status will be “Set value confirmed”. In the state of “setting value confirmation”, even if the setting / reset button 69 is operated, the display of the setting value does not change.

  In the present embodiment, the state of waiting for the setting key to be turned off after the above “setting value confirmation” is referred to as a “setting value determination waiting” state. Even in the “waiting for setting value determination” state, it is impossible to change the setting value by operating the setting / reset button 69. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the state in the setting change work (the state relating to the setting change in the setting unit 62) can be divided into the first state and the second state. Then, when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is turned on, the state shifts to the first state, and when the start lever 25 is operated thereafter, the state shifts from the first state to the second state. Further, when the setting key is turned OFF in the second state, the second state is terminated.

  The display mode of the setting value in the situation such as “setting value can be changed”, “setting value confirmed” and “waiting for setting value determination” as described above may be lit, repeatedly blinking, An example is one that displays dots on the side (near the lower right). Then, the display mode of the setting value in each situation can be made different from the display mode of the setting in another situation so that the situation can be distinguished.

  In addition, as a display mode of the set value after “set value set”, it is possible to display other than the number representing the set value. Furthermore, examples of the display other than the number representing the set value include an integer value (for example, “0”) outside the settable value range, and predetermined characters, figures, symbols, and the like other than numbers. Further, after the start of the operation of the setting / reset button 69, a display mode is adopted in which the same number, character, figure, symbol, etc. other than the number indicating the set value are continuously displayed regardless of the number of selection operations. Is possible. Further, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which a number other than a number indicating a set value is changed each time the setting / reset button 69 is operated.

Thereafter, in the above-described “setting value determination waiting” situation, the setting key is turned in the OFF direction (for example, counterclockwise) and returned to complete the operation of the changing device. The situation is such that the game can be started (may be referred to as “normal state” or “normal game state”). In this “normal state”, the state for changing the setting has already been completed, and the setting value display on the setting display LED 66 and the display indicating that the setting is being changed are not performed. ing.
<< Data Processing Mode for Setting Change >>

  Next, setting value data and other data processing modes when a setting change operation is performed will be described. First, the set value data immediately after the power is turned on is backed up when the power is turned off most recently, and becomes valid when the power is turned on. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value data at that time is stored in a predetermined area in the RWM area that is the target of data backup. Here, the RWM area to be backed up can be referred to as, for example, “power interruption storage means” or “power interruption storage area”, and in particular, the power interruption in which the set value data is stored. The time storage area can be referred to as a “power-off storage area for setting value data”.

  Then, at the time of subsequent power failure recovery (power failure recovery), the backed-up setting value data is used as setting value data related to the setting value (operation start value) at the start of operation of the slot machine 10, and A reversion is performed. The above-described operation start value is stored in a part of the storage area in the power-off storage area to be backed up. As described above, the power-off storage area for the set value data serving as the operation start value among the set value data can be referred to as an “operation start value storage area”.

  In addition, in the period from when the power is turned on until the first operation of the setting / reset button 69 is performed (period before starting the setting value selection), the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 by the above-described operation. The set value data stored in the start value storage area is referred to.

  Further, after the setting / reset button 69 is operated and selection of the setting value is started, the setting value data relating to the selected setting value (selected setting value) is stored in a predetermined temporary storage unit of the main control board 61. It is stored in a storage area (predetermined temporary storage area). Then, after the start of selection, the setting value displayed on the setting display LED 66 is referred to setting value data (setting value data relating to the selection setting value) stored in a predetermined temporary storage area.

  Here, examples of the “predetermined temporary storage unit” and the “predetermined temporary storage area” include a predetermined area of the RWM and a predetermined register. The “predetermined temporary storage means” and the “predetermined temporary storage area” can be referred to as “setting value temporary storage means”, “setting value temporary storage area”, and the like.

  Further, as described above, when the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED 66 during the setting change operation, various processing modes relating to reference to the setting value data can be employed. First, as the first processing mode, an example in which the set value temporary storage area described above is provided as an RWM area (herein referred to as “temporary storage RWM area”) for temporarily storing the set value data can be exemplified. Then, the set value data is read directly from the temporary storage RWM area, and the numerical value indicated by the set value data is displayed on the setting display LED 66.

  Further, as a second processing mode related to reference to the set value data, for example, both a register and the above-described temporary storage RWM area are provided as the set value temporary storage area, and the set value of the temporary storage RWM area is stored in the register. An example of displaying a set value with reference to a register later can be given. Further, as the third processing mode, even if a register serving as a temporary storage area is provided, the setting value data can be directly read from the temporary storage RWM area as in the first mode described above.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first processing mode related to the reference of the set value data described above is employed. In addition, the second processing mode and the third processing mode described above can be adopted without being limited to this. For example, when the second processing mode is used, the set value is set by operating the setting / reset button 69. Each time selection is made, it is possible to transfer the set value data from the temporary storage RWM area to the register and display the set value on the setting display LED 66.

  In the present embodiment, the data indicating the state of the setting key (setting key state data) can be given as other data related to the setting change. As the setting key state data, a signal indicating the state of the setting key is monitored, and data acquired based on the monitoring result, flag data indicating the state of the setting key, and the like can be exemplified.

  Further, among these, the data acquired based on the monitoring result of the signal indicating the state of the setting key is exemplified by the signal level (ON level or OFF level) determined and acquired based on the level of this signal. it can.

  Also, unlike this, the edge when the signal indicating the setting key state changes from OFF to ON is obtained as setting key state data indicating the change to ON, and the signal indicating the setting key state is obtained. It is conceivable that an edge at the time of changing from ON to OFF is acquired as setting key state data indicating a change to OFF.

  Furthermore, when the setting change operation is completed, the setting value data (setting related to the selected value) held in the setting value temporary storage area is changed by switching the setting key state from ON to OFF as described above. Value data) is written to the aforementioned power-off storage area to be backed up. In the present embodiment, the set value data at the end of the setting change work is stored in the aforementioned operation start value storage area. In addition, the setting value data at the start of the setting change work at that time is stored in the operation start value storage area before the setting value data at the end of the setting change work is written and overwritten. Here, the data stored in the storage area at the time of power interruption may be directly acquired from the storage area at the time of power interruption, or once stored in the predetermined storage area at the time of power interruption recovery. It may be acquired after being stored.

In this embodiment, the setting value data at the beginning of the setting change operation when the power is turned on in the state where the setting key is turned on and the state is changed to the first state is referred to as “first setting value data”. The set value data relating to the set value selected during the first state can be referred to as “second set value data”. The set value data when the start lever 25 is operated to shift from the first state to the second state is referred to as “third set value data”, and the first set value data and the second set value data described above. Can be distinguished. These first set value data to third set value data are stored at the predetermined timing according to various corresponding patterns, which will be described later, when an irregular operation as described later is performed. It can be stored in the storage area at the time of disconnection. Further, the second set value data or the third set value data can be set value data related to the beginning of the setting change work according to various correspondence patterns.
<< Specific examples of non-regular operations related to setting changes >>

  Next, an irregular operation (non-regular operation) related to the setting change will be described. First, examples of non-regular operations that can be performed during a setting change include turning off the power during the setting change and inserting and retaining a game medal during the setting change. Then, due to these irregular operations, processing related to power interruption and processing related to errors are executed.

  In addition, among these emergency situations, it is assumed that the power interruption during the setting change is erroneously performed by a game shop clerk or the like, or intentionally performed by a person who works illegally. In addition to power failure caused by human operations as described above, power interruptions may occur without human intervention, such as power outages and momentary power interruptions. Also, power failure recovery (also referred to as power failure recovery or power recovery) can be performed by human operation or automatically by power recovery after a power failure or instantaneous power failure.

  In addition, the occurrence of power interruption during the setting change includes timings before and after selection of a set value by operating the set / reset button 69, after operation of the start lever after selection of the set value (after the set value is confirmed). ) Timing. Furthermore, when power is turned on after power interruption, it can be assumed that the power is turned on with the setting key turned on, or the power is turned on after the setting key is turned off.

More specifically, the errors during the setting change include the above-described errors related to the insertion of game medals (CP error, C0 error, C1 error, CH error, and CE error), and the payout of skill medals. Such errors (HE error, HP error, HQ error, and FE error) can be exemplified. In addition to this, a communication error between the main control board 61 and the sub-control board 31, a random number abnormality, and the like can be given.
<< First response when power interruption occurs (Pattern 1 related to power interruption when setting key is ON) >>

  Next, various patterns will be described for dealing with an emergency situation as described above during the setting change operation. In the following, first, regarding a first response when power interruption occurs during setting change (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 1 relating to power interruption” or “pattern 1 relating to power interruption when the setting key is ON”), This will be described with reference to FIG. The pattern 1 related to the power interruption is to return the setting value state to the state at the start of the setting change work when the power interruption is restored. Further, in the pattern 1 related to power interruption, if the setting key is ON, the set value data at the time of power interruption recovery is the same even if the situation at the time of power interruption is different.

  Further, (a1) and (a2) in FIG. 54 (a) show the pattern 1 related to power interruption separately in different charts based on the difference in the situation when power interruption occurs. Of these, FIG. 54 (a1) shows a case where a power interruption occurs in the absence of a setting value confirmation operation by a start lever operation (hereinafter referred to as “no set value confirmation”). ) Shows a case where a power interruption occurs in a state where the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever (hereinafter referred to as “setting value confirmed”). Further, the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption is adopted in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  Further, FIGS. 54A1 and 54A2 show various situations in the setting change work from the upper stage to the lower stage in the order of occurrence (see the “order” column and the “situation” column). 54 (a1) and 54 (a2), the “setting key” column shows the ON / OFF state of the setting key in each situation (orders 1 to 7). In the column of, set value data in each situation is shown. In the “set value display” column in the figure, the display contents of the setting display LED 66 in each situation are shown, and in the “stack contents” column at the right end in the figure, the respective items are displayed. In the situation, the return address (return data) stored in the stack pointer is shown.

  When the setting is changed, the slot machine 10 is turned on (order 1) as shown in the uppermost row of the “Status” column in FIG. 54 (a1). As shown in the "" column, the state of the setting key at this time is ON. In FIG. 54 (a1), the “setting value” described as “a” is the setting value at the time of the most recent power interruption, and the “setting value” depends on the setting value at the occurrence of the power interruption. "Is different. In other words, “Power-on” in order 1 is power-on that was performed after the setting change work was completed by a normal procedure and then turned off, and the “setting value” at the time of power-on is The setting value is backed up when the power is turned off (any one of “1” to “6”).

  Also, the display content of the setting display LED 66 shown in the “setting display” column is blank (blank). At this stage, the normal power-on related to the setting change has just been turned on, and the display has not yet started. It means not. Further, “stack contents” being “n” indicates that non-constant return destination data is stored in the stack pointer in accordance with the situation at the time of the previous power interruption.

  After such a power-on state, the above-mentioned “setting change device operation” state (order 2) is obtained. In this “setting change device operation”, as shown in FIG. 54 (a1), the “setting key”, “setting value”, and “stack contents” include the “power-on” status (order 1). There is no change compared to). However, “setting display” which is the display content of the setting display LED 66 is “a” based on the setting value data.

  Subsequently, when the “setting value can be changed” state (order 3) is reached, the “setting key” remains ON, but if the set / reset button 69 is operated, FIG. ), The “set value” changes to “b”, which is a new selected value, unlike “a” so far. The “setting display” is also “b” corresponding to the “setting value”, and the “stack contents” remains “n”.

  In the case of “no set value fixed” shown in FIG. 54 (a1), when power is interrupted during “setting value change possible” (order 4), the set value data of “set value” is “b”. However, the “stack content” is the return destination data in the previous “setting value change possible” situation (order 3). That is, when power interruption occurs, the return address after power interruption recovery is set (stored) in the stack pointer (see S568 in FIG. 19). In the example of FIG. 54 (a1), the return destination data related to “setting change is possible” is set in the stack pointer. In FIG. 54, in order to express this, "Order 3".

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 54 (a1), when the power is turned on with the setting key turned ON (order 5), in the subsequent “setting changing device operation” situation (order 6), “setting value” "Returns to the same" a "as before the occurrence of power interruption, and" setting display "also becomes" a ". Further, even in the situation where “setting value can be changed” (order 7), “setting value” and “setting display” remain “a”.

  For example, in the state of “setting change device operation” in order 2, the setting display LED 66 can start blinking the setting value. In this case, after the power is turned on in order 5 and the setting change device is activated in order 6, the power is restored with the setting display LED 66 blinking the setting value. Is possible.

  Next, the case of “setting value confirmed” shown in FIG. 54 (a2) will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those in the case where the set value is not fixed will be omitted as appropriate. In the case where the set value is determined, “set value change” shown in order 4 is performed after “setting value can be changed” shown in order 3. At this time, there is no change in “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display”, which are “ON”, “b”, and “b”, respectively, in the same way as “setting value change possible” in order 3. .

  Furthermore, as shown in the order 5 in FIG. 54 (a2), the above-mentioned “setting value determination wait” state is entered, but the “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display” at this time also change. And remain “ON”, “b”, and “b”, respectively. If power is interrupted in this state (order 6), there is no change in “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display”. In addition, since the power interruption occurred before the “setting key” was turned off, the setting change work was not performed in a regular procedure. Therefore, the setting value data “b” at this time is It is not stored in the aforementioned power-off storage area (here, the aforementioned operation start value storage area). In the power interruption storage area, “a” is still stored as set value data.

  Subsequently, when the power is turned on (Sequence 7) and the status of “Setting changer operation” (Sequence 8) is reached, a power failure occurs before the “Setting key” is turned OFF, and the selected setting value. Since “b” is not stored in the storage area at the time of power interruption and is not backed up, “setting value” is “a” before the selection operation, and “setting display” is also based on the setting value data. “A”.

  That is, in the situation of “waiting for set value determination” (order 5) after “set value confirmation” shown in FIG. 54 (a2), if a power failure occurs while the “set key” is ON, “stack contents” is displayed. No return address is set, and “stack contents” remains empty. When the power is turned on after that, since the subsequent processing is executed with reference to the state of the setting key (in this case, it remains ON), the state after the power interruption recovery is “setting change device operation”.

  Here, for example, in the situation of “setting change device operation” in order 2, when the setting display LED 66 starts blinking of the setting value and the operation of “setting value confirmation” in order 4 is performed, the setting value blinks. It is also possible to end the display and switch to lighting display. In this case, when power is turned on in the order 7 and the setting change device is activated in the order 8, the power is restored with the setting display LED 66 blinking the setting value. Is possible.

  Further, in the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption shown in FIG. 54A, either when the set value is not confirmed (see FIG. 54A1) or when the set value is confirmed (see FIG. 54A2). Although the illustration is omitted, if the setting key is turned OFF when the setting change operation is properly completed, the setting value data is transferred from the temporary storage area (for example, a register) to the backup target. It is transferred to a predetermined area (here, the operation start value storage area) of the storage area.

  As described above, in the pattern 1 relating to power interruption, after the setting value is selected by the operation of the setting / reset button 69, the correspondence when power interruption is performed without the setting key being OFF is determined. In the pattern 1 related to power interruption, the data processing mode when power interruption occurs in a situation where the set value is not yet determined, and data processing when power interruption occurs in the situation where the setting value is confirmed. A mode is defined.

  In the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption, after the setting value is selected, the selected setting is set in both the case where the setting value is not confirmed and the case where the setting value is confirmed, unless the setting key is turned OFF. The value is not written to the storage area at the time of power interruption, and the selected setting value is not taken over and the power interruption is restored. And in the pattern 1 which concerns on a power failure, a power failure recovery is performed using the setting value data (operation start value) in the situation of "setting change device operation" before power failure occurs. Furthermore, according to the pattern 1 related to the power interruption, the set value data is not backed up if the power interruption occurs in an irregular procedure during the setting change.

  For these reasons, according to the pattern 1 relating to the power interruption, when the power interruption occurs during the setting change work, the setting change work can be performed again from the same set value data state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed when the setting change operation is performed in an irregular procedure other than the regular procedure related to the setting change as described above. Then, when the setting is changed by a procedure other than the normal procedure, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being generated by taking over the set value data at the time of the occurrence of the power interruption when the power interruption is restored.

  Here, as a setting change operation in a procedure other than the regular procedure, for example, a setting value having a high degree of advantage is selected, and an intentional step is performed before the regular procedure related to the setting change is finished. An example of a fraudulent act in which the power is turned on again can be exemplified. And even if there is such an illegal act, according to the above-mentioned pattern 1 relating to the power interruption, it is possible to prevent the setting change from being performed illegally by returning the power interruption without taking over the selected setting value. it can.

  In the pattern 1 related to power interruption, the setting value is selected by the setting / reset button 69 and the setting value is confirmed by the start lever 25. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to select a setting value by providing a dedicated setting button instead of using both. Further, for example, the set value may be determined using other existing buttons such as buttons provided in the sub input unit 27 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, a dedicated button for determining the set value may be provided in the setting unit 62 in the housing unit 12, for example.

  Further, in the pattern 1 related to the power interruption described above, the process at the time of power interruption recovery is performed using the data of “stack contents” (for example, when the set value is not confirmed as shown in FIG. 54 (a1)) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to perform processing at the time of power failure recovery without using the data of “stack contents”. A state setting mode using a predetermined flag can be considered as a processing mode for performing processing at the time of power failure recovery without using the data of “stack contents”.

Further, as a state setting mode using the above-described predetermined flag, for example, when the power is turned on with the setting key turned ON, the “setting change flag” is turned ON, and the setting key is switched OFF while the power is turned on. Thus, although the “setting change flag” described above is turned OFF, the setting change flag remains ON even if the setting key is turned OFF during power interruption. When such a state setting mode is adopted, the state after power failure recovery can be set with reference to the setting change flag, and if the setting change flag is ON, even if the setting key is OFF, Subsequent processing can be executed in the setting change state (a state in which the change of the set value made in advance is valid).
<< Second response when power interruption occurs (Pattern 2 related to power interruption when setting key is ON) >>

  Next, as another example of the correspondence pattern related to the occurrence of power interruption, a second correspondence (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 2 relating to power interruption” or “electricity at the time of setting key ON” when power interruption occurs during setting change is described. Will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). In addition, the same illustration is given about the part similar to the pattern 1 (refer FIG. 54 (a)) concerning the above-mentioned electric disconnection, and description of the overlapping part is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  In the pattern 2 related to the power interruption, when a power interruption occurs in a situation where the set value is not fixed while “setting value change is possible”, the power interruption recovery is performed in the same manner as the pattern 1 related to the power interruption described above. Sometimes the set value is returned to the state at the time of power failure. However, if a power failure occurs when the set value is confirmed while “setting value can be changed”, unlike the pattern 1 related to power interruption described above, the set value status is It becomes the state when disconnection occurs.

  That is, (b1) in FIG. 54 (b) shows a case where power interruption occurs when there is no setting value confirmation operation by operating the start lever, as in FIG. 54 (a1) of pattern 1 relating to power interruption. FIG. 54 (b2) shows a case where a power interruption occurs in the state where the setting value is confirmed by the start lever operation, as in FIG. 54 (a2) of the pattern 1 related to the power interruption. The correspondence is shown.

  If the set value in pattern 2 related to power interruption is not confirmed, as shown in FIG. 54 (b1), the set value selection operation is performed during “setting value change is possible” and the set value “b” Is selected and the set value data of the “set value” at this time is selected as in the case of the pattern 1 related to the power interruption. The later value is “b”. Further, “stack contents” is return destination data indicating the immediately preceding “setting value change possible” status (order 3). However, the set value data “b” at this time remains stored in the temporary storage area, and is not stored in the storage area at the time of power interruption. It remains the “a” of the hour.

  Further, when the power is turned on with the setting key turned ON (order 5), in the subsequent “setting change device operation” situation (order 6), the “setting value” is set in the storage area at power interruption. Based on the value data, it returns to the same “a” as before the occurrence of the power interruption, and “setting display” also becomes “a”. Also, in the situation of “setting change device operation” (order 7), “setting value” and “setting display” remain “a”.

  On the other hand, in the case where the set value of pattern 2 related to power interruption is confirmed (see FIG. 54 (b2)), “set value can be changed” shown in order 3 and then “set value confirmed” shown in order 4 is displayed. Done. At this time, there is no change in “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display”, which are “ON”, “b”, and “b”, respectively, as in “setting value change possible”. However, based on the fact that “setting value confirmation” has been performed, the setting value data “b” at this time is also stored in the storage area during power interruption, and the setting value data in the storage area during power interruption changes “B” selected after the start of.

  Furthermore, as shown in the order 5 in the figure, the above-mentioned “setting value determination waiting” state is reached, but the “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display” at this time are not changed, respectively. It remains “ON”, “b”, and “b”. When the power is cut off in this state (order 6), there is no change in the “setting key”, “setting value”, and “setting display”, but when the power is turned on thereafter (order 7), Unlike the pattern 1 related to disconnection (see FIG. 54A2), the “set value” and the “set display” are both “b”.

  In other words, in the pattern 2 related to the power interruption, when the set value is confirmed by operating the start lever or the like, the set value data held in the predetermined temporary storage area is the backup target when the power interruption occurs. It is written in a predetermined area of the storage area (storage area for power interruption for set value data). Then, the set value data is backed up when a power interruption occurs (order 6), and is restored when the power is turned on (order 7). In the state of “setting change device operation” (order 8), “setting value” and “setting display” become “b” based on the restored setting value data. It should be noted that the power interruption storage area for the set value data when the setting value confirmation operation is performed as described above can also be referred to as a “power interruption storage area for the fixed setting value data”. .

  According to the pattern 2 relating to the power interruption as described above, when the setting change operation is performed in an irregular procedure for generating a power interruption before the set value is determined, the pattern 1 ( Similarly to FIG. 54A, the power interruption recovery is performed without taking over the set value data. On the other hand, when the set value is confirmed, the set value data is taken over, and the power interruption recovery is performed based on the set value data in a state where the set value confirm operation has been performed.

  Therefore, when a power interruption occurs in a situation where the set value is not confirmed (see FIG. 54 (b1)), the same effect as the above-described pattern 1 can be obtained, and when power interruption is restored, By taking over the set value data at the time of occurrence of disconnection, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage. In addition, when a power failure occurs in a situation where the set value has been confirmed (see FIG. 54 (b2)), a power failure occurs even if the remaining work such as setting key OFF related to the setting change is not completed. Sometimes it is possible to finish the setting change, and for example, the setting change operation can be simplified as compared with the case where the set value is not fixed as shown in FIG. 54 (b1).

  In other words, when the set value is not confirmed (see FIG. 54 (b1)), the set value changed before the power interruption is not carried over after the power interruption. Thus, the setting change operation may be complicated. However, as in the case where the set value is confirmed as shown in FIG. 54 (b2), the setting value is taken over without completing the setting change work, so that the work until the set value is confirmed after the power is turned on can be omitted. It is possible to simplify the setting change operation.

  In the pattern 2 related to the power interruption, the setting value data is stored in the storage area at the time of the power interruption when the setting value confirmation operation is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether or not a setting value confirmation operation has been performed is represented by predetermined data (setting value confirmation data), and this setting value confirmation data is determined as a backup target each time a setting value confirmation operation is performed. It is possible to store in a predetermined area of the storage area at power interruption (storage area at power interruption for set value determination data).

Furthermore, an area (selection value storage area) for storing setting value data selected every time a setting value selection operation is performed can be provided as a power interruption storage area for setting value data. Then, at the time of power failure recovery, it is determined whether or not the set value fixed data is stored. If the set value fixed data is not stored, the set value stored in the operation start value storage area as described above is stored. It is possible to adopt a process of performing power failure recovery using data and performing power failure recovery using the set value data in the selection value storage area described above when set value fixed data is stored. It is. Further, the set value confirmation data described above may be a set value confirmation flag.
<< Third response when power interruption occurs (Pattern 3 related to power interruption when setting key is ON) >>

  Next, as another example of the correspondence pattern related to the occurrence of power interruption, a third correspondence (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 3 relating to power interruption” or “electricity when the setting key is turned on” when power interruption occurs during setting change is described. Will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (c). In addition, the same illustration is given about the part similar to the pattern 1 (refer FIG. 54 (a)) concerning the above-mentioned electric disconnection, and description of the overlapping part is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  (C1) in FIG. 54 (c) shows a response when a power interruption occurs in the absence of a setting value confirmation operation, and (c2) in FIG. 54 (c) shows a setting value confirmation. The correspondence when a power interruption occurs in the state where there was an operation is shown. In the pattern 3 related to the power interruption, as shown in FIG. 54 (c1), when a power interruption occurs in the state of “setting change possible” (order 4), when the power is turned on (order 5), “setting” “Value” and “Setting display” are “b”. In the subsequent “setting change device operation” and “setting value change possible”, “setting value” and “setting display” are maintained as “b”.

  That is, in the pattern 3 relating to the power interruption, unlike the above-described various patterns, the set value data is displayed every time the set value is selected even in a situation where the set value is not fixed by the start lever operation or the like. Are written from the temporary storage area to the above-described storage area during power interruption. Then, the set value data is stored when power interruption occurs (order 4), and is restored and referenced when the power is turned on (order 5).

  Further, in the “setting change device operation” status (order 6) and the “setting value change possible” status (order 7), “setting value” and “setting display” are based on the restored setting value data. “B”. Here, in the case where the set value is confirmed in the pattern 3 related to the power interruption (see FIG. 54 (c2)), the “set value is confirmed” in the pattern 2 related to the power interruption shown in FIG. 54 (b2). It is the same as the case of.

  According to the pattern 3 relating to power interruption as described above, the set value data is taken over both before and after the set value is confirmed, and the power interruption recovery is performed based on the set value data. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the set value is confirmed, the setting change can be completed when a power interruption occurs without completing the remaining work such as setting key OFF related to the setting change. And compared with the pattern 2 which concerns on an electric disconnection, a setting change work can be made still easier.

  Further, according to the pattern 3 relating to the power interruption, the setting value data is written in the power-off storage area to be backed up every time a setting value is selected. The process of storing the value data and transferring and writing the set value data to the RWM to be backed up when the set value is determined is unnecessary. For this reason, a temporary storage area for temporarily storing the set value data before it is stored in the storage area at the time of power interruption becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the memory capacity and the processing.

According to the pattern 3 relating to the power interruption, the setting value change operation is completed without performing the setting value determination operation, for example, without performing the setting value selection and setting value determination steps. To be able to. For this reason, even in a regular setting change work procedure, it is possible to further reduce the work burden on the person who performs the setting change work.
<< Fourth response when power interruption occurs (Pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power interruption) >>

  Next, as another correspondence form when power interruption occurs during setting change work, a correspondence pattern when the setting key is turned OFF during power interruption is based on FIGS. 55 (a) to (d2). explain. In the following, first, regarding a fourth response (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 4 related to power interruption” or “pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power interruption”) when power interruption occurs during setting change, This will be described with reference to FIG. The same parts as those in the corresponding patterns are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping parts is omitted as appropriate.

  In the pattern 4 related to the power interruption shown in FIG. 55A (pattern 1 related to the setting key OFF during power interruption), the order 1 to the order 4 correspond to the above-described power interruption shown in FIG. 54A1. This is the same as Pattern 1 (Pattern 1 related to power interruption when the set key is ON). First, the slot machine 10 is powered on (order 1), and the setting key at this time is ON as shown in the “setting key” column on the right side of the drawing. Further, the “set value” and “stack contents” at the time of power-on are “a” and “n”, similarly to the pattern 1 related to the power interruption described above (see FIG. 54 (a1)).

  After the above-described power-on situation (order 1), it becomes the situation of "setting change device operation" (order 2). The “setting key”, “setting value”, and “stack content” do not change compared to the “power-on” status (order 1), but the “setting display” is the display content of the setting display LED 66. "Is" a "based on the set value data.

  Subsequently, when the “setting value can be changed” state (order 3) is reached, the “setting key” remains ON, but if the set / reset button 69 is operated, FIG. ) As shown in the figure, the “set value” changes to “b” which is different from the previous “a”. The “setting display” is also “b” corresponding to the “setting value”, and the “stack contents” remains “n”.

  Then, when the operation for confirming the set value is not performed and the power is cut off in the “setting value change possible” state (order 4), the set value data of “set value” remains “b”. The “stack content” is data with the immediately preceding “setting value change possible” status (order 3) as the return destination. Further, when the setting key is turned OFF and the power is turned on with the setting key OFF as shown in order 5 in FIG. 55A, the “setting value” at this time is “b” after the selection operation. "Stack contents" returns to the data of the return destination address in the situation of order 3. In the subsequent “setting change device operation” state (order 6), the setting key remains OFF, and “setting value” and “setting display” are “setting change device operation” in order 3. Similarly, both are “b”.

  In other words, in the pattern 4 related to the power interruption, every time a setting value is selected, even when there is no setting value confirmation operation, the setting value data of “setting value” and the return destination of “stack contents” are returned. Data is written into the aforementioned power-off storage area. Then, the set value data and return destination data are stored when power interruption occurs (order 4), and when the power is turned on (order 5), a determination process is performed to determine whether the setting key is OFF. The set value data and the return destination data are restored on condition that the setting key is OFF.

  Even if the setting key is OFF when the power is turned on, for example, the return destination data of “stack contents” can be used when the power is turned on in order to recognize that the setting is being changed. In this case, if the return destination data at the time of power-on indicates processing during the setting change work, the state at the time of power interruption recovery can be set as the status during the setting change work. .

  In the pattern 4 related to the power interruption, the “setting value” and the “setting display” are also displayed in the “setting change device operation” status (order 6) and the “setting value change possible” status (order 7). "Becomes" b "based on the restored set value data. Here, even when the set value is confirmed, the set value data may be written in the above-described power-off storage area.

  According to pattern 4 relating to power interruption as described above (pattern 1 relating to setting key OFF during power interruption), power interruption occurs when “setting value can be changed”, and the setting key is not displayed when power is turned on thereafter. If it is OFF, the set value data and the “stack contents” are taken over, and the power interruption recovery is performed in the “setting value change possible” state. Then, if the setting change operation is performed by an irregular procedure in which the power is turned off without confirming the set value and the setting key is turned off during the power interruption, the setting key is turned off. In spite of this, the power failure is restored in the “setting value change possible” state.

  That is, when the setting change operation is performed according to a regular procedure, the setting key is in an ON state if the setting value is being changed. However, when an irregular procedure such as that described above is performed, when the regular operation is performed such that the “setting key” is OFF and “setting value can be changed”. Can generate situations that never happen.

  Accordingly, it is possible to notify hall personnel that the setting change work has been performed by an illegal procedure, based on the difference in situation from the regular work. And it becomes easy to detect fraud by providing such a function. Moreover, the deterrence against fraudulent acts can be demonstrated and it can prevent that a setting change is carried out illegally.

  Here, in other words, regarding the pattern 4 related to the power interruption described above (pattern 1 related to the setting key OFF during power interruption), the pattern is obtained when the setting change operation is not performed in a regular procedure. It can be said that it leaves a trace. In addition, as another aspect of the process for leaving such a trace, a process for detecting the combination of the state of the setting key and the status of the setting change, and further determining the suitability of the detection result is executed, and the setting key is turned off. And an error notification may be performed when a non-regular combination of situations, such as a situation where “setting value change is possible”, is detected.

  The confirmation that the setting key is OFF may be performed by detecting a rising edge (or falling edge) when the signal indicating the setting key state changes from ON to OFF. Alternatively, it may be performed by detecting whether the level of the signal indicating the state of the setting key is ON or OFF.

In the pattern 4 related to the power interruption, if the setting key is ON even when the power is turned on, the pattern 2 related to the power interruption described above (see FIG. 54 (b)) or the power interruption. It is possible to perform processing with a pattern similar to the pattern 3 (see FIG. 54C).
<< Fifth response when power interruption occurs (Pattern 2 related to setting key OFF during power interruption) >>

  Next, for a fifth response (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 5 relating to power interruption” or “pattern 2 relating to setting key OFF during power interruption”) when power interruption occurs during setting change, FIG. A description will be given based on b). The same parts as those of the pattern 4 related to the above-described power interruption shown in FIG. 55 (a) (pattern 1 related to the setting key OFF during power interruption) are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping parts is omitted as appropriate. To do.

  Pattern 5 relating to this power interruption assumes a case where the set value is determined while “setting value change is possible”. That is, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the order 1 to 3 is the same as the pattern 4 related to the power interruption described above (see FIG. 55 (a)). When a setting value is selected and a setting value confirmation operation is performed (order 4), “setting value”, “setting display”, and “stack contents” become “b”, “0”, and “n”, respectively. Here, “setting display” is “0” indicates that the setting value has been confirmed by the setting value confirmation operation for the description of the subsequent situation.

  In the state of “waiting for setting value determination” waiting for the setting key to be turned off (order 5), “setting value”, “setting display”, and “stack contents” are the same as before “b” and “0”. , “N”, however, when a power interruption occurs (order 6), “stack content” becomes the return destination data in the “setting value determination wait” situation (order 5).

  Further, when the setting key is turned OFF and the power is turned on with the setting key OFF as shown in order 7 in FIG. 55B, the “setting value” at this time is “ b ”and“ stack contents ”return to data indicating the return destination address in the situation of order 5. In the subsequent “waiting for setting value determination” state (order 8), the setting key remains OFF, and “setting value” and “setting display” are “setting change device operation” in order 5. Similarly, “b” and “0” are obtained.

  In pattern 5 relating to this power interruption (pattern 2 relating to setting key OFF during power interruption), a power interruption occurs in the “waiting for setting value determination” state (order 5) after the setting value is confirmed, and the power supply thereafter If the setting key is OFF at the time of turn-on (order 6), the setting value data and “stack contents” are taken over, and the power interruption recovery is performed in the “waiting for setting value determination” state. If the setting change operation is performed by an irregular procedure that turns off the setting key without turning off the setting key and turns off the setting key during power interruption, the setting key is turned off. In spite of this, the power interruption is restored in the “waiting for setting value determination” state.

  In other words, when the setting change work is performed in a regular procedure, the setting key is in the ON state if the status is “waiting for setting value determination”, but the work of the non-regular procedure as described above is performed. When it is performed, a situation different from the case where the regular work is performed can be generated in the same manner as the above-described pattern 4 related to power interruption (pattern 1 related to setting key OFF during power interruption). .

  Accordingly, it is possible to notify hall personnel that the setting change work has been performed by an illegal procedure, based on the difference in situation from the regular work. And by providing such a function, fraud detection becomes easy. Moreover, the deterrence against fraudulent acts can be demonstrated and it can prevent that a setting change is carried out illegally.

  Here, in other words, the pattern 5 relating to power interruption (pattern 2 relating to setting key OFF during power interruption) is referred to as the pattern 4 relating to power interruption described above (setting key during power interruption). As in the case of the pattern 1) relating to OFF, it can be said that a trace remains when the setting change operation is not performed by a regular procedure. Similarly to the pattern 4 related to the power interruption described above (pattern 1 related to the setting key OFF during power interruption), an irregular combination of the state of the setting key and the state of “waiting for setting value determination” is detected, An error notification may be performed based on the detection result.

Note that the pattern 5 relating to power interruption (pattern 2 relating to setting key OFF during power interruption) is applied to the slot machine 10 in combination with the pattern 4 relating to power interruption described above (see FIG. 55A). It is possible. In the pattern 5 related to power interruption, when the setting key is ON even when the power is turned on, the above-described pattern 2 related to power interruption (see FIG. 54B) or power interruption It is possible to perform processing with a pattern similar to pattern 3 (see FIG. 54C).
<< Sixth response when power interruption occurs (Pattern 3 related to setting key OFF during power interruption) >>

  Next, for a sixth response (hereinafter referred to as “pattern 6 relating to power interruption” or “pattern 3 relating to setting key OFF during power interruption”) when power interruption occurs during setting change, FIG. This will be described based on c). The same parts as those of the pattern 5 (see FIG. 55 (b)) relating to the above-described power interruption are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping parts is omitted as appropriate.

  The pattern 6 relating to the power interruption shown in FIG. 55C is set to “setting value can be changed”, similarly to the pattern 5 relating to the power interruption described above (pattern 2 relating to the setting key OFF during the power interruption). It is assumed that confirmation is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the order 1 to 6 is the same as FIG. 55 (b). Then, the state is changed to the “normal state” as shown in the order 8 by the power interruption recovery. In this “normal state”, the state of the setting key is OFF and the setting value data is “b”, but nothing is displayed as the “setting display”.

  In other words, in the pattern 6 related to the power interruption, when the setting key is ON at the time of the power interruption recovery, it is determined that the setting is being changed, and referring to “stack contents”, which state during the setting change is returned to? To decide. On the other hand, when the setting key is OFF at the time of power failure recovery, it is determined as a normal state, and the normal state is set regardless of the “stack contents”. The above-mentioned “normal state” represents a state in which the normal game can be performed after the setting change work is completed. In the “normal state”, “b”, which has been determined before the occurrence of power interruption, is used, and the state after power interruption is different depending on the state of the setting key.

  In the pattern 6 related to the power interruption, the setting value is selected when the setting change is possible in the order 3 and the interruption occurs before the setting value is confirmed in the order 4. When the power is turned on with the setting key turned ON (if the setting change operation has not been completed in the normal procedure), the “setting contents” in order 3 is used using the return data of “stack contents”. It returns to the state before the setting value selection “changeable” is performed.

  According to the pattern 6 relating to power interruption as described above (pattern 3 relating to setting key OFF during power interruption), a power interruption occurs in the state of “setting value confirmation”, and the setting key is not displayed when the power is turned on thereafter. If it is OFF, the set value data is inherited, but the “stack contents” are not inherited, and the power interruption recovery is performed in the “normal state”. And if the setting change work was performed by an irregular procedure of turning off the setting key during power interruption without turning off the setting key, the setting change work was not completed In spite of this, the power is restored in the “normal state”.

That is, the same state is obtained when the setting change work is completed by a regular procedure and when the work of the non-regular procedure as described above is performed. For this reason, even if the work is performed according to an irregular procedure, the process does not shift to a special situation as long as the set value is determined according to the regular procedure. And, for example, if a game shop clerk who is in the process of changing the setting accidentally mistakes the work procedure by mistake, the setting change work can be finished as it is, and the work procedure can be simplified. Is possible.
<< Seventh response when power interruption occurs (Pattern 4 related to setting key OFF during power interruption) >>

  Next, FIG. 55 (referred to as “pattern 7 relating to power interruption” or “pattern 4 relating to setting key OFF during power interruption” in the case of power interruption occurring during setting change) This will be described based on d1) and (d2). In addition, the same illustration is given about the part similar to the patterns 4-6 concerning the above-mentioned electric interruption shown to Fig.55 (a)-(c), and description of the overlapping part is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  In the pattern 7 related to the power interruption, as shown in FIG. 55 (d1), the “setting key” is in the ON state, the “power-on” situation (order 1), and the “setting changing device operation” situation. (Sequence 2), progresses to the “setting value can be changed” status (Sequence 3), and then “power off” (Sequence 4). Then, the setting key is turned OFF, and the power is turned on in the state where the setting key is OFF as shown in order 5 in FIG. 55 (d1).

  Further, while the “setting key” is in the OFF state, the process proceeds to the “setting value change possible” status (order 6) and the “setting value confirmed” status (order 7), but the “setting value change possible” In the situation (order 6), a new set value different from “b” is not selected. In the “waiting for setting value determination” status (order 8), the “setting key” state has been kept OFF from the previous status. Occurs (in order 9).

  Subsequently, the power is turned on again in the state where the “setting key” is OFF (order 10). The “setting value” at this time is “b”, and the return destination based on “stack contents” is “waiting for setting value determination”, which is the situation of order 8 (order 11).

  On the other hand, FIG. 55 (d2) shows a corresponding pattern in the case where an operation for confirming the set value is performed in a state where the setting key is ON, and then power is interrupted. In the example of FIG. 55 (d2), the steps up to “setting value change possible” in order 3 are the same as those in FIG. 55 (d1) described above. ”(Order 4 and order 5), and power interruption occurs during“ waiting for set value determination ”(order 6). Then, when the power is turned on thereafter (order 7), the normal state is entered regardless of the “stack contents” (order 8), as in the case of the pattern 6 related to the power interruption described above.

  That is, in the pattern 7 related to the power interruption, when a power interruption occurs after “setting value confirmation”, the state after the power interruption recovery differs depending on the state of the setting key. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (d1), when the setting key is in the “OFF” state, a power interruption occurs (see FIG. 55 (d1)). The power returns to the status of “Waiting for setting value determination”. However, in the same way, even when a power interruption occurs after “setting value confirmation”, as shown in FIG. 55 (d2), a power interruption occurs when the setting key is “ON” and the power is turned on. When the state of the setting key is OFF, the power is restored to the “normal state”.

  Thus, it is possible to change the power interruption return destination according to the combination of the situation before and after the power interruption (or power on) by executing the following processing. For example, first, data indicating whether or not the set value has been determined (the set value determination data described above), and data indicating the state of the setting key at the time of occurrence of power interruption (setting key state data at the time of power interruption). In the power-off storage area to be backed up, it is stored in a storage area for setting value confirmation data and a storage area for setting key status data, respectively.

  Then, when the power is turned on after the power interruption, the status of the setting key at that time is confirmed, and the setting value confirmation data and the setting key status data stored before the power interruption and the setting key at the time of power interruption recovery Refer to the data indicating the status (setting key status data at power-on).

  Furthermore, the current "setting key" data is compared with the restored "setting key" data, and if the setting key has been switched from OFF to ON at the time of power failure and when the power is turned on, Alternatively, if the setting key remains ON and does not change, it is determined that the setting key is ON. Further, when the setting key is switched from ON to OFF, or when the setting key remains unchanged, it is determined that the setting key is OFF.

  In the example shown in FIG. 55 (d1), in the case of power interruption in order 4 and power-on in order 5, the setting key is switched from ON to OFF, and the setting value is determined. Therefore, the “setting value” after turning on the power is “b” selected in “setting value change possible” in order 3, and the situation after power interruption is the same as in order 3 according to “stack contents” “Setting value can be changed” (order 6).

  In the example shown in FIG. 55 (d1), in the case of power interruption in order 9 and in the case of power-on in order 10, the set value is determined (order 7) unlike the above case. However, since the setting keys before and after power interruption (or power on) are all OFF, the situation after power interruption recovery is the same as in order 8 according to “stack contents”, as in the above case. “Waiting for setting value determination” (order 11).

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 55 (d2), the set value is confirmed (order 4) before power interruption of order 6, and the setting key is turned on before and after power interruption (or power-on). “Setting value” after power-on is “b” selected as “setting value can be changed” in order 3, and the status after power interruption is “stack contents”. Without using the “normal state” (order 8).

  In the pattern 7 related to power interruption, when the setting key remains unchanged while the setting key remains ON, the above-described pattern 2 related to power interruption (see FIG. 54B), or It is possible to perform processing with a pattern similar to the pattern 3 related to power interruption (see FIG. 54C).

  In the case of the pattern 7 related to power interruption as described above, in the case as shown in FIG. 55 (d1), in the same manner as the pattern 5 related to power interruption (see FIG. 55 (b)), the normal procedure is used. A trace can be left when the setting change operation is not performed. And it becomes easy to detect fraud by providing such a function. Moreover, the deterrence against fraudulent acts can be demonstrated and it can prevent that a setting change is carried out illegally.

  In the case of the pattern 7 related to power interruption, in the case as shown in FIG. 55 (d2), as in the case of the pattern 6 related to power interruption (see FIG. 55 (c)), it is set during power interruption. When the setting change work is performed by an irregular procedure of turning the key off, the power is restored in the “normal state” even though the setting change work has not been completed ( Order 8). The same state is obtained when the setting change work is performed according to the regular procedure and when the non-regular procedure as described above is performed.

  Therefore, for example, if a game store clerk who is performing a setting change work unintentionally mistakes the work procedure, the setting change work can be completed as it is, and the work procedure can be simplified. Can be achieved.

  In addition, it can be said that the pattern 7 related to such power interruption changes the state after the power interruption is restored depending on whether or not the setting key is switched ON / OFF before and after the power interruption (or power-on). . Further, it can be said that the state after the interruption of power failure is set by looking at the state after the setting key is switched.

Further, the pattern 7 relating to the power interruption can determine the state of the setting key based on the signal level as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the state of the setting key may be determined by detecting a signal edge as described above. That is, the state of the setting key can also be determined by detecting the rising (or falling) edge when the signal indicating the state of the setting key changes from ON to OFF. The detection of the edge of such a signal can be performed, for example, when the power is turned on (see order 5 and order 10 in FIG. 55 (d1) and order 7 in FIG. 55 (d2)).
<< First response when error occurs (Pattern 1 related to error) >>

  Next, an error notification pattern when an error occurs will be described as a countermeasure when an emergency other than power interruption occurs. The same parts as those of the above-described various patterns are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping parts is omitted as appropriate. In the following, first, a first response (hereinafter referred to as “error related pattern 1”) when a predetermined error occurs during setting change will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the pattern 1 relating to this error, when a predetermined operation that causes an error is performed after a setting value is selected during a setting change operation, the setting key state is turned OFF after the setting value is confirmed by a start lever operation or the like. In this case, error notification is executed.

  That is, conventionally, when an operation that causes an error occurs during a setting change, the setting value is set to a value outside the specified range (here, a value other than “1” to “6”). There was something that was prohibited. In addition, when the setting change operation is prohibited, there is a case where an error notification is not performed unless the power is interrupted. In these conventional correspondence patterns, it is not easy to smoothly change the settings and determine whether an error has occurred.

  On the other hand, in the pattern 1 relating to the error of this embodiment, when an error occurs during the setting change, the error notification is performed after the operation of the post-setting change device is stopped after waiting for the end of the setting change. And while the setting change device is operating, the setting change operation can be continued even if an error has occurred. The selection result of the set value is also reflected every time the selection operation is performed, and the display of the set value data and the set value is switched.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), when the power is turned on with the setting key turned on (order 1), the state of “setting change device operation” is obtained (the order is similar to the above-described various patterns). 2) “Setting value can be changed” (order 3). In this situation, for example, even if an error (CE error) occurs when it is determined that a game medal has accumulated in a portion where the above-described insertion sensor 1 (115) or insertion sensor 2 (116) is provided, “setting” “Value can be changed” continues (order 5), and after the set value is confirmed (order 6), the state is “waiting for set value determination”. Then, as shown in the figure, when the “setting key” is turned OFF, an “error state” is entered (order 8), and error notification is executed.

  Here, errors that occur during "setting change device operation" include selector passage sensor abnormal passage (C1 error), coin passage sensor retention error (CE error), and inserted game medal when a game medal backflow is detected. Error (C1 error, CH error, CE error) error when game medals to be paid out are jammed (HP error), error when payout sensor (not shown) is input abnormally (HQ Error), an error (FE error) when the game medal auxiliary storage 71 becomes full can be exemplified. In addition, there are a communication error that occurs when the main control board 61 and the sub control board 31 are disconnected, an error that occurs when an illegal payout of game medals is detected, a random number abnormality, and the like. In the pattern 1 related to this error, even if various errors occur such that an error notification is given if the normal game is possible in the normal state, an error notification is performed even if various errors occur. Not.

According to the pattern 1 relating to the error as described above, when an error occurs during the setting change operation, the error notification is performed without interfering with the setting change operation by notifying the error after the setting change device is stopped. It becomes possible. Thus, the setting change operation can be smoothly executed. For example, the priority of error notification may be determined in advance based on the importance of the error, and the error notification during the setting change may be performed only when an error of a predetermined priority or higher is detected. .
<< Second response when error occurs (pattern 2 related to error) >>

  Subsequently, as another example of the correspondence pattern related to the error occurrence, FIG. 56 (b) shows the second correspondence (hereinafter referred to as “error related pattern 2”) when a predetermined error occurs during the setting change. ). The same parts as those of the pattern 1 related to the error are illustrated in the same manner, and the description of the overlapping parts is omitted as appropriate. In the pattern 2 relating to this error, when a predetermined operation that causes an error is performed after a setting value is selected during a setting change operation, the setting key state is turned OFF after the setting value is confirmed by a start lever operation or the like. Even if it becomes, it will transfer to a normal state, without performing error alerting | reporting.

  That is, in the pattern 2 related to the error, if an error occurs during the setting change, the error notification is not performed even after the operation of the setting change device is stopped, and the normal game is possible after the operation of the setting change device is stopped. “Normal state”.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), for example, in the situation of “setting value change possible” (order 3), even if a CE error related to the retention of game medals occurs, As in pattern 1 (see FIG. 56A), “setting value change is possible” continues (order 5), and after setting value confirmation (order 6), a “setting value determination waiting” state is reached. As shown in the figure, when the “setting key” is turned OFF, the “normal state” is set (order 8), and the error notification is not executed.

  According to the pattern 2 relating to the error as described above, when an error that causes an error notification to be handled as an error in a normal state in which a normal game is possible during a setting change operation occurs, By not performing error notification even after the operation of the setting change device is stopped, error notification in an unnecessary scene can be suppressed, and the efficiency of setting change work can be improved. As a result, the setting change work can be smoothly executed without hindering the setting change work.

In addition, this invention is not limited to each Example as mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation is possible. For example, various data processing modes related to power interruptions and errors during setting changes, and various storage area configurations can be used as long as the same processing can be performed. is there. Further, the setting key switch 68 shown in FIG. 4 may be provided separately from the setting unit 62.
<Various measures in other complex situations>

Next, various measures that can be taken in the event of a malfunction such as a power failure or rotation failure during the effect display or the rotation control in the slot machine 10 will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the thing similar to what was demonstrated so far, and the detailed description about it is abbreviate | omitted.
<(1) Countermeasures for failures in special status display (Countermeasure pattern 1)>

  In the following, countermeasures in the case where the effect display and various problems are combined will be described. Here, a special state display is assumed as the effect display. Furthermore, as the “special status display” that assumes countermeasures against malfunctions, for example, a moving image displayed on image display means such as the rendering unit 18 (FIG. 1) when a special status different from the normal status is considered. be able to. Here, the reason that “the effect unit 18 or the like” is used is that it is possible to provide a display device for effect display in addition to the effect unit 18.

  Furthermore, special states include the above-mentioned bonuses (main bonus) such as BB and RB, RT (replay time), AT (assist time), and ART (assist replay) in which replay and bell are established with higher probability than usual. The state of time) can be illustrated. Among these special states, bonuses such as BB and RB and RT are managed by the main control board 61. Other ATs and ARTs that are special states may be managed by the sub control board 31 or may be managed by the main control board 61.

  Moreover, as a special state, an advantageous section (advantageous gaming state) or the like in which a gaming state advantageous to the player can be performed can be exemplified. As this advantageous section, a gaming state in which a game such as AT or ART can be performed by managing the main control board 61 can be exemplified. In this advantageous section, games such as AT may or may not be performed. For example, when a predetermined lottery is won or when control for displaying a predetermined symbol combination is performed, AT Control for such a game can be performed. Further, the advantageous section can be ended in a predetermined period (such as a period of 1500 games). Moreover, there may be a plurality of types of periods of this advantageous section.

  Furthermore, as a special state, a so-called extra special zone gaming state can be exemplified. This additional specialization zone is a period of a gaming state in which it is easy to increase the number of games for the previously determined games such as AT and ART (the probability of adding is increased). And the period of this additional specialization zone may be one type or plural types.

  As a special state display related to such a special state, a series of displays can be divided into a plurality of sections arranged in time series. And, as a display category of the special state display, a special state start display (special state start display), a special state display (special state display), and a special state end display (special state end display) are displayed. It can be illustrated. Examples of these displays include those that use a plurality of display data in time series to form a series of display contents. Further, among these, the special state start display can be exemplified such that video display and effect sound output are performed as introduction effects of, for example, about several seconds to several tens of seconds. Video display can include video display, still image display, or a combination thereof. For example, a display mode in which a predetermined still image or another predetermined moving image is displayed after a predetermined moving image is displayed and the display is shifted to a special state display described later can be adopted as the special state start display. is there.

  In addition, as an effect at the time of the special state start display, for example, a freeze (start freeze) effect that can be performed in various manners as described above using the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R under the management of the main control board 61, for example. And what performs together with the video display by the management of the sub control board 31, and the output of effect sound can be illustrated.

  Here, the relationship between the freeze effect that is the effect produced by the management of the main control board 61 and the effect such as the video display (display effect related to the freeze effect) that is managed by the sub-control board 31 can be variously determined. It is. For example, the freeze effect and the image display effect are started at the same timing, the image display effect is started before the freeze effect, or the image display effect is started after the freeze effect. It is possible to

  More specifically, when the freeze effect is started by the management of the main control board 61, the sub control board 31 can start the effect related to the freeze effect based on a command from the main control board 61. . In addition, before the start of the freeze effect, it is possible to send a command related to the freeze effect from the main control board 61 to the sub control board 31 to start the effect by the management of the sub control board 31, and then start the freeze effect. is there. Furthermore, after the start of the freeze effect, it is also possible to start the effect by managing the sub control board 31 by transmitting a command related to the freeze effect from the main control board 61 to the sub control board 31.

  Further, as the above-described special state display, for example, the sub-control based on the command from the main control board 61 indicates the progress status such as the number of games (elapsed game number) and the number of game medals that are sequentially increased in the special state. The thing displayed with a production | presentation by management of the board | substrate 31 can be illustrated. The special state display may be, for example, “normal display in special state” or “normal screen in special state”.

  In addition, as the above-described special state end display, for example, the appearance of a character (such as a hero character or a teammate character) who wins or defeats an enemy character in a battle effect by the management of the sub control board 31 Etc. can be illustrated as being executed following the production in the special state. Furthermore, as this special state end display, some or all of the game results such as the number of games executed during the special state, the number of acquired game medals, and the number of continued sets, A so-called ending effect displayed based on a command from the main control board 61 can be exemplified. The above-mentioned “number of continuous sets” represents the degree of stacking of the special state by the number of sets in which a plurality of games (40 games, 70 games, 100 games, etc.) are set as one set.

  In the ending effect, the display of the game results in the special state such as the number of games, the number of acquired games, the number of continuous sets, etc., for example, can additionally display the number of games, the number of acquired games, the number of continuous sets one by one in order. It is possible to change and display them one by one. Furthermore, the ending effect can be performed in such a manner that all of a plurality of types of game results such as the number of games, the number of acquired games, and the number of continuous sets are displayed (collective result display).

  Further, at the time of the ending effect, the above-described freeze effect managed by the main control board 61 can also be executed as the end freeze effect. Moreover, after the hero character, the ally character, etc. execute the effect of the story that is defeated by the enemy character, the effect mode of executing the ending effect as described above can be exemplified.

  Further, when the special state continues, for example, when shifting from ART to bonus, the special state end display related to the previous special state is displayed by the management of the sub control board 31 based on the command from the main control board 61. Subsequently, a special state start display related to a later special state may be executed.

On the other hand, as a problem that occurs in the special state display situation, a power interruption (power interruption) determined by the main control board 61 can be cited. In the following, a control operation (basic operation) in the case where no malfunction occurs will be described, and thereafter, differences from the basic operation will be described in two cases where the power-off occurrence timings are different.
<< Basic operation related to special status display (Basic operation related to measure pattern 1) >>

  In FIG. 58 (a), various operation states in the basic operation in which no malfunction occurs are shown in time series in order from top to bottom, with reference numerals G1 to G10. In this basic operation, first, a spinning cylinder stop operation (G1) detected under the control of the main control board 61 during a normal game is set as a starting point, and then, under the control of the sub control board 31, a special state is set. After the start display start state (G2), the process proceeds to the start display progress wait state (G3).

  Among these, the turning cylinder stop operation (G1) shown in the uppermost stage is for the rotating cylinder (third stopping cylinder) that stops at the end of the first to third cylinders 51L to 51R described above. The operation of the stop button (any one of the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R) is performed. When the button operation (third stop) for stopping the third stop cylinder is detected under the management of the main control board 61 (G1), the above-described special state is started by the management of the sub-control board 31. The process proceeds to the display start state (G2).

  As described above, the special state display can be considered in stages such as a special state start display, a special state display, and a special state end display. For these special state start display, special state display, and special state end display, an execution time (not limited to one) is determined in advance. These times can be referred to as “start display time”, “special state display time”, “end display time”, and the like.

  Furthermore, waiting for the elapse of these “start display time”, “display time during special state”, and “end display time”, respectively, “wait for start display progress”, “wait for display progress during special state”, and It can be referred to as “waiting for end display progress”. Furthermore, these waiting times can be referred to as “start display elapsed wait time”, “special state display elapsed wait time”, “end display elapsed wait time”, and the like, respectively.

  In the example of FIG. 58 (a), when the special state start display is started (G2), the start display progress wait state is entered, and the start display progress wait time is measured (G3). During the start display waiting time, for example, various effects can be considered as effects performed in the effect section 18 or the like. For example, when the above-mentioned freeze effect is managed by the management of the main control board 61. Based on a command from the main control board 61 to the sub control board 31, it is possible to execute an effect display related to the freeze effect.

  When the above-described start display elapsed waiting time ends (G4), the special state start display ends (G5), and the state shifts to the special state display state (G6). After the start of special state display (G6), when a predetermined special state end condition (described later) is achieved (G7), the state shifts to a special state end display state (G8). Here, the G7 special state termination condition is that the number of game medals paid out during the special state has reached a predetermined number, the number of games in the special state has reached a predetermined number, or a predetermined symbol It can be adopted that the combination is displayed. Any one of them can be used as a special state end condition, or a plurality of combinations can be used as a special state end condition.

Furthermore, when the special state end display is continued and the end display elapsed waiting time ends (G9), the special state end display is ended, and the game state is shifted to the subsequent game state depending on the situation (G10). In the example of FIG. 58A, when the end display elapsed waiting time ends (G9) and the special state end display ends, a normal state (also referred to as a normal state) different from the special state is started in G10. ing.
<< Power interruption pattern 1 during special status display (measure pattern 1-1) >>

  Next, the first combination of the special state display as described above and the power interruption as a malfunction (the power interruption pattern 1 during the special state display) will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the condition similar to the basic operation | movement shown to Fig.58 (a), and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the example of FIG. 58 (b), when the power interruption (G17) occurs in the situation from when the start display elapsed waiting time (G3) is reached until the start display elapsed waiting time ends (G4). Is assumed. For example, as described above, when the freeze effect is executed during the start display elapsed waiting time, the power is cut off during the freeze effect.

  In such a case, if the power-off occurs (G16) after the start display elapsed waiting time (G3) starts, and then there is a power-off recovery (G17, hereinafter referred to as “power-return”), the main. Without receiving a command related to the special state start display from the control board 61, the display unit 18 or the like starts a predetermined start-time end wait display under the management of the sub control board 31 (G18). That is, in the sub-control board 31, the sub-main CPU 86 performs a start-end waiting display (G18) as an effect display after the power supply is restored in a state where the command from the main control board 61 is not received.

  Here, the display data (first display data) related to the special state start display at the time of the occurrence of power interruption is configured by sequentially executing, for example, a plurality of display data of display data A, display data B, and display data C, The display data (second display data) related to the start completion waiting display (G18) after the power is restored can be composed of a plurality of display data D and display data E. Furthermore, the second display data can be set to a special state display which is a general screen in a special state that is shifted to after the freeze ends. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the player is in a special state when the power is interrupted and the power is restored during the freeze, thus giving the player a sense of security even if there is an accident of power failure. Can do.

  It is also possible to configure the last few seconds of the special state start display by looping display of predetermined display data. For example, the display data A is defined as 0 to 10 seconds, the display data B is defined as 10 to 18 seconds, and the display data C is defined as 18 to 20 seconds. Then, it can be considered that the display by the display data C is looped. At this time, as described above, the display data B is configured to sequentially display a plurality of types of game results such as the number of games, the number of acquired games, the number of continuous sets, and the display data C displays all of the plurality of types of game results (batch results). Display data in a mode of display). In such an embodiment, the display data A and the display data B can be the first display data, and the display data C can be the second display data.

  Further, the configuration of the first display data and the second display data can be changed depending on circumstances such as the occurrence timing of power interruption. For example, when the power interruption occurs while the display data B is being executed after the display data A, the display data up to the display data B becomes the first display data, which is used for the display of waiting for the end of the start after the power is restored. Display data D and display data E to be displayed constitute second display data. Further, when the power is cut off while the display data A is being executed, the display data A up to the display data A becomes the first display data, and the display data D and the display data E are the second display data as in the case described above. It becomes what constitutes.

  Further, the configuration of the first display data may be such that the special state start display is ended by execution up to the display data C when the power supply is not cut off. Furthermore, in the configuration of the first display data, when the power is not cut off, other display data (for example, display data F, display data G, etc.) is executed after the display data C, and the special state start display is ended. It may be like this.

  The second display data may be composed of three or more display data. The second display data is not limited to a plurality of display data. For example, the second display data includes only the display data E (or only the display data D). There may be. Further, the second display data can be considered as a single display data by integrating the display data D and the display data E.

  In addition, when the special effect start display is a case where a freeze effect by the management of the main control board 61 has been executed, a command relating to the freeze effect information, for example, indicating the remaining time of the freeze effect when the power is restored. There is no transmission / reception. For this reason, on the sub control board 31, there is no information related to the freeze effect, and the effect by the start completion waiting display (G18) using the second display data (here, the display data D and the display data E) is displayed as the freeze effect. Run in parallel.

  The start completion display (G18) here is, for example, a display for a special state, a display of a game that is not in a special state (normal state), or a standby state that is not a game. Of the predetermined standby displays, any one of predetermined displays can be employed. When the display for the special state is displayed as the start completion waiting display (G18) using the second display data, it indicates to the player that the special state will resume after the power is restored. Can do. In addition, as a display for waiting for completion at the start (G18), if a display of a game that is not in a special state (normal state) or the above-described standby display is performed, It can be shown to the player that the display control has been started again.

  As described above, the display content of the above-mentioned start completion waiting display (G18) is based on the second display data, and the second display data is a plurality of display data (here, display data D and display data E). Can be configured in time series.

  More specifically, as the display of the display data D, for example, a video display of a battle (combat) scene is performed, and the display of the final phase of the battle is repeatedly displayed (loop display) as the display of the display data E. It is done. In this case, the display shifts from the battle (combat) scene to the scene of the final phase of the battle, and the player is expected to enter the special state, and thereafter, the special state display related to the special state is executed.

  In addition, the display content may be exemplified such that a still image is used as the display data E, a display of a still image after the moving image (display after the start), and a transition to a special state display is made.

  Further, as the start completion display (G18), it is also possible to execute the remaining effects that were interrupted due to the power interruption. In this case, it may be possible to manage the progress of the performance using a timer or the like, save the progress information when the power is turned off, and resume the performance based on the stored information when the power is restored. .

  Further, examples of the “standby display” described above include a demonstration display (display of demonstration) for displaying effects and game contents during standby, a brand display for displaying a company name, model name, and the like. As display data for the demonstration display and brand display, it is possible to use the display data displayed when the slot machine 10 is turned on. Furthermore, during standby display, it is also possible to display a selection menu for languages (Japanese, Korean, Chinese, English, etc.) used for displaying the game description characters. Such standby display can also be constituted by a plurality of display data (for example, display data D, display data E).

  Here, in the example of FIG. 58B, the special state start display is not completed due to the power interruption that occurs during the special state start display. For this reason, after the end of the above-described start display elapsed waiting time (G4), the special state start display end (G5) state in the basic operation of FIG. (G6). Then, similarly to the basic operation of FIG. 58A, the process proceeds to the situation after the start of special state display (G6).

  When the power is restored (G17), the sub-control board 31 has not only information on the remaining time of the freeze effect but also a control mode in which information indicating the progress of the effect (status information of the effect) is not saved. Conceivable. When such a control mode is employed, for example, when the start display elapsed waiting time ends (G4), or when the special state display starts (G5), the main control board 61 to the sub control board. A command indicating that the freeze effect at the start of the special state is being performed (a command during the start freeze) is transmitted to 31. The sub control board 31 executes an effect related to the freeze effect based on the command during the start freeze, or selects and executes any effect from a plurality of effects. Conceivable.

  In addition, after the power supply is restored after the power is turned off in the state where the freeze effect and the special state start display are being performed, the special end state display such as ART (for example, “ART normal display”) is displayed from the start completion display (G18). ”Or“ ART normal screen ”), the following control mode can be considered.

  First, as the first control mode (first control mode at the start) here, the sub control board 31 executes a command from the main control board 61 while executing a start completion waiting display (G18) after the power is restored. wait. The start end display (G18) at this time is displayed at any timing (may be from the beginning) using display data of contents related to the freeze effect. Further, the main control board 61 transmits a command (the freeze effect end command at the start of the special state) to notify the end of the freeze effect to the sub control board 31 at the end of the freeze effect. Then, the sub control board 31 recognizes that the freeze effect has ended based on the received freeze effect end command, ends the start-time end wait display (G18), and starts displaying the above-described ART normal screen. .

  Subsequently, as a second control mode (second control mode at the start), a timer is counted (timed) on the main control board 61 during the freeze effect at the start of the special state, and the count value (freeze effect progress) Time value) is notified to the sub-control board 31. In the sub control board 31, when the count value reaches a predetermined value (when the freeze effect end time arrives), the display content of the effect unit 18 and the like is shifted from the special state start display related to the freeze effect to the ART normal screen.

  At the time of power-off recovery from the power-off during the special state start display, the main control board 61 transmits the count value continued from the count value at the time of the power-off occurrence to the sub-control board 31. In the sub-control board 31, when the count value reaches a predetermined value, the display content of the effect section 18 or the like is shifted from the special state start display related to the freeze effect to the ART normal screen as in the case where the power is not cut off.

  Subsequently, as a third control mode (a third control mode at the start), the main control board 61 transmits a state command (status command) indicating the state of the effect to the sub-control board 31. For example, as the state command, a state command indicating that the gaming state is in a freezing effect, a command indicating that it is in a special state, a command indicating that it is in a normal state, and the like are provided. When the sub control board 31 receives a state command indicating that the freeze effect is in progress, the sub control board 31 starts an effect related to the freeze effect, and receives a state command indicating that the state is in the special state. If it is received, the ART normal screen is displayed, and if a bonus state command is received, an effect during a special game such as a bonus normal screen is started. In addition, during the freeze production, the main control board 61, for example, at predetermined intervals, at a predetermined timing during the freeze production (rotating the rotating drum to align the seven symbols on a straight line, or rotating the rotating drum in reverse direction). Status command (standby command) indicating that it is the timing of

  Further, at the time of power-off recovery from power-off during the special state start display, the sub-control board 31 starts a start-time end wait display (G18) based on the above-described standby command. In this case, the standby command has information indicating the progress status (freezing stage) of the freeze effect, and when the power is restored, the display data is selected based on the received standby command and continued from the special state start display before the power is turned off. It is conceivable to perform a characteristic display. As described above, the second display data can be an ART normal screen.

  As described above, when there is a power interruption during the special state start display, by performing a start completion waiting display (G18) when the power is restored, even if a power interruption occurs during the special state start display, It is possible to prevent an unexpected operation after the power is restored, and it is possible to reliably end the special state start display standby state. Then, by executing the start completion waiting display (G18) using the second display data, the display is not interrupted even if the main control board 61 does not transmit a command designating the effect at the time of power return. It is possible to smoothly wait for the start elapsed time to end (G4).

  Further, by displaying the start completion waiting display (G18), if a power interruption occurs in a situation where a freeze effect is being managed by the management of the main control board 61, the rotating cylinder is used when the power is restored. It is possible to prevent a situation in which only the freezing effect is performed, and no effect display is performed on the effecting unit 18 or the like.

  For example, considering a case where a BB managed by the main control board 61 wins a special state and a special state start display and a freeze effect are executed together, the effect from the main control board 61 when the power is restored. No command is sent to specify the display. For this reason, the situation where nothing is displayed on the production | presentation part 18 grade | etc., May arise. Further, as the start completion display (G18), it is also conceivable that the game is not in a special state (normal state) or the above-described standby display is performed. In such a case, the control is resumed for the player, but it may be considered that the player may be worried that the winning may have been canceled due to power-off.

  However, if the start completion display (G18) is displayed when the power is restored, and if the display for the above-mentioned special state is displayed as the start completion display, the player will receive a special message after the power is restored. It can be shown that the game in the state is guaranteed. Then, it is possible to execute control that can give the player a sense of security without causing the player to be uneasy by turning off the power.

  In addition, as a start completion waiting display (G18) using the second display data, even if the game is not in a special state (normal state) or the above-mentioned standby display is performed, It can be shown that the game can continue thereafter. For this reason, compared with the case where nothing is displayed on the production unit 18 or the like after the power is restored, the player can be provided with a sense of security and a guideline regarding the subsequent operation state.

In addition, by performing the start completion waiting display (G18) by the standby display, it is possible to secure a preparation time for displaying a moving image on the rendering unit 18 or the like. For example, in the case of displaying a real-time 3D moving image in which 3DCG (three-dimensional computer graphics) drawing is performed in real time, a corresponding time is required until image display is started. However, by performing the standby display as described above as the start end waiting expression (G18), the preparation time is secured by using the video with a small amount of data and processing load, and it is possible to deal with a highly realistic CG video. It becomes easy.
<< Power interruption pattern 2 during special status display (measure pattern 1-2) >>

  Next, pattern 2 (countermeasure pattern 1-2) related to the combination of the special state display and the power interruption as a malfunction will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the condition similar to the basic operation | movement shown to Fig.58 (a), and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the example of FIG. 58 (c), it is assumed that the power is cut off in the situation from the special state end display state (G8) to the end display elapsed waiting time is over (G9). .

  In such a case, when the power-off occurs (G16) after the start of the special state end display (G8) using the first display data for the end time, and there is a power return (G17) after that, the production unit At 18, etc., a predetermined end-time end wait display using the second end-time display data is started (G21).

  The first display data for the end time described above is configured by a plurality of display data (for example, display data K, display data L, display data M, etc.) in the same manner as the first display data for the start time. Can do. Furthermore, the power interruption can occur even when any one of the display data K, the display data L, and the display data M is being executed. Note that the first display data for termination may be constituted by two or four or more pieces of display data, or may be constituted by a single piece of display data.

  In addition, as the above-described end completion display (G21), for example, any one of predetermined display among the above-described normal state display and the above-described standby display can be employed. Further, as display data for end-to-end display using the second display data for end-time, a plurality of display data (for example, display data N) is displayed in the same manner as the display for end-to-end display (G21 in FIG. 58B). , Display data O, etc.). Note that the second display data for the end time may be composed of three or more or a single display data.

  Here, in the example of FIG. 58C, the special state end display is not completed due to the power interruption that occurs during the special state end display. Then, while executing the above-described end completion waiting display (G21) using the second display data, waiting for the end display elapsed waiting time of G9 to end, and when this end display elapsed waiting time ends (G9), The special state end display is ended, and the game state (the normal state here) is shifted to the subsequent game state (G10) depending on the situation (G10).

  As described above, when there is a power interruption during the special state end display using the first display data, the special end state display (G21) is performed when the power is restored using the second display data. Even if the power is cut off during the end display, an unexpected operation can be prevented after the power is restored, and the end display progress waiting state (G9) can be reliably ended. Then, by executing the above-mentioned end completion display at G21, it is possible to smoothly wait for the end display elapsed waiting time to end (G9) without interrupting the display.

  In addition, a freeze effect may be performed by managing the main control board 61 together with the special state end display. In such a case, as the freeze effect after the power is restored, the effect continued from the effect at the time of the power interruption is executed. Further, as the end completion display (G21) by the management of the sub control board 31, an effect such as displaying the game result relating to the special state such as the number of acquired game medals, the number of games, and the number of continuous sets as described above. An aspect can be illustrated.

  In addition, as a display of game results, not all of the number of game medals acquired, the number of games, and the number of continuation sets are displayed, but a batch result display (final display) that makes all of these appear at once. An effect mode such as performing can be exemplified. Then, the display data of such a collective result display is set as the above-mentioned display data O. For example, after displaying the display data N such as the defeat scene of the hero character or the ally character, the collective result display is executed based on the display data O. It is also possible to do.

  Furthermore, when a power interruption occurs in a situation where a freeze effect is being executed in conjunction with a special status end display, a command is not transmitted from the main control board 61 when the power is restored, thereby managing the main control board 61. It is also possible to assume a situation in which only the freeze effect is performed and no effect display by the management of the sub-control board 31 is performed. However, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring even if there is no command transmission from the main control board 61 by performing the end-of-end display (G21) after the power is restored.

  Furthermore, when the game is not in the above-mentioned special state (normal state) or when the above-mentioned standby display is performed as the end-of-end display (G21), the special state at that time ends for the player. Can show that For this reason, compared with the case where nothing is displayed on the production unit 18 or the like after the power is restored, the player can be provided with a sense of security and a guideline regarding the subsequent operation state.

  Further, when a special effect end display is performed by the management of the main control board 61 and a special state end display by the management of the sub control board 31 at the end of the special state, the special state end display is shifted to the subsequent gaming state. Various control modes related to command transmission / reception can be considered. As a gaming state after the special state end display, a normal state (G10) that is not a special state can be considered.

  First, as the first control mode at the end of the special state (first control mode at the end), as in the first control mode at the start described above, the main control board 61 sends a command (special) to notify the end of the freeze effect. The freeze effect end command) at the end of the state is transmitted to the sub-control board 31. More specifically, the sub-control board 31 waits for a command from the main control board 61 while executing an end-of-end display (G21) after the power is restored after the power is cut off during the special state end display. At this time, the end-to-end display (G21) is displayed at any timing (may be from the beginning) and uses display data of the content related to the freeze effect (for example, the main character or ally character battles) Etc.). Furthermore, the above-mentioned ending effect (including the case of the collective display result) can be performed in the final stage (may be from the beginning) of the end-waiting end display (G21).

  The main control board 61 transmits a freeze effect end command to the sub control board 31 at the end of the special state described above at the end of the freeze effect. Then, the sub control board 31 recognizes that the freeze effect has ended based on the received freeze effect end command, ends the end-of-end display (G21), and displays the above-described normal state (G10). Start displaying data (screen during normal state).

  Subsequently, as the second control mode (second control mode at the end), the timer count (on the main control board 61) during the freeze effect at the end of the special state, as in the second control mode at the start described above. Time), and the sub-control board 31 is notified of the count value (the value of the freeze effect elapsed time). In the sub-control board 31, when the count value reaches a predetermined value (when the freeze effect end time arrives), the display content of the effect unit 18 or the like is shifted from the special state end display related to the freeze effect to the normal state screen.

  Then, at the time of power-off recovery from the power-off during the special state end display, the main control board 61 transmits the count value continued from the count value at the time of the power-off occurrence to the sub-control board 31. In the sub-control board 31, when the count value reaches a predetermined value, the display content of the effect part 18 and the like is shifted from the special state end display related to the freeze effect to the normal state screen.

  Subsequently, as a third control mode (third control mode at the end), as in the above-described third control mode at the start, the main control board 61 gives a state command ( Status command). With regard to the freeze effect, the main control board 61 transmits a state command indicating that the freeze effect is being performed to the sub-control board 31 at the timing when the freeze effect is started. Further, the main control board 61, for example, at predetermined intervals, at a predetermined timing during the freeze effect (rotating the rotating drum so that the seven symbols are not aligned on a straight line, or stopping the rotating rotating drum. The standby command indicating that the timing is to be transmitted) is transmitted. When the sub-control board 31 receives a state command indicating that the above-described freeze effect is in progress, the sub-control board 31 executes a special state end display related to the freeze effect, and the special state ends and indicates a normal state When the command is received, the display state is changed to the display state related to the normal state (G10), and the display of the normal state screen is started.

Further, at the time of power-off recovery from the power-off during the special state end display, the sub-control board 31 starts the end-end end display (G18) based on the above-described standby command. In this case, the standby command has information indicating the progress status (freezing stage) of the freeze effect, and when the power is turned off, the display data is selected based on the received standby command and continued from the special state end display before the power is turned off. It is conceivable to perform a characteristic display. Also, a normal screen can be set as the second display data. As a result, the normal screen can be displayed instead of the ART screen when the power is cut off during the end freeze and the power is restored. Therefore, the power restoration process can be performed without giving excessive expectation to the player.
<(2) Countermeasures for malfunctions in rotating cylinder acceleration (Countermeasure pattern 2)>
<< Overview of Cylinder Speed Control >>

  Next, the relationship between the rotation acceleration and the malfunction will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. First, the “rotation acceleration” referred to here is a period (acceleration period) in an acceleration state in an acceleration situation when the situation of the rotation speed of the revolution changes as schematically shown in FIG. Means the control state. More specifically, as shown at the left end in FIG. 60 (a), the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R start rotating through a start lever operation (lever ON) and a role drawing, and gradually increase the rotation speed. The speed reaches a constant speed, and after the acceleration period, the "constant speed" in the spinning cylinder control is reached.

  After that, when the corresponding stop button (in this embodiment, any of the first stop button 24C to the third stop button 24L) is operated and there is a stop input (stop input), the rotation of the rotating cylinder is braked, A winning determination is made as the cylinder stops rotating. Here, the rotational speed mode shown in FIG. 60 (a) shows a basic operation. For example, immediately after the lever is turned on or immediately after a stop is input, the rotating cylinders 51L to 51R perform operations that are not shown. (Freeze production operation) may be performed.

As described above, a four-phase rotating stepping motor (not shown) is used for the rotating device 54 (see FIG. 4). If it demonstrates in more detail about control of the rotating cylinder rotation apparatus 54, the control which concerns on each rotating cylinder 51C-51L is mainly performed by the process (S546 in FIG. 18) of the above-mentioned rotating cylinder drive management. One step of the rotating stepping motor is set to about 1.071 °, and each rotating drum rotates once in 336 steps. In addition, the number of symbols for a single cylinder is 21, and the number of steps for one symbol is 16. In addition, when the number of symbols for a single cylinder is 20, for example, a symbol with 16 steps and a symbol with 17 steps are provided.
<< Rotating drum starts >>

When the rotation of the rotating drums 51L to 51R is started, predetermined data is set in each RWM that controls the rotating drums 51C to 51L in order to start acceleration of the rotating drums 51C to 51L. Specifically, for each of the spinning cylinders 51C to 51L, the spinning cylinder drive state number is 1 indicating rotation start waiting, 1 is the spinning cylinder drive pulse output counter, and 10 is the number of times of spinning cylinder drive pulse switching (during acceleration). In the symbol number (for passing position), FFH indicating that the spinning sensor has not passed, in the symbol number (for stopping position), FFH indicating that the symbol number is not set, and detection of rotation failure of the rotating cylinder The counter is set to 0. Here, description of the rotation start standby process that is performed when the rotation of the rotating cylinder starts is omitted.
<< Acceleration processing of the rotating drum >>

  Subsequently, the operation in the acceleration process of the rotating drum will be described. The acceleration process is the same for each cylinder. In the state where the rotation drive state number is 5 (acceleration), the rotation drive pulse output counter is decremented by 1 for every interruption, and when it becomes 0, the following processing is performed. First, add 1 to the counter for searching the spinning drum drive pulse data, perform excitation output with the data extracted from the spinning drum drive pulse table based on the lower 3 bits (0 to 7), and move the drum by one step. Let Subtract 1 from the number of times of rotation of the rotating drum drive pulse during acceleration, and if it is not 0, the data is extracted from the rotating drum rising pattern table based on the value and set in the rotating drum drive pulse output counter. When the number of times of rotation of the spinning drum drive pulse during acceleration becomes zero, the spinning drum driving state is set to 4 (during constant speed).

Regarding the acceleration time of the rotating cylinder, the excitation switching time from the start of rotating the rotation is defined according to the number of steps from the start of rotation. In this embodiment, the excitation switching time of the first step from the start of rotation is approximately 114 ms corresponding to 51 interrupts, approximately 70 ms corresponding to 31 interrupts in the second step, and approximately 9 ms corresponding to 4 interrupts in the third step. The fourth to seventh steps are about 6.7 ms corresponding to three interrupts, the eighth step is about 4.5 ms corresponding to two interrupts, and the ninth step reaching a constant speed is about 2.2 ms corresponding to one interrupt. ing. Furthermore, as described above, the cycle of one interrupt is 2.235 ms, and the total number of interrupts from the first step to the ninth step is 92 (= 51 + 31 + 4 + 3 + 2 + 1) times.
<< Constant speed processing of the rotating drum >>

  Subsequently, the constant speed process of the rotating drum will be described. Regarding the operation in the constant speed process of the rotating cylinder, when the rotating cylinder driving state number is 4 (during constant speed), the following process is performed for each interrupt. That is, 1 is subtracted from the spinning drum drive pulse output counter, it is confirmed that the spinning drum drive pulse output counter is 0, and 1 is again set in the spinning drum drive pulse output counter. If the counter for searching for the spinning drum drive data is an even number, 1 is added to the spinning drum rotation failure detection counter. In addition, the counter for searching the spinning drum drive pulse data is incremented by 1 and excitation output is performed using the data extracted from the spinning drum drive pulse table based on the lower 3 bits (0 to 7). Let Then, when the rotator sensor signal changes from OFF to ON and the origin position (initial position) of the rotator is detected, 4 for the step number of 1 symbol, 0 for the symbol number (for passing position), and a rotation failure detection counter for the rotator Set to 0.

  When the origin position of the rotating cylinder cannot be detected (except when the rotating sensor signal is turned from OFF to ON), 1 step number of one symbol is subtracted every interruption. When the result of subtracting the step number of one symbol is 0, the step number of one symbol is set to 16, and 1 is added to the symbol number (for passing position). Furthermore, when the result of adding 1 to the symbol number (for passing position) exceeds 20, 0 is set to the symbol number (for passing position).

Regarding the rotational speed design in the constant speed processing of the rotating cylinder, the time required for rotating the rotating cylinder for one revolution in the constant speed state is 336 steps of excitation switching at constant speed every interrupt (2.235 ms). Therefore, it becomes 750.96 ms. Therefore, the design rotation speed in the constant speed state is 79.90 rotations / minute.
<< Treatment in case of rotation failure of the cylinder >>>>

  Next, a process when the rotating drum has a rotation failure will be described. During rotation of the rotating cylinder, the passage of the initialization (index) that blocks the rotating cylinder sensor may be delayed due to rotation failure of the rotating cylinder. In such a state, the number of interrupts required for one rotation of the cylinder exceeds 336 times, and an accurate symbol position may not be detected. Therefore, the (rotating cylinder) rotation failure detection counter is used to inspect the rotation rotation failure.

  The rotation failure detection counter is incremented by 1 when the rotation drive state number is 4 (during constant speed) and the rotation drive pulse data search counter is even, and is normally counted in the range of 0 to 167. However, in the case where the passage of the initialization (index) that blocks the rotation sensor is not confirmed, the count exceeds 167 as it is. Here, the rotation of one rotation of the rotating drum is controlled by 336 steps, but in the slot machine 10, counting is performed every even number of steps, and the count number is a value of 0 to 167 as described above.

  The following processing is performed for detection of rotation failure of the rotating cylinder. That is, it is determined that there is a rotation failure when the rotation failure detection counter reaches 184 or more. In order to re-accelerate the spinning cylinder, data is set in each RWM that controls the spinning cylinder. Specifically, for each spinning cylinder, the spinning cylinder drive state number is 5 indicating acceleration, 1 is the spinning cylinder drive pulse output counter, 10 is the number of times of switching the spinning cylinder driving pulse (during acceleration), and the symbol number ( FFH indicating that the rotating cylinder sensor has not been passed (for the passing position), FFH indicating that the symbol number is not set for the symbol number (for the stop position), and 0 for the rotating rotation detection counter. Is set.

Here, the reason why the value of the rotation failure detection counter in the case of determining rotation failure is 184 or more is as follows. That is, at the time of rotation failure, the value of the rotation rotation failure detection counter becomes a value exceeding one rotation of the rotation drum (here, 167). However, if the threshold value for determining the rotation failure is “167” and the period of non-detection of the index exceeds one lap, the determination of the rotation failure is immediately performed. It may be judged that the rotating cylinder is defective. Moreover, if the threshold value of the counter value for determining the rotation failure is excessively large, the detection accuracy of the rotation failure is lowered. For this reason, the threshold value of the counter value for determining the rotation failure is set to “184” so that proper rotation failure detection can be performed.
<< Deceleration processing of the spinning cylinder during normal games >>

  Next, details of the decelerating process of the spinning cylinder during the normal game will be described. When the stop buttons 24C to 24L are received, the symbol number to be displayed is set to the symbol number (for the stop position), and 3 (deceleration start) is set to the rotating drum drive state number. In the process of starting to decelerate the spinning cylinder during normal gaming, when the spinning cylinder drive state number is 3 (deceleration start), the step number of one symbol is 13, and the symbol number (for passing position) and symbol number (stop) If (for position) matches, 2 (decelerated) is set to the rotating cylinder drive state number.

In the process of decelerating the rotating cylinder during normal gaming, when the rotating cylinder driving state number is 2 (decelerating), the excitation output is 4-phase ON and the value of the rotating cylinder driving pulse output counter is changed from 85. 1 is subtracted for each interrupt, and if approximately 190 ms (= 85 × 2.235 ms) has elapsed as a result of subtraction, 0 is set to the rotation drive state number (here, stopped), and the excitation output is set. Turn off.
<< Basic motion during acceleration of the spinning drum >>

  The basic operation of the rotating cylinder by the rotating cylinder control as described above can be schematically shown as in FIG. Here, in FIG. 59A, a malfunction (rotor rotation failure) occurs during the constant speed state of the rotating cylinder, but the operation when no defect occurs during the rotating cylinder acceleration is a basic operation. Yes. As a basic operation, it is also possible to assume an operation in which no rotation failure occurs even if rotation failure is detected in a constant speed state.

  In FIG. 59 (a), various situations in the basic operation are shown in order from top to bottom with reference numerals H1 to H9. In this basic operation, first, when the start lever 25 is operated in a state where a game can be started, a situation (H1) of a rotating cylinder starting operation is set. The situation (H1) of the rotating cylinder starting operation corresponds to the situation where the rotating CPU starting operation is detected by the main CPU 81 of the main control board 61. Furthermore, the rotating drums 51L to 51R start to rotate and shift to the acceleration state (H2), and the acceleration state processing (acceleration state processing) as described above is performed (H3).

  The control state of the main CPU 81 is also shown for the acceleration state (H2) of the rotating cylinder and the acceleration state process (H3). The rotation state acceleration state (H2) and the acceleration state processing (H3) correspond to the processing in the above-described situation where the rotation state driving state number is “5”. Then, the acceleration process for the predetermined period (here, 9 steps, 92 interrupts) is performed to reach the constant speed of the 9th step, and the acceleration state is finished (H4).

When the acceleration state ends (H4), the constant speed state (rotating cylinder constant speed state) as described above is established (H5). This constant speed state (H5) corresponds to the processing in the situation where the above-described rotating cylinder drive state number is in the constant speed of “4”. Then, the constant speed state is maintained (H6), and if a rotating cylinder rotation failure due to some factor occurs in the constant speed state (H7), the rotation failure is detected in the rotation failure detection (H8), and reacceleration is performed. The situation becomes (H9). The processing here corresponds to the various types of processing described above as <<< processing when the rotating drum causes rotation failure >>>. Note that the processing for re-acceleration may be the same as or different from the acceleration state processing (H2 to H4).
<< Rotation failure pattern 1 during rotation acceleration (measure pattern 2-1 (other than power-off)) >>

  Subsequently, the pattern 1 relating to the combination of the rotation acceleration and the rotation failure will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the condition similar to the basic operation | movement of Fig.59 (a), and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the example of FIG. 59 (b), it is assumed that a rotation failure (H7) occurs due to a factor other than power-off in a situation between execution of acceleration state processing (H3) and termination of acceleration state processing (H4). Yes. As an aspect of the rotation failure here, for example, one of the rotating cylinders during acceleration cannot be rotated in a predetermined acceleration state due to, for example, a motor step-out or other factors. As the above-mentioned “other factors”, it is difficult for the rotating cylinder to contact the display window (rotating panel display panel 28) due to errors during assembly or deterioration over time, or the rotating stepping motor is broken. Can be exemplified. It is also possible to assume fraud such as manually pressing the rotating drum as “other factors”.

  In such a case, in the situation where rotation failure (H7) has occurred, rotation failure detection (rotation failure detection) is not performed, and the remaining acceleration state processing is continued (H11). The acceleration state processing (H11) at this time corresponds to the processing in the situation where the above-described rotation drive state number is “5” during acceleration. Then, even if the rotating cylinder cannot be accelerated in the expected manner, the acceleration state processing is completed to the end (H4), and the constant speed state (the rotating constant speed state) as in the basic operation shown in FIG. ) (H5), and the constant speed state is maintained (H6). The constant speed state at this time corresponds to the processing in the situation where the above-described rotating cylinder driving state number is “4” during the constant speed, similarly to the basic operation. Further, in this situation, rotation failure detection (step-out detection processing) is performed (H8). Here, the rotation failure is detected because the rotation failure of the rotating cylinder has occurred. (H9).

  By doing so, even if a rotation failure occurs during the acceleration state, it is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed, and it is possible to reliably terminate the acceleration state. It is possible to quickly shift to a constant speed state, and it is also possible to quickly shift to major situations, such as a process for notifying the result of a lottery and a game medal payout process (including a process for storing). Can be performed.

  In addition, for example, as described above, when a predetermined number of interruptions are repeated to accelerate the rotator, the state of the rotator reaches a constant speed rotation even if not all the necessary interrupt numbers are required. Cases can also be envisaged. In other words, normally, a predetermined number of interrupts are repeatedly accelerated to a constant speed for control purposes, but depending on the situation, the constant speed may be reached within a limited acceleration time after the power is restored. In that case, rotation failure is not detected, and re-acceleration (H9) is not performed.

  In other words, when the power is restored, regardless of the actual situation of the rotating speed of the rotating cylinder, if the same number of interruptions are always executed for acceleration as in the normal time, time is wasted. However, as described above, in a situation where rotation failure (H7) has occurred, rotation failure detection (rotation failure detection) is not performed, and the remaining acceleration state processing is continued (H11). Even if the rotating cylinder cannot be accelerated, the rotating state control can proceed smoothly without spending unnecessary acceleration time by finishing the acceleration state processing to the end (H4).

  Here, it is also possible to adopt the following as a control mode during acceleration of the rotating drum. For example, regarding the processing of the main CPU 81, the processing at the time of acceleration of the rotating cylinder is performed without the situation where interruption is prohibited, and the processing at the time of stopping the rotating cylinder is performed in a situation where interruption is prohibited during a part of the period. . More specifically, at the time of acceleration of the rotating cylinder, even if any interruption occurs, the rotation of the rotating cylinder stepping motor is continued in terms of control. As a result, if there is no failure of the rotating stepping motor or contact between the rotating cylinder and the display window (rotating wheel display panel 28), even if any interruption occurs, the rotating cylinder is generated at a considerable rate. Will continue to accelerate and reach a constant speed.

Contrary to this concept of accelerating rotation, more precise and accurate control is required when stopping the rotation, so interrupts are prohibited, and the rotation control is affected by interruptions. Is prevented from decreasing. For example, if the number of steps of one symbol is 16, symbol A and symbol B are continuous, and if stop is received by the eighth step of symbol A, symbol A stops, symbol N from step 9 of symbol A When the stop is accepted by the 8th step, symbol B is assumed to be stopped. Here, when the turning stop control process is performed without performing the interrupt prohibition process, the stop acceptance process is performed by some interruption. It is considered that the process for accepting the stop is delayed from the appropriate timing, and the symbols to be stopped by stopping at the position after the 9th step are shifted by one symbol and stopped. obtain. However, by prohibiting other interrupt processing only while interrupt processing related to acceptance of stoppage is performed, it is possible to prevent the stop position of the symbol from being shifted and to perform accurate symbol stop.
<< Rotation failure pattern 2 during rotation acceleration (countermeasure pattern 2-2 (power cut off)) >>

  Next, pattern 2 (countermeasure pattern 2-2) related to the combination of rotation acceleration and rotation failure will be described with reference to FIG. The situation similar to that of the basic operation shown in FIG. 59 (a) and the rotation failure pattern 1 (measure pattern 2-1) during the rotating cylinder acceleration shown in FIG. Is omitted. In the example of FIG. 59 (c), it is assumed that a rotation failure due to the power interruption (H16) occurs in the situation between the execution of the acceleration state process (H3) and the end of the acceleration state process (H4). Yes.

  In such a case, when the acceleration state processing execution (H3) is performed, the power supply is cut off (H16), and then the power supply is restored (H17). However, in this situation, rotation failure detection (rotation failure detection) is not performed, rotation of the rotating drum is started, and acceleration state processing is executed (H11). The acceleration state processing (H11) at this time corresponds to the processing in the situation where the above-described rotation drive state number is “5” during acceleration. Further, as an execution mode of the acceleration process here, a mode in which the process in the acceleration state is executed from the beginning, a mode in which the process is executed only for the remaining time, and the like can be considered. Then, even if the rotator cannot be accelerated as planned, the acceleration state processing is finished (H4), and the basic operation shown in FIG. 59 (a) and the countermeasure pattern 2-1 shown in FIG. 59 (b) Similarly, a constant speed state (cylinder constant speed state) is reached (H5), and the constant speed state is maintained (H6). As in the case of the countermeasure pattern 2-1, the constant speed may be reached during the limited acceleration time after the power is restored depending on the situation, so that the acceleration process for the same period as the normal time is not performed again. By doing so, the rotational rotation control can be smoothly advanced without spending unnecessary acceleration time. Further, in this situation, rotation failure is detected (H8), and if a rotating drum rotation failure has occurred, rotation failure is detected and the re-acceleration state as described above is established (H9). In the above-described rotation failure detection (H8), if rotation failure is not detected, illustration is omitted, but normal rotation control is performed instead of reacceleration (H9).

By doing in this way, even if the power interruption occurs during the acceleration state, the same operational effects as the rotation failure pattern 1 (measure pattern 2-1) during the rotation acceleration described above can be obtained. Further, as soon as the power is restored, the remaining processing up to the constant speed state can be performed.
<(3) Countermeasures for failures in stop acceptance (Countermeasure pattern 3)>

Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the stop reception and the malfunction when the rotating cylinder stop operation is performed. First, “stop reception” here means that it has been detected that an operation has been performed on any of the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R in a situation where stop reception is possible as described above. Means. And here, the relationship between the troubles in the case where there are already stop receptions for the two spinning cylinders (the two spinning cylinders have already stopped) and there is a stop reception for the remaining one spinning cylinder will be described. As will be described later, the same measures can be taken for the first stop reception and the second stop reception.
<< Basic operation related to stop reception >>

  FIG. 61 (a) schematically shows a basic operation for accepting a stop when a winning combination such as a bell is won. In the example of FIG. 61 (a), as shown in the uppermost row, in a situation where a winning combination is won (J1), the rotation of the spinning cylinder is started (J2). In the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first torso 51L to the third in the symbol combination corresponding to the winning winning combination no matter which order the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R are pressed. The barrel 51R can be stopped.

  As described above, when each of the drums 51L to 51R starts to rotate, it shifts to the constant speed state through the acceleration state (J3). Then, each of the spinning cylinders 51L to 51R maintains a constant speed state (J4), and shifts to a stop-receivable state if the above-mentioned minimum game time has elapsed (J5). Further, when the player performs a pressing operation on any of the stop buttons (any one of 24L to 24R), the stop is accepted for the stop button (and the rotating cylinder) on which the stop operation is first performed. (J6).

  Here, the stop reception related to the first case where the stop operation was performed is referred to as “first cylinder stop reception”, and the stop reception related to the subsequent stop operation is sequentially referred to as “second cylinder stop reception”, “ This is referred to as “3rd torso stop reception”. In addition, the spinning cylinder related to the “first cylinder stop reception” is referred to as the “first cylinder stop reception”, and the cylinders related to the “second cylinder stop reception” and the “third cylinder rotation reception” are respectively referred to as the “first cylinder rotation reception”. This is referred to as “2 stop cylinder” or “third stop cylinder”. In addition, when there is a first-turn drum stop acceptance, the processing of the main CPU 81 (FIG. 5A) shifts to a turn-stop state for stopping the first stop drum, but in FIG. The illustration of the rotating cylinder stopped state is omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61 (a), since the winning combination is won, the symbols constituting the winning combination symbol combination are displayed for the above-mentioned first stop cylinder (J7). Subsequently, the second stop rotation acceptance (J8) displays the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the winning combination after shifting to the rotation stop state not shown for the above-mentioned second stop rotation cylinder ( J9).

  Further, the third cylinder stop acceptance (J10) causes the above-mentioned third cylinder stop to shift to the cylinder stop state (J11), and then the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the winning combination are displayed (J12). After these situations, the spinning cylinder stops (J13) in which all the spinning cylinders are stopped, and after the winning determination, the payout (including storage) of the number of game medals according to the winning combination is started (J14). . The “winning determination” here may be performed in the display determination (S66) of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14).

Further, when a game medal is paid out (J14), a predetermined payout sound is output (payout sound output). Here, for any of the first to third stop spinning cylinders, the symbols constituting the winning combination symbol display are displayed (J7, J9, J12), and the stop acceptance (J6, J8, J10). ) Is performed at the timing within the above-mentioned number of shifted frames (retraction points).
<< Rotation failure pattern 1 after stop acceptance (measure pattern 3-1 (power cut off)) >>

  Next, pattern 1 (countermeasure pattern 3-1) related to the combination of stop acceptance and rotation failure will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the condition similar to the basic operation | movement shown to Fig.61 (a), and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the example of FIG. 61 (b), it is assumed that there is a third cylinder stop acceptance (J10) and the power is cut off (J16) in the situation (J11) that has shifted to the cylinder stop state.

  In such a case, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the rotating drum moves to the stop position (J17), and the main CPU 81 executes the aforementioned power-off process (see FIG. 19) (J18). Thereafter, when the power is restored (J19), the winning combination display (described later) is displayed on the third cylinder (J12), and all the cylinders are stopped as in the above-described basic operation (FIG. 61A). The spinning cylinder stops (J13), and the payout of the number of game medals corresponding to the winning combination is started (J14).

  That is, in the slot machine 10, the payout is not performed by determining whether or not the symbol has stopped at the regular position (whether or not the actual outcome is correct). If the process in the main CPU 81 is proceeding normally without any abnormality, the process proceeds as if the appearance is correct, the symbol does not stop at the normal position, and there is a shift in the stop position of the symbol in appearance. Even if it is, the payout will be made as usual.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “winning combination display” is a situation in which the design corresponding to the winning combination is illuminated from behind by turning on or blinking the backlight LED for the spinning cylinder in a predetermined color. (Situation where backlight production is performed). In addition, the “winning winning combination display” is not limited to driving the backlight LED for the spinning cylinder, but includes, for example, a display of a winning combination using the rendering unit 18 (image display of a symbol indicating the winning winning combination), a front door, etc. It is possible to include driving of the above-described production light source of the unit 11.

  In addition to the winning combination display, it is possible to output a sound effect for notifying the winning (winning sound output). As the winning sound output, the above-mentioned payout sound output can also be used and shared with any one of them. Furthermore, the winning combination display and winning sound output performed by the sub-control board 31 can be comprehensively referred to as “a winning combination effect” or “a winning combination effect”, for example. There is also a display unit managed by the main control board 61. As this type of display unit, each display unit (acquired number display unit, replay display unit, etc.) of the operation unit 14 (FIG. 1) described above is exemplified. be able to. Of the display units managed by the main control board 61, for example, a replay display unit or a notification used in a display unit used when a winning combination is made such as a winning lamp (so-called WIN lamp). However, it can also be included in the above-mentioned “effects related to winning combination” and “winning combination effects”.

  By doing in this way, when a power interruption occurs between the third stop cylinder reception (J10) and the winning combination display (J12) of the third stop cylinder, an unexpected operation is performed after the power interruption recovery. This can be prevented and the winning combination display and the payout relating to the third stop cylinder can be surely executed.

FIG. 61 (b) shows an example in which the power interruption (J16) occurs after the third cylinder stop acceptance (J10). However, for example, the third cylinder stop acceptance information may be updated between the time when the power-off is detected and the time when the operation of the main CPU 81 is stopped. In this case, after the start of the power-off process (J18), there is a third cylinder stop reception (J10), and the power is restored based on the information of the third cylinder stop reception (J10) at this time. A situation can also be assumed in which subsequent processing is performed.
<< Rotation failure pattern 2 after stop acceptance (measure pattern 3-2 (other than power-off)) >>

  Next, a pattern (countermeasure pattern 3-2) related to a combination of stop acceptance and rotation failure will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the condition similar to the basic operation | movement shown to Fig.61 (a), and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the example of FIG. 61 (c), it is assumed that there is a third cylinder stop acceptance (J10), and a rotation failure occurs due to a factor other than the power interruption in the situation (J11) that has shifted to the cylinder stop state. (J21). As an aspect of the rotation failure here, the rotating cylinder serving as the third stop rotating cylinder is the same as in the case of the rotation failure pattern 1 (countermeasure pattern 2-1) during acceleration of the rotating cylinder. For example, it is possible to exemplify that the rotating drum cannot perform the scheduled operation due to the factor. Further, as a mode of rotation failure when the rotation of the countermeasure pattern 3-2 is stopped, the rotation speed is not constant in a situation where the rotation of the rotating drum should be performed at a constant speed, or the control brake is not effective and normal. The thing etc. which cannot decelerate can be illustrated.

  In such a case, when a rotation failure of the rotating cylinder is detected (J21), the symbol to be stopped on the effective line cannot reach the target effective line on the appearance (on the surface) (J22). ). 60 (b) and 60 (c) are for illustrating an example of a situation in which a deviation occurs in the stopped symbols. FIG. 60 (b) shows an operation (basic operation) in a normal state, and FIG. c) shows an operation in the case where a design shift occurs. 60 (b) and 60 (c) show the operation when the symbol whose symbol number is “10” is stopped.

  In the normal case, as shown on the left side of FIG. 60 (b), when the third cylinder stop operation is performed, the stop control for the cylinder stepping motor is performed, and the rotation speed of the corresponding cylinder is fixed. The state where the brake is applied after moving from the constant speed of the rotating cylinder driving state No. 4 which is the speed state to the start of deceleration of the rotating cylinder driving state No. 3 which is also the constant speed state is moved to the target position. Transition is made during the deceleration of the rotating drum drive state number 2. At this time, for example, assuming that the position corresponding to the 8th step is stopped on the effective line for the design with the symbol number “10”, the rotating cylinder is in a situation where the rotational position is several steps before the 8th step. The brake control of the stepping motor (here, all the four phases described above are turned on) is performed. Then, due to factors such as inertial force at the time of rotation, the rotating cylinder stops when it has advanced to the eighth step. When the spinning cylinder stops, the main CPU 81 holds information corresponding to the symbol of the symbol number “10” as stop symbol information, and the stop symbol on the predetermined active line that the player sees is also stored. The symbol of the original symbol number “10” is obtained.

  That is, in the normal case as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the symbol recognized as being stopped by the main CPU 81 (in this case, the symbol of symbol number “10”) and the predetermined effective line There is no wrinkle between the symbols that are actually stopped (same symbol number “10” here), and they match.

  On the other hand, in the case where the trouble shown in FIG. 60 (c) occurs, the cause of the rotation failure has occurred, and in the situation before the symbol with the symbol number “10” reaches the target stop position. The rotator has stopped. In the example of FIG. 60C, the position corresponding to the symbol of symbol number “9” (for example, the position corresponding to the 16th step of the symbol of symbol number “9”) stops on the active line. It has become.

  When the rotation failure occurs in this way, the symbol recognized as being stopped by the main CPU 81 as the control is the symbol of the symbol number “10”. It may be impossible to determine whether the symbol on the line is the symbol with symbol number “10” or a symbol other than the symbol with symbol number “10” (here, symbol with symbol number “9”). Or the symbol number “9” is stopped. And the wrinkle has arisen between the stop pattern on control, and the stop pattern on appearance, and both do not correspond. Note that the symbol with the symbol number “10” is generally located on the target effective line, but if the symbol is slightly deviated from the normal stop position, it is considered that the symbol has shifted. Can do.

  Then, in the countermeasure pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 61 (c), the third stop cylinder does not reach the planned rotation position (normal stop position) as in the example of FIG. 60 (c) described above. Even if it remains (J23), the above-mentioned winning combination display is performed by driving the backlight LED for the spinning cylinder. Here, not only the winning combination display but also the above-described wider winning combination effect may be used. Then, similarly to the above-described basic operation shown in FIG. 61 (a), the spinning cylinder stops (J13) in which all the spinning cylinders are stopped, and thereafter, the payout of game medals corresponding to the winning combination starts. (J14).

  That is, in the example of the countermeasure pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 61 (c), even if the symbol related to the winning combination is deviated from the original stop position, the winning combination display is performed in the same manner as when there is no rotation failure, and the game The medal is paid out. This is the same even when the symbol to be stopped has passed the normal stop position.

  By doing in this way, when a rotation failure occurs due to a factor other than the power interruption between the third cylinder stop reception (J10) and the winning combination display (J12) of the third cylinder stop, Without performing any action, it is possible to reliably execute the winning combination display and the game medal payout relating to the third stop cylinder. In addition, the winning combination display is performed in a state where the symbol combination is not properly configured, and control is performed so as not to be disadvantageous to the player even in the case of inconsistency in appearance (appearance or surface). Is possible.

  Here, the function of paying out when a failure occurs, such as the above-described countermeasure pattern 3-1, or the above-described countermeasure pattern 3-2, is more effective for a symbol combination with a pull-in rate of 100% (PB = 1). It is believed that there is. That is, in the slot machine 10, for the symbol combination of the so-called common bell (bell established regardless of the pressing order) and replay (replay), the first stop button 24L to the third stop button 24R are arranged in any order or The symbol arrangement of each of the drums 51L to 51R is determined so that the symbol combination is always displayed even when pressed at the timing.

  For this reason, even if the design does not stop at an appropriate position due to a malfunction such as step-out or power interruption, the situation is that the design is properly aligned for the control of the CPU 81, for example, watermelon, cherry, etc. Thus, it is more likely to occur than symbols and symbol combinations that do not have PB = 1. Therefore, for the winning combination with PB = 1, the function of the countermeasure pattern 3-1 and the function of the countermeasure pattern 3-2 are more effective than the case where the winning combination without PB = 1 is hit. It is thought that it can be utilized for.

  The countermeasure pattern 3-1 and the countermeasure pattern 3-2 have been described by taking the third stop as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same processing can be performed for the first stop and the second stop. is there. That is, even when the rotating rotation failure occurs during at least one of the first stop and the second stop, and the symbol related to the first stop or the second stop does not stop at the regular position, If the above is established, it is possible to pay out.

  Further, the countermeasures against the rotation failure at the time of stop acceptance are not limited to those exemplified as the countermeasure pattern 3-1 (FIG. 61 (b)) and the countermeasure pattern 3-2 (FIG. 61 (c)). It is also possible to adopt correspondence. For example, when the power is restored or when a rotation failure other than power interruption is detected, the rotating cylinder (here, the third stop rotating cylinder) is rotated so that the initial position (initial position) related to the rotation of the rotating cylinder can be detected. Based on the detected initial position information, it is possible to stop the spinning cylinder at a planned original stop position (position where the winning symbol is stopped on a predetermined effective line).

  Further, for example, it is conceivable to adopt a control mode in which the above-described number of shifted frames (drawing points) is not constant when power is restored. For example, information of a predetermined number of shifted frames (here, 3 symbols) is held in the RWM, and by using this information, a part of the number of shifted frames (here, 2 symbols) is used. Consider the situation where a withdrawal is taking place.

In this situation, when the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the information about the number of frames that have already been pulled in (2 symbols) is not stored, and the number of shifted frames (3 symbols) described above is newly stored. Is pulled in. As a result, a total of 5 symbols (2 symbols + 3 symbols) are drawn before and after the power is turned off. In addition, when the power interruption occurs in the situation where one symbol is being drawn in, a total of four symbols (one symbol +3 before and after the power interruption) are obtained by performing another drawing for three symbols after the power is restored. Drawing) will be performed. In this way, depending on the occurrence timing of the power interruption at the time of accepting the stop, the symbols that are stopped and displayed after the power return can be different.
<Countermeasures for defects related to winning determination (measure pattern 4)>

  Next, the relationship between the winning determination and the defect will be described. First, the “winning determination” here can be performed in the display determination (S66) of the game progress main process (see FIG. 14), like the above-described countermeasure pattern 3. Furthermore, it is assumed here that a small combination is established (here, formation of a bell of PB = 1) by “winning determination”. This “small role formation” means a situation where a winning combination is won by a lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line.

  In addition, the “problem” exemplified here includes, in addition to turning off the power, door opening, setting key operation, or game medal insertion in an unauthorized (non-regular) procedure. Among these, door opening means the above-described door opening error (an error related to door opening) that opens when the front door portion 11 is unlocked.

Furthermore, the basic operation here is a mode in which, after the small role is established (bell establishment), the game medal is paid out (including storage) when the stop button for the third stop cylinder is pressed. Can be mentioned. In this basic operation, when a game medal is paid out, a winning combination display (backlight effect) and a winning sound output are performed. Here, the pressing of the stop button related to the third stop cylinder is hereinafter referred to as “third stop pressing”. Further, releasing the stop button by releasing a finger from the stop button related to the third stop press is hereinafter referred to as “release” or “third stop press release”.
<< Corresponding to Disbursement Across Power Failures (Countermeasure Pattern 4-1) >>

As a countermeasure pattern 4-1 related to a countermeasure for a defect in the winning determination (measure pattern 4), a countermeasure for a situation in which the processing from the small role establishment to the game medal payout is performed across the power interruption may be considered. it can. Furthermore, several situations can be assumed as the countermeasure pattern 4-1.
<< Response to power interruption and power restoration while pressing the third stop (measure pattern 4-1-1A) >>

  For example, it can be considered that when a bell is hit as a small role, from the power interruption to the power restoration is performed in the state of the third stop pressing. Hereinafter, a countermeasure for such a complex situation is referred to as a “measure pattern 4-1-1A”. In addition to the situation where the player releases in a short time (less than about 0.5 seconds) by a normal pressing operation, the player continues the pressing operation longer than usual. A third stop button or a stop button sensor 49 for the third stop button (FIG. 3). A situation in which a signal indicating the pressed state is continuously output due to the malfunction in 3) can be given. FIG. 62A schematically shows the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A. In FIG. 62A, the start lever operation, the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop are shown in order from the left end in the drawing. In the example of FIG. 62 (a), the power is cut off in the state where the third stop (the third stop is pressed).

  Further, for example, the power is restored in a situation where the third stop pressing is continued without releasing the finger from the stop button, and the third stop pressing is continued even after the power is restored. After that, a third stop press release is performed, and a third stop press release is detected. In the example of FIG. 62 (a), although not shown, game medals are paid out in accordance with the third stop-press release in a situation where a winning combination such as a bell is won. In addition, it is also conceivable that the power interruption occurs in a situation where the third stop press is continued. In this case, it is possible to determine a process of executing both the winning combination display (backlight effect) and the winning sound output, executing any one, or not performing both.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform processing that prioritizes the player's profit with regard to power interruption in a very short time when a small combination is established. In addition, by not displaying the winning combination display or winning sound output, it is possible to distinguish the notification mode of the small role formation from the normal (unusual mode), and if the power interruption is intentional due to fraud Even if there is, it is possible to give the game store clerk who passes by and the surrounding players a chance to notice fraud.

  Here, as described above, in the game progress main process (FIG. 14), the all-round trunk stop check process (S64) and the game medal payout process by winning (S67) are executed. Then, as described above, in the full-cylinder stop check process (S64), it is not in a state where any one of the stop buttons 24L to 24R is continuously operated, and it is checked whether these operations are properly completed. Is called. The determination as to whether or not the third stop pressing is continued or released can be made in the all-round cylinder stop check process (S64).

  In addition, regarding this countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A, the relationship with the sound effect (3rd stop sound) which alert | reports a 3rd stop can be defined. For example, it is possible to output the above-mentioned third stop sound (perform third stop sound output) when there is a third stop-press release after the power is restored.

  Furthermore, regarding this countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A, it is also possible to define the relationship with the display performed by the effect part 18 grade | etc., For example. More specifically, for example, in the case where a power interruption occurs during AT (assist time), an assist display indicating a stop button for performing the third stop in the rendering unit 18 or the like when the power is restored. It is conceivable that the display for extinguishing is executed again.

  Furthermore, regarding this countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A, when the power is restored, regarding the above-described three-input button (MAX bet button) of the main input unit 26, a process of causing the internal LED to emit light and illuminating the button is performed. It is possible to perform processing such as not accepting the button operation of the three-sheet insertion button.

  Further, regarding this countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A, even when there is a third stop press release after the power is restored, for example, other various buttons (first stop) managed by the main CPU 81 during the third stop press continues. , Second stop, bet, start, etc., at least one of the main buttons), and even if the third stop press release is performed, the payout can be prevented from being executed. That is, it can be set as a condition for paying out that none of the main buttons is operated.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even if any one of the predetermined buttons is operated, a payout may be performed if no other predetermined button is operated. For example, when power is restored, if any stop button is being pressed and the start lever is operated, no payout is performed in this state, but all stop buttons are released in this situation. For example, it is possible to pay out. It is also conceivable that when both the start lever and one of the stop buttons are in the ON state, the payout is performed when the stop button is released.

  Further, regarding this countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A, it is conceivable that game medals are paid out without performing the third stop press release. Further, in this case, it is possible to determine a process in which no winning combination display (backlight effect) or winning sound output is executed. More specifically, the game medal payout process (S67) by winning the game progress main process (FIG. 14) is performed after the power supply return process (FIG. 21) even if the third stop is being pressed at the time of power failure recovery. For example, the payout can be performed.

Further, when an error occurs, the cause of the error is removed, and even if a cancel operation for operating the error cancel button (here, the setting / reset button 69) is performed, the payout is not performed. For example, consider the above-mentioned HE error (error when it is determined that the game medal in the game medal payout device 63 is empty) as a situation that can be combined with the third stop press, power off, and game medal payout. Can do. In other words, if a power failure occurs while the third stop is pressed, a HE error occurs while the third stop is pressed when power is restored, and there is a payout, game medals are replenished while the third stop is pressed. Even if the error factor is removed and the error cancel button (setting / reset button 69) is operated, the third stop is being pressed, so that the error is not canceled and no payout is performed. Can be illustrated.
<< Corresponding to Third Stop Press Release Before Power Return (Countermeasure Pattern 4-1-1B) >>

  Subsequently, it is also possible to determine a process for the case where there is a third stop press release while the power is off. FIG. 62B shows a countermeasure pattern 4-1-1B in the case where there is a third stop press release before the power is returned (during power-off). In this countermeasure pattern 4-1-1B, the operation until the operation of the start lever 25, the first stop, the second stop, the third stop (the third stop press), and the occurrence of the power interruption are shown in FIG. This is the same as the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A. However, there is a third stop press release while the power is turned off, and then the power is restored (power restored). In this case, although illustration is omitted, it is conceivable that payout is executed when power is restored.

  In addition, even when there is a third stop press release while the power is turned off, it is possible to determine the relationship with the third stop sound or the like. More specifically, when the third stop press release is performed while the power is turned off, the payout is performed when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), and the third stop sound can be output when the power is restored.

In the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1A and the countermeasure pattern 4-1-1B shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the relationship between the third stop and the power interruption or power restoration has been described. For example, when there is a power interruption and power restoration between the start lever operation and the first stop, or between the first stop and the second stop (or between the second stop and the third stop). It is also possible to assume a case where there is a power interruption and a power restoration. In these cases, it is possible to set a relationship similar to the relationship between the third stop and the power interruption or power restoration.
<< Correspondence to Third Stop Press, Power Off, and Door Open (Countermeasure Pattern 4-1-2) >>

  Subsequently, as another pattern of the countermeasure pattern 4-1, it is possible to consider a countermeasure (measure pattern 4-1-2) in the case where the third stop press and power-off are combined with door opening. More specifically, when the bell is hit as a small role, the power is cut off in the state of the third stop press, and when the power is restored in the state of the third stop press, the front door portion 11 is closed and the door is released. If you can think of it. In this case as well, it is possible to determine a process in which payout is executed in the same manner as the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-1, and no winning combination display or winning sound output is executed.

By doing in this way, there can exist an effect similar to the above-mentioned countermeasure pattern 4-1-1. Furthermore, even if the power failure is accompanied by unauthorized door opening, if the front door portion 11 is closed, the notification mode is merely changed to the non-normal mode without preventing the game from proceeding. It is possible to perform processing such as Here, the door opening also occurs in the above-described setting change and setting value confirmation.
≪Responding to power return and door opening after the third stop press release (Countermeasure pattern 4-1-3) >>

  Subsequently, as another pattern (measure pattern 4-1-3) of the measure pattern 4-1, consider measures to be taken when the power interruption is restored after the third stop press is released (released) after the power is turned off. Can do. More specifically, in the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-1-2, after the power is cut off in the state of the third stop press, the stop button related to the third stop press is released instead of the state of the third stop press. Then, the case where the power supply is restored can be considered. In this case, similarly to the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-1-2, even if the front door portion 11 is closed after the power is restored and the door is released, the payout is executed, and the winning combination display and the winning sound output are performed. It is possible to define a process such as not to execute.

By doing so, processing assuming more situations is performed. That is, when the power interruption is resolved in a short time such as a momentary power failure, it is relatively easy to assume a situation where the power interruption and the power restoration occur while the third stop is being pressed. However, in many cases, even if the power is cut off while the third stop is pressed, it is considered that the power returns after the stop button is released. Therefore, by adopting the countermeasure pattern 4-1-3, it is possible to deal with more situations regardless of whether or not the door opening is due to fraud.
<< Corresponding to Payout Across Set Value Confirmation (Countermeasure Pattern 4-2) >>

Next, a countermeasure (payment pattern 4-2) for payout across the set value confirmation can be considered. This “payout across the set value confirmation” represents a situation in which the processing from the small role establishment to the game medal payout is performed across the set value confirmation (set value confirmation). Furthermore, several situations can be assumed as the countermeasure pattern 4-2.
<< Correspondence to Third Stop Press and Setting Key ON (Countermeasure Pattern 4-2-1) >>

  First, as described above, the setting value confirmation is performed when the power of the slot machine 10 is ON, and the above-described door switch or setting door switch is ON, and the setting key is further displayed when the bet is not placed. By operating the setting key so that the switch 68 (FIG. 4) is turned on, the setting confirmation mode (setting value confirmation possible state) is entered. Then, as the first countermeasure (measure pattern 4-2-1) in this countermeasure pattern 4-2, for example, when the bell is hit as a small role, the power supply is not cut off in the situation of the third stop pressing. A situation where the key is turned on can be assumed.

  Here, as a condition for enabling the setting value check as described above, the setting door switch state is excluded, and the setting value can be checked if the two switches of the door switch and the setting key switch are in the ON state. You may make it become a state.

  Furthermore, although the front door part 11 shall be open | released here (door opening) here, the timing of door opening may be any before the start of 3rd stop pressing, simultaneous, and after. Then, in a situation where the third stop is pressed, it is possible to consider a case where there is a third stop release after the front door portion 11 is closed and the door opening is released (after the door is closed). .

  In this case, the setting key remains ON, but it is possible not to shift to the setting value checkable state as described above. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the game can be progressed so that the next game and subsequent games (games after the next game) can be performed. Then, when a symbol combination other than replay is displayed in the game, it is possible to shift to a setting value checkable state by opening the door. In other words, the transition to the setting value checkable state is performed when all three conditions of setting key ON, door opening, and bet setting are satisfied, and any of these is missing. For example, it is possible not to perform the transition to the setting value checkable state.

  When transitioning to the set value checkable state, it is possible to notify that the set value checkable state is in effect. Examples of the notification that the setting value can be confirmed include the display of the setting value on the setting display LED 66 (FIG. 4) as described above, and the display of characters and images on the effect section 18 (FIG. 1). be able to. Further, when the door is opened during a game (for example, during a period from betting setting to winning determination), it is possible not to shift to a setting value checkable state.

  By doing in this way, the relationship of a 3rd stop, door opening, and setting value confirmation can be determined appropriately beforehand, and it can prevent that an unexpected operation | movement is performed. Then, the set value can be confirmed when appropriate.

  Here, when switching to the setting check mode (setting value check enabled state), it was necessary for a plurality of switches to be in the ON state, but when the setting check mode was ended, only the setting key switch was checked. It has become so. That is, it can be said that the condition for ending the setting confirmation mode is relaxed compared to the condition for starting.

  Further, the following relationship can be defined for the countermeasure pattern 4-2-1. For example, in the countermeasure pattern 4-2-1, as described above, after the front door portion 11 is closed and the door opening is released (after the door is closed), there is a third stop pressing release. Was assumed. However, unlike this, it is possible to assume a case where the third stop is released in the setting value checkable state without opening the door. In this case, it is conceivable to perform payout and shift to a setting value checkable state after payout is completed.

  Furthermore, after the payout is completed, it is conceivable that the display related to the set value confirmation is not performed in the rendering unit 18 or the like, and the display is different from the setting value confirmation status (display during normal time). And the game after the next game is impossible. As an aspect in which the game after the next game is impossible, it is considered that either or both of a bet operation (betting setting operation) and a game medal insertion are impossible. In this case, it can be considered that the main CPU 81 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed. When the door is opened, it is possible to display that the set value can be confirmed by the production unit 18 or the like.

  Further, regarding the case where the third stop press release is performed in the setting value checkable state, it is considered that the payout is started when the release is performed. In this case, it is conceivable that after the payout is completed, the game can be performed while the setting key is ON without shifting to the setting value checkable state. Then, the subsequent game can be performed, but when the door is opened, it is possible to shift to a setting value checkable state.

In this example, it is assumed that, for example, when the bell is hit as a small role, the power is not turned off and the setting key is turned on in the situation of pressing the third stop. Since the setting key is ON at the time of return, the information indicating that the setting change device has been activated and won the small role is cleared, and it is possible that the game medal is not paid out after the power is returned.
<< Response to Third Stop Press and Set Value Confirmable Status Notification (Countermeasure Pattern 4-2-2) >>

  Subsequently, as the second countermeasure (countermeasure pattern 4-2-2) in the countermeasure pattern 4-2, the front door portion 11 is closed and the door is opened as in the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-2-1. Consider the case where there was a third stop release after the release. After that, unlike the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-2-1, the state shifts to a setting value checkable state, but it is possible not to notify that the setting value checkable state. About another point, it is possible to set it as the process similar to the above-mentioned countermeasure pattern 4-2-1.

  By doing in this way, the effect of the invention similar to the above-mentioned countermeasure pattern 4-2-1 can be show | played. In addition, after the release of the third stop, a notification that the set value can be checked is not issued, so that a person who tries to check the set value illegally after winning determination can be confirmed in the set value check enabled state. It is possible to keep things secret.

  In the various countermeasure patterns in the countermeasure pattern 4-1 and the various countermeasure patterns in the countermeasure pattern 4-2 described so far, processing on matters such as whether or not payout is possible when a small role is established, whether or not setting value confirmation is possible, and the like. It is targeted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to consider measures for matters such as operation of a stop button, whether or not replaying is possible, and whether or not setting values can be checked when replaying (replaying) is won.

  For example, when a power interruption occurs while the third stop is pressed in a situation where a replay is won and the power is restored, information indicating the right to play a replay game can be restored. In addition, if there is a third stop-press release when the setting key is ON when the power is restored, the bet will be placed when the replay information is restored, so it will be set even if other conditions are met. It is possible to perform processing such as preventing the value from being checked.

In addition, regarding the handling of such replays, regarding various countermeasure patterns (countermeasure pattern 4-3 to countermeasure pattern 4-9) to be described later, unless a contradiction or duplication occurs, It is possible to assume a countermeasure pattern assuming that a payout is replaced with a replay and a betting situation occurs after power is restored.
<< Response to door opening and payout (measure pattern 4-3) >>

Next, as a countermeasure pattern 4-3, a countermeasure against a situation relating to payout during opening of the front door portion 11 (front door) can be considered. For example, when a small combination is established, if there is a third stop release while the front door is open, the payout can be performed. The door opening timing may be before, at the same time as, or after the third stop press. In this case as well, it is possible to define a process for executing a winning combination display and winning sound output. By doing in this way, the relationship of a 3rd stop, door opening, and paying-out can be determined appropriately beforehand, and it can prevent that an unexpected operation | movement is performed.
<< Response to door opening and game medal insertion (measure pattern 4-4) >>

As a situation related to the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-3, a situation relating to the insertion of a game medal while the front door portion 11 (front door) is open can be considered. For example, when a game medal is inserted while the front door is open, it is possible to detect the inserted game medal as usual and to count the game medals or to turn on the insertion display LED. . Furthermore, in this case, it is possible to output a sound (output a throwing sound) with the detection of a game medal. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible not to output the input sound with the detection of the game medal. By doing in this way, the relationship between door opening and game medal insertion can be appropriately determined in advance, and unexpected operations can be prevented.
<Other measures related to measure pattern 4>
<< Corresponding to Payout Before Release of Third Stop Press (Measure Pattern 4-5) >>

  In relation to the countermeasure pattern 4 as described above, for example, the following countermeasures can be taken. First, in the main flow at the time of power recovery (game progress main process (see FIG. 14)), it is possible to execute the payout process before confirming the presence or absence of the release of the third stop press.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the game progress main process, a process for checking all-cylinder stop (S64) and a process for paying out game medals by winning (S67) are executed. Then, as described above, in the full-cylinder stop check process (S64), it is not in a state where any one of the stop buttons 24L to 24R is continuously operated, and it is checked whether these operations are properly completed. Is called. For this reason, for example, the execution sequence of the all-round torso stop check process (S64) and the game medal payout process by winning (S67) is changed, and the game medal payout process by winning (S67) By performing before the check process (S64), it is possible to execute the payout process before confirming whether or not the third stop press release has been performed.

  In this way, when the power is restored, the payout process is given priority over the check of the stop button, and the payout can be surely executed regardless of the state of the third stop press. And it can prevent that an unexpected operation | movement is performed regarding the operation | movement accompanying a 3rd stop press release.

In this case, in the case of normal payout with no defects, the winning combination display and the output of the payout sound are both executed, while the third stop button is pressed during power-off (or before power-off). When the third stop button is released after pressing down and the power is restored, it is possible not to execute the winning combination display and the output of the payout sound.
<< Response to the door opening after the third stop press release (Countermeasure Pattern 4-6) >>

  Subsequently, in relation to the above-described countermeasure pattern 4-2-1, after the release of the third stop button, even if the above-described setting key is ON, the subsequent game can be continued. It is possible. In this case, even if the game start condition including the insertion of a game medal is satisfied, the main CPU 81 can not shift to the setting checkable state.

  More specifically, for example, after a prescribed number (three in this case) of game medals are inserted, the reels (rotating cylinders 51L to 51R) start rotating by the operation of the start lever 25, and the stop buttons 24L to 24R are operated. The corresponding reel stops. Furthermore, in games other than the establishment of replay, when the door is opened after the release of the third stop button, the setting key can be turned on to shift to a setting value checkable state. To. On the other hand, in a game where the replay is established, after the release of the third stop button, the door is opened and the door is opened, and even if the setting key is turned on, the transition to the setting value checkable state is prevented. It is possible.

By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent an unexpected operation from being performed regarding the operation involving the third stop-press release and the door opening.
<< Response to door opening and payout sound (measure pattern 4-7) >>

Next, the relationship between the door opening and the payout sound will be described. Regarding the relationship between the door opening and the payout sound, it is possible to pay out game medals and output the payout sound even when the door is open. However, when the notification sound (door opening notification sound) when the door opening is detected is output, if the door opening notification sound and the payout sound compete (overlap), the payout sound is not output. It is possible. Further, although the payout sound is output, the volume of the payout sound can be set so as not to be heard. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an unexpected operation | movement is performed regarding the operation | movement with a door opening and a payout sound.
<< Pattern 1 related to door opening notification sound and payout sound (measure pattern 4-7-1) >>

  FIG. 63A illustrates countermeasure pattern 1 (measure pattern 4-7-1) related to the combination of the door opening and the payout sound as described above. The upper part of FIG. 63A shows a normal operation (basic operation). Further, the middle part of FIG. 63A shows the mutual relationship when the payout occurs before the door is opened, and the lower part shows the mutual relation when the payout occurs after the door is opened.

  In the basic operation shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 (a), the front door portion 11 (front door) remains closed (not opened), and the door opening notification sound indicated by “Sound 1” is output. Not done. In such a situation, when there is a third stop press release, a payout sound indicated by “Sound 2” is output.

  On the other hand, in the case where payout occurs before the door is opened as shown in the middle part of FIG. 63 (a), there is a third stop-press release in a situation where the front door portion 11 (front door) is closed. As shown in “Sound 2”, a payout sound is output. For example, if the door is opened during the output of the payout sound, the door opening notification sound is output as indicated by “Sound 1”.

In the case where payout occurs after the door is opened as shown in the lower part of FIG. 63 (a), there is no output of the payout sound as shown by "Sound 2" at the door opening stage, and "Sound 1" is shown. The door opening notification sound is output. Here, in the drawing, the door opening notification sound is output at a predetermined timing after the door is opened. Then, when there is a third stop press release in the door open state, a payout sound is output as indicated by “Sound 2”. Here, there is a third stop press release during the output of the door opening notification sound, and the payout sound is output during the output of the door opening notification sound. Then, the output of the payout sound is finished after the output of the door opening notification sound is finished.
<< Pattern 2 related to door opening notification sound and payout sound (measure pattern 4-7-2) >>

  Next, FIG. 63B shows another example (measure pattern 4-7-2) between the door opening and the payout sound. FIG. 63B shows an example of a countermeasure pattern that prevents the door opening notification sound and the payout sound from competing (overlapping) as described above. The upper part of FIG. 63A shows a normal operation (basic operation). This basic operation is the same as that shown in FIG. 63 (b) shows the interrelationship when the payout occurs before the door is opened, as shown in FIG. 63 (a). The lower line shows the payout after the door is opened. It is a mutual relationship.

  In the case where payout occurs before the door is opened as shown in the middle of FIG. 63 (b), “front door”, “sound 1”, and “third stop press release” are as shown in FIG. 63 (a). It is the same as that shown. However, the “sound 2” payout sound that accompanies the third stop-press release is terminated when the output of the door opening notification sound accompanying the subsequent door opening is started.

  Further, in the case where payout occurs after the door is opened as shown in the lower part of FIG. 63 (b), “front door”, “sound 1”, and “third stop press release” are described above with reference to FIG. 63 (a). It is the same as that shown in. However, the payout sound of “Sound 2” accompanying the third stop press release is started when the output of the door opening notification sound accompanying the subsequent door opening ends.

As for measures to prevent the door opening notification sound and the payout sound from competing, for example, in a quiet period between intermittent messages such as `` door is open '' in the door opening notification sound, It is also possible to output a payout sound. Further, in order to prevent the door opening notification sound and the payout sound from competing with each other, it may be possible to measure the output period of the door opening notification sound and output the payout sound based on the time measurement result.
<< Responding to Door Opening and Game Medal Clearing (Measure Pattern 4-8) >>

Subsequently, when the game medal is cleared while the door is opened, it is possible to pay out when the clearing button is pressed in the main input unit 26 (FIG. 1), and after the completion of the clearing, the demonstration unit 18 can display a demonstration. It is. It is also conceivable that even if the settlement button is pressed, no payout is performed while the door is open. By doing in this way, the relationship between door opening and game medal clearing can be appropriately determined in advance, and unexpected operations can be prevented.
<< Response to the combination of door opening and input / release / clearing (measure pattern 4-9) >>

  Next, various possible modes of combinations of door opening and input / release / clearing will be described. In addition, since it aims at the comprehensive description about various composite aspects here, what was demonstrated so far is included in part. In addition, here, when a game medal is inserted while the door is opened, when a game medal is paid out while the door is opened, and when a game medal is cleared while the door is opened, processing in each case An aspect is demonstrated.

  First, when a game medal is inserted while the door is open, it is possible to output a sound input and detect the inserted game medal (recognize the game medal). Furthermore, when a game medal is paid out while the door is open, it is possible to output a payout sound and start paying out with the release of the third stop press. If a game medal is settled while the door is open, no sound is output and payout can be started when the clearing button is pressed. It is conceivable to configure a slot machine that combines these processing modes.

  In addition, when a game medal is inserted while the door is open, the inserted coin may not be recognized. Furthermore, if a game medal is paid out while the door is open, it is possible not to pay out. Furthermore, it is possible not to pay out if a game medal is settled while the door is open.

  It is also possible to take measures against the case where the game medal settlement and the set value confirmation are combined. For example, while the set value is being checked (when the setting key is ON), payout is not performed even if the clearing button is pressed. In such a situation, when the third stop button is released, the payout is performed, and then the state can be shifted to the set value check mode (set value check enabled state). That is, normally, while the set value confirmation is possible, the payout is not performed even if the settlement button is pressed. However, if the third stop is being pressed, the payout is possible because it is before the transition to the set value confirmation possible state. It is possible to do. In this case, even when the setting key is ON, there are cases where payout is performed and cases where payout is not performed. As a result, even if the setting key switch is turned on while the third stop button is being pressed, since the payout occurs when the third stop button is released, the setting key switch is turned on due to a failure or the like. However, a payout can be given so that there is no disadvantage to the player.

  The present invention has been described above by taking the slot machine 10 as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to, for example, other various slot machines. The present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can be applied to other types of gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to, for example, a casino machine installed in a casino facility.

10 slot machine, 11 front door, 12 housing, 15 cylinder display,
16 game medal payout outlet, 17 saucer, 18 direction section, 21 game medal slot,
24L-24R 1st stop button-3rd stop button, 25 start lever,
31 Sub control board, 51L-51R 1st cylinder-3rd cylinder, 61 Main control board,
62 setting unit, 68 setting key switch, 81 main CPU.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides game control means (such as a main control board) for controlling the progress of a game,
Display control means (such as a sub control board) for controlling the effect display related to the game;
A rotatable cylinder (first to third cylinder, etc.) ,
The control state of the rotating cylinder is at least an acceleration state (a state in which control is performed for acceleration) and a constant speed state (a state in which control for rotating at a constant speed is performed) that shifts from the acceleration state. There is,
The game control means includes
Acceleration processing for accelerating the spinning cylinder in the acceleration state can be executed for a predetermined period (such as 2.235 ms × 92 interruption period), and a constant speed for rotating the spinning cylinder at a constant speed in the constant speed state Make the process executable,
After the power interruption occurs during the predetermined period, the power is restored, the acceleration process is executed for the remaining time of the predetermined period, the constant speed process is performed, and the rotation failure is performed under the condition where the constant speed process is performed. Is detected (such as in the case of H8), acceleration processing for accelerating the revolving cylinder again (such as reacceleration of H9) is executed,
Freeze processing (freeze production etc.) can be performed for a predetermined time when starting a predetermined gaming state advantageous to the player,
The display control means can display an effect (special state start display, special state end display, etc.) based on display data as an effect to be displayed when the freeze process is being performed,
The display data includes at least first display data and second display data,
The freeze process performed until the power was turned off in the situation where the power was restored after the power was cut off during the freeze process and during the display of the effect based on the first display data (the effect in the special state start display) The display control means displays an effect based on the second display data (effect in the start-up end display).

Claims (1)

Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Display control means for controlling the effect display related to the game,
The game control means is capable of performing a freeze process for a predetermined time when starting a predetermined gaming state advantageous to the player,
The display control means can display an effect based on display data as an effect to be displayed when the freeze process is being performed,
The display data includes at least first display data and second display data,
In the situation where the power supply is restored after the power interruption occurs during the display of the effect based on the first display data during the freeze process, the freeze process performed until the power supply is interrupted is continued and the display is performed. The control means displays an effect based on the second display data.

Images